UbiquitousOS
/
OpenCloudOS-Kernel
mirror of https://gitee.com/OpenCloudOS/OpenCloudOS-Kernel.git
11
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Projects Releases Wiki Activity

Merge git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/davem/net

This commit is contained in:
David S. Miller 2017-07-21 03:38:43 +01:00
parent 760446f967 96080f6977
commit 7a68ada6ec
1200 changed files with 38078 additions and 18793 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

6
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mtd
View File

@ -229,6 +229,6 @@ KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
Description:
For a partition, the offset of that partition from the start
of the master device in bytes. This attribute is absent on
main devices, so it can be used to distinguish between
partitions and devices that aren't partitions.
of the parent (another partition or a flash device) in bytes.
This attribute is absent on flash devices, so it can be used
to distinguish them from partitions.

153
Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
View File

@ -1,22 +1,24 @@
Dynamic DMA mapping Guide
=========================
=========================
Dynamic DMA mapping Guide
=========================
David S. Miller <davem@redhat.com>
Richard Henderson <rth@cygnus.com>
Jakub Jelinek <jakub@redhat.com>
:Author: David S. Miller <davem@redhat.com>
:Author: Richard Henderson <rth@cygnus.com>
:Author: Jakub Jelinek <jakub@redhat.com>
This is a guide to device driver writers on how to use the DMA API
with example pseudo-code. For a concise description of the API, see
DMA-API.txt.
CPU and DMA addresses
CPU and DMA addresses
=====================
There are several kinds of addresses involved in the DMA API, and it's
important to understand the differences.
The kernel normally uses virtual addresses. Any address returned by
kmalloc(), vmalloc(), and similar interfaces is a virtual address and can
be stored in a "void *".
be stored in a ``void *``.
The virtual memory system (TLB, page tables, etc.) translates virtual
addresses to CPU physical addresses, which are stored as "phys_addr_t" or
@ -37,7 +39,7 @@ be restricted to a subset of that space. For example, even if a system
supports 64-bit addresses for main memory and PCI BARs, it may use an IOMMU
so devices only need to use 32-bit DMA addresses.
Here's a picture and some examples:
Here's a picture and some examples::
CPU CPU Bus
Virtual Physical Address
@ -98,15 +100,16 @@ microprocessor architecture. You should use the DMA API rather than the
bus-specific DMA API, i.e., use the dma_map_*() interfaces rather than the
pci_map_*() interfaces.
First of all, you should make sure
First of all, you should make sure::
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
is in your driver, which provides the definition of dma_addr_t. This type
can hold any valid DMA address for the platform and should be used
everywhere you hold a DMA address returned from the DMA mapping functions.
What memory is DMA'able?
What memory is DMA'able?
========================
The first piece of information you must know is what kernel memory can
be used with the DMA mapping facilities. There has been an unwritten
@ -143,7 +146,8 @@ What about block I/O and networking buffers? The block I/O and
networking subsystems make sure that the buffers they use are valid
for you to DMA from/to.
DMA addressing limitations
DMA addressing limitations
==========================
Does your device have any DMA addressing limitations? For example, is
your device only capable of driving the low order 24-bits of address?
@ -166,7 +170,7 @@ style to do this even if your device holds the default setting,
because this shows that you did think about these issues wrt. your
device.
The query is performed via a call to dma_set_mask_and_coherent():
The query is performed via a call to dma_set_mask_and_coherent()::
int dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
@ -175,12 +179,12 @@ If you have some special requirements, then the following two separate
queries can be used instead:
The query for streaming mappings is performed via a call to
dma_set_mask():
dma_set_mask()::
int dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
The query for consistent allocations is performed via a call
to dma_set_coherent_mask():
to dma_set_coherent_mask()::
int dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
@ -209,7 +213,7 @@ of your driver reports that performance is bad or that the device is not
even detected, you can ask them for the kernel messages to find out
exactly why.
The standard 32-bit addressing device would do something like this:
The standard 32-bit addressing device would do something like this::
if (dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n");
@ -225,7 +229,7 @@ than 64-bit addressing. For example, Sparc64 PCI SAC addressing is
more efficient than DAC addressing.
Here is how you would handle a 64-bit capable device which can drive
all 64-bits when accessing streaming DMA:
all 64-bits when accessing streaming DMA::
int using_dac;
@ -239,7 +243,7 @@ all 64-bits when accessing streaming DMA:
}
If a card is capable of using 64-bit consistent allocations as well,
the case would look like this:
the case would look like this::
int using_dac, consistent_using_dac;
@ -260,7 +264,7 @@ uses consistent allocations, one would have to check the return value from
dma_set_coherent_mask().
Finally, if your device can only drive the low 24-bits of
address you might do something like:
address you might do something like::
if (dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(24))) {
dev_warn(dev, "mydev: 24-bit DMA addressing not available\n");
@ -280,7 +284,7 @@ only provide the functionality which the machine can handle. It
is important that the last call to dma_set_mask() be for the
most specific mask.
Here is pseudo-code showing how this might be done:
Here is pseudo-code showing how this might be done::
#define PLAYBACK_ADDRESS_BITS DMA_BIT_MASK(32)
#define RECORD_ADDRESS_BITS DMA_BIT_MASK(24)
@ -308,7 +312,8 @@ A sound card was used as an example here because this genre of PCI
devices seems to be littered with ISA chips given a PCI front end,
and thus retaining the 16MB DMA addressing limitations of ISA.
Types of DMA mappings
Types of DMA mappings
=====================
There are two types of DMA mappings:
@ -336,12 +341,14 @@ There are two types of DMA mappings:
to memory is immediately visible to the device, and vice
versa. Consistent mappings guarantee this.
IMPORTANT: Consistent DMA memory does not preclude the usage of
proper memory barriers. The CPU may reorder stores to
.. important::
Consistent DMA memory does not preclude the usage of
proper memory barriers. The CPU may reorder stores to
consistent memory just as it may normal memory. Example:
if it is important for the device to see the first word
of a descriptor updated before the second, you must do
something like:
something like::
desc->word0 = address;
wmb();
@ -377,16 +384,17 @@ Also, systems with caches that aren't DMA-coherent will work better
when the underlying buffers don't share cache lines with other data.
Using Consistent DMA mappings.
Using Consistent DMA mappings
=============================
To allocate and map large (PAGE_SIZE or so) consistent DMA regions,
you should do:
you should do::
dma_addr_t dma_handle;
cpu_addr = dma_alloc_coherent(dev, size, &dma_handle, gfp);
where device is a struct device *. This may be called in interrupt
where device is a ``struct device *``. This may be called in interrupt
context with the GFP_ATOMIC flag.
Size is the length of the region you want to allocate, in bytes.
@ -415,7 +423,7 @@ exists (for example) to guarantee that if you allocate a chunk
which is smaller than or equal to 64 kilobytes, the extent of the
buffer you receive will not cross a 64K boundary.
To unmap and free such a DMA region, you call:
To unmap and free such a DMA region, you call::
dma_free_coherent(dev, size, cpu_addr, dma_handle);
@ -430,7 +438,7 @@ a kmem_cache, but it uses dma_alloc_coherent(), not __get_free_pages().
Also, it understands common hardware constraints for alignment,
like queue heads needing to be aligned on N byte boundaries.
Create a dma_pool like this:
Create a dma_pool like this::
struct dma_pool *pool;
@ -444,7 +452,7 @@ pass 0 for boundary; passing 4096 says memory allocated from this pool
must not cross 4KByte boundaries (but at that time it may be better to
use dma_alloc_coherent() directly instead).
Allocate memory from a DMA pool like this:
Allocate memory from a DMA pool like this::
cpu_addr = dma_pool_alloc(pool, flags, &dma_handle);
@ -452,7 +460,7 @@ flags are GFP_KERNEL if blocking is permitted (not in_interrupt nor
holding SMP locks), GFP_ATOMIC otherwise. Like dma_alloc_coherent(),
this returns two values, cpu_addr and dma_handle.
Free memory that was allocated from a dma_pool like this:
Free memory that was allocated from a dma_pool like this::
dma_pool_free(pool, cpu_addr, dma_handle);
@ -460,7 +468,7 @@ where pool is what you passed to dma_pool_alloc(), and cpu_addr and
dma_handle are the values dma_pool_alloc() returned. This function
may be called in interrupt context.
Destroy a dma_pool by calling:
Destroy a dma_pool by calling::
dma_pool_destroy(pool);
@ -468,11 +476,12 @@ Make sure you've called dma_pool_free() for all memory allocated
from a pool before you destroy the pool. This function may not
be called in interrupt context.
DMA Direction
DMA Direction
=============
The interfaces described in subsequent portions of this document
take a DMA direction argument, which is an integer and takes on
one of the following values:
one of the following values::
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL
DMA_TO_DEVICE
@ -521,14 +530,15 @@ packets, map/unmap them with the DMA_TO_DEVICE direction
specifier. For receive packets, just the opposite, map/unmap them
with the DMA_FROM_DEVICE direction specifier.
Using Streaming DMA mappings
Using Streaming DMA mappings
============================
The streaming DMA mapping routines can be called from interrupt
context. There are two versions of each map/unmap, one which will
map/unmap a single memory region, and one which will map/unmap a
scatterlist.
To map a single region, you do:
To map a single region, you do::
struct device *dev = &my_dev->dev;
dma_addr_t dma_handle;
@ -545,7 +555,7 @@ To map a single region, you do:
goto map_error_handling;
}
and to unmap it:
and to unmap it::
dma_unmap_single(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
@ -563,7 +573,7 @@ Using CPU pointers like this for single mappings has a disadvantage:
you cannot reference HIGHMEM memory in this way. Thus, there is a
map/unmap interface pair akin to dma_{map,unmap}_single(). These
interfaces deal with page/offset pairs instead of CPU pointers.
Specifically:
Specifically::
struct device *dev = &my_dev->dev;
dma_addr_t dma_handle;
@ -593,7 +603,7 @@ error as outlined under the dma_map_single() discussion.
You should call dma_unmap_page() when the DMA activity is finished, e.g.,
from the interrupt which told you that the DMA transfer is done.
With scatterlists, you map a region gathered from several regions by:
With scatterlists, you map a region gathered from several regions by::
int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
struct scatterlist *sg;
@ -617,16 +627,18 @@ Then you should loop count times (note: this can be less than nents times)
and use sg_dma_address() and sg_dma_len() macros where you previously
accessed sg->address and sg->length as shown above.
To unmap a scatterlist, just call:
To unmap a scatterlist, just call::
dma_unmap_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
Again, make sure DMA activity has already finished.
PLEASE NOTE: The 'nents' argument to the dma_unmap_sg call must be
the _same_ one you passed into the dma_map_sg call,
it should _NOT_ be the 'count' value _returned_ from the
dma_map_sg call.
.. note::
The 'nents' argument to the dma_unmap_sg call must be
the _same_ one you passed into the dma_map_sg call,
it should _NOT_ be the 'count' value _returned_ from the
dma_map_sg call.
Every dma_map_{single,sg}() call should have its dma_unmap_{single,sg}()
counterpart, because the DMA address space is a shared resource and
@ -638,11 +650,11 @@ properly in order for the CPU and device to see the most up-to-date and
correct copy of the DMA buffer.
So, firstly, just map it with dma_map_{single,sg}(), and after each DMA
transfer call either:
transfer call either::
dma_sync_single_for_cpu(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
or:
or::
dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
@ -650,17 +662,19 @@ as appropriate.
Then, if you wish to let the device get at the DMA area again,
finish accessing the data with the CPU, and then before actually
giving the buffer to the hardware call either:
giving the buffer to the hardware call either::
dma_sync_single_for_device(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
or:
or::
dma_sync_sg_for_device(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
as appropriate.
PLEASE NOTE: The 'nents' argument to dma_sync_sg_for_cpu() and
.. note::
The 'nents' argument to dma_sync_sg_for_cpu() and
dma_sync_sg_for_device() must be the same passed to
dma_map_sg(). It is _NOT_ the count returned by
dma_map_sg().
@ -671,7 +685,7 @@ dma_map_*() call till dma_unmap_*(), then you don't have to call the
dma_sync_*() routines at all.
Here is pseudo code which shows a situation in which you would need
to use the dma_sync_*() interfaces.
to use the dma_sync_*() interfaces::
my_card_setup_receive_buffer(struct my_card *cp, char *buffer, int len)
{
@ -747,7 +761,8 @@ is planned to completely remove virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() as
they are entirely deprecated. Some ports already do not provide these
as it is impossible to correctly support them.
Handling Errors
Handling Errors
===============
DMA address space is limited on some architectures and an allocation
failure can be determined by:
@ -755,7 +770,7 @@ failure can be determined by:
- checking if dma_alloc_coherent() returns NULL or dma_map_sg returns 0
- checking the dma_addr_t returned from dma_map_single() and dma_map_page()
by using dma_mapping_error():
by using dma_mapping_error()::
dma_addr_t dma_handle;
@ -773,7 +788,8 @@ failure can be determined by:
of a multiple page mapping attempt. These example are applicable to
dma_map_page() as well.
Example 1:
Example 1::
dma_addr_t dma_handle1;
dma_addr_t dma_handle2;
@ -802,8 +818,12 @@ Example 1:
dma_unmap_single(dma_handle1);
map_error_handling1:
Example 2: (if buffers are allocated in a loop, unmap all mapped buffers when
mapping error is detected in the middle)
Example 2::
/*
* if buffers are allocated in a loop, unmap all mapped buffers when
* mapping error is detected in the middle
*/
dma_addr_t dma_addr;
dma_addr_t array[DMA_BUFFERS];
@ -846,7 +866,8 @@ SCSI drivers must return SCSI_MLQUEUE_HOST_BUSY if the DMA mapping
fails in the queuecommand hook. This means that the SCSI subsystem
passes the command to the driver again later.
Optimizing Unmap State Space Consumption
Optimizing Unmap State Space Consumption
========================================
On many platforms, dma_unmap_{single,page}() is simply a nop.
Therefore, keeping track of the mapping address and length is a waste
@ -858,7 +879,7 @@ Actually, instead of describing the macros one by one, we'll
transform some example code.
1) Use DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_{ADDR,LEN} in state saving structures.
Example, before:
Example, before::
struct ring_state {
struct sk_buff *skb;
@ -866,7 +887,7 @@ transform some example code.
__u32 len;
};
after:
after::
struct ring_state {
struct sk_buff *skb;
@ -875,23 +896,23 @@ transform some example code.
};
2) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len}_set() to set these values.
Example, before:
Example, before::
ringp->mapping = FOO;
ringp->len = BAR;
after:
after::
dma_unmap_addr_set(ringp, mapping, FOO);
dma_unmap_len_set(ringp, len, BAR);
3) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len}() to access these values.
Example, before:
Example, before::
dma_unmap_single(dev, ringp->mapping, ringp->len,
DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
after:
after::
dma_unmap_single(dev,
dma_unmap_addr(ringp, mapping),
@ -902,7 +923,8 @@ It really should be self-explanatory. We treat the ADDR and LEN
separately, because it is possible for an implementation to only
need the address in order to perform the unmap operation.
Platform Issues
Platform Issues
===============
If you are just writing drivers for Linux and do not maintain
an architecture port for the kernel, you can safely skip down
@ -928,12 +950,13 @@ to "Closing".
alignment constraints (e.g. the alignment constraints about 64-bit
objects).
Closing
Closing
=======
This document, and the API itself, would not be in its current
form without the feedback and suggestions from numerous individuals.
We would like to specifically mention, in no particular order, the
following people:
following people::
Russell King <rmk@arm.linux.org.uk>
Leo Dagum <dagum@barrel.engr.sgi.com>

562
Documentation/DMA-API.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
Dynamic DMA mapping using the generic device
============================================
============================================
Dynamic DMA mapping using the generic device
============================================
James E.J. Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
:Author: James E.J. Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
This document describes the DMA API. For a more gentle introduction
of the API (and actual examples), see Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt.
@ -12,10 +13,10 @@ machines. Unless you know that your driver absolutely has to support
non-consistent platforms (this is usually only legacy platforms) you
should only use the API described in part I.
Part I - dma_ API
-------------------------------------
Part I - dma_API
----------------
To get the dma_ API, you must #include <linux/dma-mapping.h>. This
To get the dma_API, you must #include <linux/dma-mapping.h>. This
provides dma_addr_t and the interfaces described below.
A dma_addr_t can hold any valid DMA address for the platform. It can be
@ -26,9 +27,11 @@ address space and the DMA address space.
Part Ia - Using large DMA-coherent buffers
------------------------------------------
void *
dma_alloc_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
::
void *
dma_alloc_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
Consistent memory is memory for which a write by either the device or
the processor can immediately be read by the processor or device
@ -51,20 +54,24 @@ consolidate your requests for consistent memory as much as possible.
The simplest way to do that is to use the dma_pool calls (see below).
The flag parameter (dma_alloc_coherent() only) allows the caller to
specify the GFP_ flags (see kmalloc()) for the allocation (the
specify the ``GFP_`` flags (see kmalloc()) for the allocation (the
implementation may choose to ignore flags that affect the location of
the returned memory, like GFP_DMA).
void *
dma_zalloc_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
::
void *
dma_zalloc_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
Wraps dma_alloc_coherent() and also zeroes the returned memory if the
allocation attempt succeeded.
void
dma_free_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
dma_addr_t dma_handle)
::
void
dma_free_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
dma_addr_t dma_handle)
Free a region of consistent memory you previously allocated. dev,
size and dma_handle must all be the same as those passed into
@ -78,7 +85,7 @@ may only be called with IRQs enabled.
Part Ib - Using small DMA-coherent buffers
------------------------------------------
To get this part of the dma_ API, you must #include <linux/dmapool.h>
To get this part of the dma_API, you must #include <linux/dmapool.h>
Many drivers need lots of small DMA-coherent memory regions for DMA
descriptors or I/O buffers. Rather than allocating in units of a page
@ -88,6 +95,8 @@ not __get_free_pages(). Also, they understand common hardware constraints
for alignment, like queue heads needing to be aligned on N-byte boundaries.
::
struct dma_pool *
dma_pool_create(const char *name, struct device *dev,
size_t size, size_t align, size_t alloc);
@ -103,16 +112,21 @@ in bytes, and must be a power of two). If your device has no boundary
crossing restrictions, pass 0 for alloc; passing 4096 says memory allocated
from this pool must not cross 4KByte boundaries.
::
void *dma_pool_zalloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t mem_flags,
dma_addr_t *handle)
void *
dma_pool_zalloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t mem_flags,
dma_addr_t *handle)
Wraps dma_pool_alloc() and also zeroes the returned memory if the
allocation attempt succeeded.
void *dma_pool_alloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t gfp_flags,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle);
::
void *
dma_pool_alloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t gfp_flags,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle);
This allocates memory from the pool; the returned memory will meet the
size and alignment requirements specified at creation time. Pass
@ -122,16 +136,20 @@ blocking. Like dma_alloc_coherent(), this returns two values: an
address usable by the CPU, and the DMA address usable by the pool's
device.
::
void dma_pool_free(struct dma_pool *pool, void *vaddr,
dma_addr_t addr);
void
dma_pool_free(struct dma_pool *pool, void *vaddr,
dma_addr_t addr);
This puts memory back into the pool. The pool is what was passed to
dma_pool_alloc(); the CPU (vaddr) and DMA addresses are what
were returned when that routine allocated the memory being freed.
::
void dma_pool_destroy(struct dma_pool *pool);
void
dma_pool_destroy(struct dma_pool *pool);
dma_pool_destroy() frees the resources of the pool. It must be
called in a context which can sleep. Make sure you've freed all allocated
@ -141,32 +159,40 @@ memory back to the pool before you destroy it.
Part Ic - DMA addressing limitations
------------------------------------
int
dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
::
int
dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device
streaming and coherent DMA mask parameters if it is.
Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
int
dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
::
int
dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device
parameters if it is.
Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
int
dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
::
int
dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device
parameters if it is.
Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
u64
dma_get_required_mask(struct device *dev)
::
u64
dma_get_required_mask(struct device *dev)
This API returns the mask that the platform requires to
operate efficiently. Usually this means the returned mask
@ -182,94 +208,107 @@ call to set the mask to the value returned.
Part Id - Streaming DMA mappings
--------------------------------
dma_addr_t
dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
::
dma_addr_t
dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Maps a piece of processor virtual memory so it can be accessed by the
device and returns the DMA address of the memory.
The direction for both APIs may be converted freely by casting.
However the dma_ API uses a strongly typed enumerator for its
However the dma_API uses a strongly typed enumerator for its
direction:
======================= =============================================
DMA_NONE no direction (used for debugging)
DMA_TO_DEVICE data is going from the memory to the device
DMA_FROM_DEVICE data is coming from the device to the memory
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL direction isn't known
======================= =============================================
Notes: Not all memory regions in a machine can be mapped by this API.
Further, contiguous kernel virtual space may not be contiguous as
physical memory. Since this API does not provide any scatter/gather
capability, it will fail if the user tries to map a non-physically
contiguous piece of memory. For this reason, memory to be mapped by
this API should be obtained from sources which guarantee it to be
physically contiguous (like kmalloc).
.. note::
Further, the DMA address of the memory must be within the
dma_mask of the device (the dma_mask is a bit mask of the
addressable region for the device, i.e., if the DMA address of
the memory ANDed with the dma_mask is still equal to the DMA
address, then the device can perform DMA to the memory). To
ensure that the memory allocated by kmalloc is within the dma_mask,
the driver may specify various platform-dependent flags to restrict
the DMA address range of the allocation (e.g., on x86, GFP_DMA
guarantees to be within the first 16MB of available DMA addresses,
as required by ISA devices).
Not all memory regions in a machine can be mapped by this API.
Further, contiguous kernel virtual space may not be contiguous as
physical memory. Since this API does not provide any scatter/gather
capability, it will fail if the user tries to map a non-physically
contiguous piece of memory. For this reason, memory to be mapped by
this API should be obtained from sources which guarantee it to be
physically contiguous (like kmalloc).
Note also that the above constraints on physical contiguity and
dma_mask may not apply if the platform has an IOMMU (a device which
maps an I/O DMA address to a physical memory address). However, to be
portable, device driver writers may *not* assume that such an IOMMU
exists.
Further, the DMA address of the memory must be within the
dma_mask of the device (the dma_mask is a bit mask of the
addressable region for the device, i.e., if the DMA address of
the memory ANDed with the dma_mask is still equal to the DMA
address, then the device can perform DMA to the memory). To
ensure that the memory allocated by kmalloc is within the dma_mask,
the driver may specify various platform-dependent flags to restrict
the DMA address range of the allocation (e.g., on x86, GFP_DMA
guarantees to be within the first 16MB of available DMA addresses,
as required by ISA devices).
Warnings: Memory coherency operates at a granularity called the cache
line width. In order for memory mapped by this API to operate
correctly, the mapped region must begin exactly on a cache line
boundary and end exactly on one (to prevent two separately mapped
regions from sharing a single cache line). Since the cache line size
may not be known at compile time, the API will not enforce this
requirement. Therefore, it is recommended that driver writers who
don't take special care to determine the cache line size at run time
only map virtual regions that begin and end on page boundaries (which
are guaranteed also to be cache line boundaries).
Note also that the above constraints on physical contiguity and
dma_mask may not apply if the platform has an IOMMU (a device which
maps an I/O DMA address to a physical memory address). However, to be
portable, device driver writers may *not* assume that such an IOMMU
exists.
DMA_TO_DEVICE synchronisation must be done after the last modification
of the memory region by the software and before it is handed off to
the device. Once this primitive is used, memory covered by this
primitive should be treated as read-only by the device. If the device
may write to it at any point, it should be DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL (see
below).
.. warning::
DMA_FROM_DEVICE synchronisation must be done before the driver
accesses data that may be changed by the device. This memory should
be treated as read-only by the driver. If the driver needs to write
to it at any point, it should be DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL (see below).
Memory coherency operates at a granularity called the cache
line width. In order for memory mapped by this API to operate
correctly, the mapped region must begin exactly on a cache line
boundary and end exactly on one (to prevent two separately mapped
regions from sharing a single cache line). Since the cache line size
may not be known at compile time, the API will not enforce this
requirement. Therefore, it is recommended that driver writers who
don't take special care to determine the cache line size at run time
only map virtual regions that begin and end on page boundaries (which
are guaranteed also to be cache line boundaries).
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL requires special handling: it means that the driver
isn't sure if the memory was modified before being handed off to the
device and also isn't sure if the device will also modify it. Thus,
you must always sync bidirectional memory twice: once before the
memory is handed off to the device (to make sure all memory changes
are flushed from the processor) and once before the data may be
accessed after being used by the device (to make sure any processor
cache lines are updated with data that the device may have changed).
DMA_TO_DEVICE synchronisation must be done after the last modification
of the memory region by the software and before it is handed off to
the device. Once this primitive is used, memory covered by this
primitive should be treated as read-only by the device. If the device
may write to it at any point, it should be DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL (see
below).
void
dma_unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
DMA_FROM_DEVICE synchronisation must be done before the driver
accesses data that may be changed by the device. This memory should
be treated as read-only by the driver. If the driver needs to write
to it at any point, it should be DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL (see below).
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL requires special handling: it means that the driver
isn't sure if the memory was modified before being handed off to the
device and also isn't sure if the device will also modify it. Thus,
you must always sync bidirectional memory twice: once before the
memory is handed off to the device (to make sure all memory changes
are flushed from the processor) and once before the data may be
accessed after being used by the device (to make sure any processor
cache lines are updated with data that the device may have changed).
::
void
dma_unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Unmaps the region previously mapped. All the parameters passed in
must be identical to those passed in (and returned) by the mapping
API.
dma_addr_t
dma_map_page(struct device *dev, struct page *page,
unsigned long offset, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_unmap_page(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_address, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
::
dma_addr_t
dma_map_page(struct device *dev, struct page *page,
unsigned long offset, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_unmap_page(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_address, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
API for mapping and unmapping for pages. All the notes and warnings
for the other mapping APIs apply here. Also, although the <offset>
@ -277,20 +316,24 @@ and <size> parameters are provided to do partial page mapping, it is
recommended that you never use these unless you really know what the
cache width is.
dma_addr_t
dma_map_resource(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir, unsigned long attrs)
::
void
dma_unmap_resource(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir, unsigned long attrs)
dma_addr_t
dma_map_resource(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir, unsigned long attrs)
void
dma_unmap_resource(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir, unsigned long attrs)
API for mapping and unmapping for MMIO resources. All the notes and
warnings for the other mapping APIs apply here. The API should only be
used to map device MMIO resources, mapping of RAM is not permitted.
int
dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
::
int
dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
In some circumstances dma_map_single(), dma_map_page() and dma_map_resource()
will fail to create a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing
@ -298,9 +341,11 @@ the returned DMA address with dma_mapping_error(). A non-zero return value
means the mapping could not be created and the driver should take appropriate
action (e.g. reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later).
::
int
dma_map_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
Returns: the number of DMA address segments mapped (this may be shorter
than <nents> passed in if some elements of the scatter/gather list are
@ -316,7 +361,7 @@ critical that the driver do something, in the case of a block driver
aborting the request or even oopsing is better than doing nothing and
corrupting the filesystem.
With scatterlists, you use the resulting mapping like this:
With scatterlists, you use the resulting mapping like this::
int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
struct scatterlist *sg;
@ -337,9 +382,11 @@ Then you should loop count times (note: this can be less than nents times)
and use sg_dma_address() and sg_dma_len() macros where you previously
accessed sg->address and sg->length as shown above.
::
void
dma_unmap_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
Unmap the previously mapped scatter/gather list. All the parameters
must be the same as those and passed in to the scatter/gather mapping
@ -348,18 +395,27 @@ API.
Note: <nents> must be the number you passed in, *not* the number of
DMA address entries returned.
void
dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_single_for_device(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nents,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nents,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
::
void
dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle,
size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_single_for_device(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle,
size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Synchronise a single contiguous or scatter/gather mapping for the CPU
and device. With the sync_sg API, all the parameters must be the same
@ -367,36 +423,41 @@ as those passed into the single mapping API. With the sync_single API,
you can use dma_handle and size parameters that aren't identical to
those passed into the single mapping API to do a partial sync.
Notes: You must do this:
- Before reading values that have been written by DMA from the device
(use the DMA_FROM_DEVICE direction)
- After writing values that will be written to the device using DMA
(use the DMA_TO_DEVICE) direction
- before *and* after handing memory to the device if the memory is
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL
.. note::
You must do this:
- Before reading values that have been written by DMA from the device
(use the DMA_FROM_DEVICE direction)
- After writing values that will be written to the device using DMA
(use the DMA_TO_DEVICE) direction
- before *and* after handing memory to the device if the memory is
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL
See also dma_map_single().
dma_addr_t
dma_map_single_attrs(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
::
void
dma_unmap_single_attrs(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
size_t size, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
dma_addr_t
dma_map_single_attrs(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
int
dma_map_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sgl,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
void
dma_unmap_single_attrs(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
size_t size, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
void
dma_unmap_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sgl,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
int
dma_map_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sgl,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
void
dma_unmap_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sgl,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
The four functions above are just like the counterpart functions
without the _attrs suffixes, except that they pass an optional
@ -410,37 +471,38 @@ is identical to those of the corresponding function
without the _attrs suffix. As a result dma_map_single_attrs()
can generally replace dma_map_single(), etc.
As an example of the use of the *_attrs functions, here's how
As an example of the use of the ``*_attrs`` functions, here's how
you could pass an attribute DMA_ATTR_FOO when mapping memory
for DMA:
for DMA::
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
/* DMA_ATTR_FOO should be defined in linux/dma-mapping.h and
* documented in Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt */
...
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
/* DMA_ATTR_FOO should be defined in linux/dma-mapping.h and
* documented in Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt */
...
unsigned long attr;
attr |= DMA_ATTR_FOO;
....
n = dma_map_sg_attrs(dev, sg, nents, DMA_TO_DEVICE, attr);
....
unsigned long attr;
attr |= DMA_ATTR_FOO;
....
n = dma_map_sg_attrs(dev, sg, nents, DMA_TO_DEVICE, attr);
....
Architectures that care about DMA_ATTR_FOO would check for its
presence in their implementations of the mapping and unmapping
routines, e.g.:
routines, e.g.:::
void whizco_dma_map_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
size_t size, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
{
....
if (attrs & DMA_ATTR_FOO)
/* twizzle the frobnozzle */
....
void whizco_dma_map_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
size_t size, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
{
....
if (attrs & DMA_ATTR_FOO)
/* twizzle the frobnozzle */
....
}
Part II - Advanced dma_ usage
-----------------------------
Part II - Advanced dma usage
----------------------------
Warning: These pieces of the DMA API should not be used in the
majority of cases, since they cater for unlikely corner cases that
@ -450,9 +512,11 @@ If you don't understand how cache line coherency works between a
processor and an I/O device, you should not be using this part of the
API at all.
void *
dma_alloc_noncoherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
::
void *
dma_alloc_noncoherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
Identical to dma_alloc_coherent() except that the platform will
choose to return either consistent or non-consistent memory as it sees
@ -468,39 +532,49 @@ only use this API if you positively know your driver will be
required to work on one of the rare (usually non-PCI) architectures
that simply cannot make consistent memory.
void
dma_free_noncoherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
dma_addr_t dma_handle)
::
void
dma_free_noncoherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
dma_addr_t dma_handle)
Free memory allocated by the nonconsistent API. All parameters must
be identical to those passed in (and returned by
dma_alloc_noncoherent()).
int
dma_get_cache_alignment(void)
::
int
dma_get_cache_alignment(void)
Returns the processor cache alignment. This is the absolute minimum
alignment *and* width that you must observe when either mapping
memory or doing partial flushes.
Notes: This API may return a number *larger* than the actual cache
line, but it will guarantee that one or more cache lines fit exactly
into the width returned by this call. It will also always be a power
of two for easy alignment.
.. note::
void
dma_cache_sync(struct device *dev, void *vaddr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
This API may return a number *larger* than the actual cache
line, but it will guarantee that one or more cache lines fit exactly
into the width returned by this call. It will also always be a power
of two for easy alignment.
::
void
dma_cache_sync(struct device *dev, void *vaddr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Do a partial sync of memory that was allocated by
dma_alloc_noncoherent(), starting at virtual address vaddr and
continuing on for size. Again, you *must* observe the cache line
boundaries when doing this.
int
dma_declare_coherent_memory(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr,
dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size, int
flags)
::
int
dma_declare_coherent_memory(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr,
dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size, int
flags)
Declare region of memory to be handed out by dma_alloc_coherent() when
it's asked for coherent memory for this device.
@ -516,21 +590,21 @@ size is the size of the area (must be multiples of PAGE_SIZE).
flags can be ORed together and are:
DMA_MEMORY_MAP - request that the memory returned from
dma_alloc_coherent() be directly writable.
- DMA_MEMORY_MAP - request that the memory returned from
dma_alloc_coherent() be directly writable.
DMA_MEMORY_IO - request that the memory returned from
dma_alloc_coherent() be addressable using read()/write()/memcpy_toio() etc.
- DMA_MEMORY_IO - request that the memory returned from
dma_alloc_coherent() be addressable using read()/write()/memcpy_toio() etc.
One or both of these flags must be present.
DMA_MEMORY_INCLUDES_CHILDREN - make the declared memory be allocated by
dma_alloc_coherent of any child devices of this one (for memory residing
on a bridge).
- DMA_MEMORY_INCLUDES_CHILDREN - make the declared memory be allocated by
dma_alloc_coherent of any child devices of this one (for memory residing
on a bridge).
DMA_MEMORY_EXCLUSIVE - only allocate memory from the declared regions.
Do not allow dma_alloc_coherent() to fall back to system memory when
it's out of memory in the declared region.
- DMA_MEMORY_EXCLUSIVE - only allocate memory from the declared regions.
Do not allow dma_alloc_coherent() to fall back to system memory when
it's out of memory in the declared region.
The return value will be either DMA_MEMORY_MAP or DMA_MEMORY_IO and
must correspond to a passed in flag (i.e. no returning DMA_MEMORY_IO
@ -543,15 +617,17 @@ must be accessed using the correct bus functions. If your driver
isn't prepared to handle this contingency, it should not specify
DMA_MEMORY_IO in the input flags.
As a simplification for the platforms, only *one* such region of
As a simplification for the platforms, only **one** such region of
memory may be declared per device.
For reasons of efficiency, most platforms choose to track the declared
region only at the granularity of a page. For smaller allocations,
you should use the dma_pool() API.
void
dma_release_declared_memory(struct device *dev)
::
void
dma_release_declared_memory(struct device *dev)
Remove the memory region previously declared from the system. This
API performs *no* in-use checking for this region and will return
@ -559,9 +635,11 @@ unconditionally having removed all the required structures. It is the
driver's job to ensure that no parts of this memory region are
currently in use.
void *
dma_mark_declared_memory_occupied(struct device *dev,
dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size)
::
void *
dma_mark_declared_memory_occupied(struct device *dev,
dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size)
This is used to occupy specific regions of the declared space
(dma_alloc_coherent() will hand out the first free region it finds).
@ -592,38 +670,37 @@ option has a performance impact. Do not enable it in production kernels.
If you boot the resulting kernel will contain code which does some bookkeeping
about what DMA memory was allocated for which device. If this code detects an
error it prints a warning message with some details into your kernel log. An
example warning message may look like this:
example warning message may look like this::
------------[ cut here ]------------
WARNING: at /data2/repos/linux-2.6-iommu/lib/dma-debug.c:448
check_unmap+0x203/0x490()
Hardware name:
forcedeth 0000:00:08.0: DMA-API: device driver frees DMA memory with wrong
function [device address=0x00000000640444be] [size=66 bytes] [mapped as
single] [unmapped as page]
Modules linked in: nfsd exportfs bridge stp llc r8169
Pid: 0, comm: swapper Tainted: G W 2.6.28-dmatest-09289-g8bb99c0 #1
Call Trace:
<IRQ> [<ffffffff80240b22>] warn_slowpath+0xf2/0x130
[<ffffffff80647b70>] _spin_unlock+0x10/0x30
[<ffffffff80537e75>] usb_hcd_link_urb_to_ep+0x75/0xc0
[<ffffffff80647c22>] _spin_unlock_irqrestore+0x12/0x40
[<ffffffff8055347f>] ohci_urb_enqueue+0x19f/0x7c0
[<ffffffff80252f96>] queue_work+0x56/0x60
[<ffffffff80237e10>] enqueue_task_fair+0x20/0x50
[<ffffffff80539279>] usb_hcd_submit_urb+0x379/0xbc0
[<ffffffff803b78c3>] cpumask_next_and+0x23/0x40
[<ffffffff80235177>] find_busiest_group+0x207/0x8a0
[<ffffffff8064784f>] _spin_lock_irqsave+0x1f/0x50
[<ffffffff803c7ea3>] check_unmap+0x203/0x490
[<ffffffff803c8259>] debug_dma_unmap_page+0x49/0x50
[<ffffffff80485f26>] nv_tx_done_optimized+0xc6/0x2c0
[<ffffffff80486c13>] nv_nic_irq_optimized+0x73/0x2b0
[<ffffffff8026df84>] handle_IRQ_event+0x34/0x70
[<ffffffff8026ffe9>] handle_edge_irq+0xc9/0x150
[<ffffffff8020e3ab>] do_IRQ+0xcb/0x1c0
[<ffffffff8020c093>] ret_from_intr+0x0/0xa
<EOI> <4>---[ end trace f6435a98e2a38c0e ]---
WARNING: at /data2/repos/linux-2.6-iommu/lib/dma-debug.c:448
check_unmap+0x203/0x490()
Hardware name:
forcedeth 0000:00:08.0: DMA-API: device driver frees DMA memory with wrong
function [device address=0x00000000640444be] [size=66 bytes] [mapped as
single] [unmapped as page]
Modules linked in: nfsd exportfs bridge stp llc r8169
Pid: 0, comm: swapper Tainted: G W 2.6.28-dmatest-09289-g8bb99c0 #1
Call Trace:
<IRQ> [<ffffffff80240b22>] warn_slowpath+0xf2/0x130
[<ffffffff80647b70>] _spin_unlock+0x10/0x30
[<ffffffff80537e75>] usb_hcd_link_urb_to_ep+0x75/0xc0
[<ffffffff80647c22>] _spin_unlock_irqrestore+0x12/0x40
[<ffffffff8055347f>] ohci_urb_enqueue+0x19f/0x7c0
[<ffffffff80252f96>] queue_work+0x56/0x60
[<ffffffff80237e10>] enqueue_task_fair+0x20/0x50
[<ffffffff80539279>] usb_hcd_submit_urb+0x379/0xbc0
[<ffffffff803b78c3>] cpumask_next_and+0x23/0x40
[<ffffffff80235177>] find_busiest_group+0x207/0x8a0
[<ffffffff8064784f>] _spin_lock_irqsave+0x1f/0x50
[<ffffffff803c7ea3>] check_unmap+0x203/0x490
[<ffffffff803c8259>] debug_dma_unmap_page+0x49/0x50
[<ffffffff80485f26>] nv_tx_done_optimized+0xc6/0x2c0
[<ffffffff80486c13>] nv_nic_irq_optimized+0x73/0x2b0
[<ffffffff8026df84>] handle_IRQ_event+0x34/0x70
[<ffffffff8026ffe9>] handle_edge_irq+0xc9/0x150
[<ffffffff8020e3ab>] do_IRQ+0xcb/0x1c0
[<ffffffff8020c093>] ret_from_intr+0x0/0xa
<EOI> <4>---[ end trace f6435a98e2a38c0e ]---
The driver developer can find the driver and the device including a stacktrace
of the DMA-API call which caused this warning.
@ -637,43 +714,42 @@ details.
The debugfs directory for the DMA-API debugging code is called dma-api/. In
this directory the following files can currently be found:
dma-api/all_errors This file contains a numeric value. If this
=============================== ===============================================
dma-api/all_errors This file contains a numeric value. If this
value is not equal to zero the debugging code
will print a warning for every error it finds
into the kernel log. Be careful with this
option, as it can easily flood your logs.
dma-api/disabled This read-only file contains the character 'Y'
dma-api/disabled This read-only file contains the character 'Y'
if the debugging code is disabled. This can
happen when it runs out of memory or if it was
disabled at boot time
dma-api/error_count This file is read-only and shows the total
dma-api/error_count This file is read-only and shows the total
numbers of errors found.
dma-api/num_errors The number in this file shows how many
dma-api/num_errors The number in this file shows how many
warnings will be printed to the kernel log
before it stops. This number is initialized to
one at system boot and be set by writing into
this file
dma-api/min_free_entries
This read-only file can be read to get the
dma-api/min_free_entries This read-only file can be read to get the
minimum number of free dma_debug_entries the
allocator has ever seen. If this value goes
down to zero the code will disable itself
because it is not longer reliable.
dma-api/num_free_entries
The current number of free dma_debug_entries
dma-api/num_free_entries The current number of free dma_debug_entries
in the allocator.
dma-api/driver-filter
You can write a name of a driver into this file
dma-api/driver-filter You can write a name of a driver into this file
to limit the debug output to requests from that
particular driver. Write an empty string to
that file to disable the filter and see
all errors again.
=============================== ===============================================
If you have this code compiled into your kernel it will be enabled by default.
If you want to boot without the bookkeeping anyway you can provide
@ -692,7 +768,10 @@ of preallocated entries is defined per architecture. If it is too low for you
boot with 'dma_debug_entries=<your_desired_number>' to overwrite the
architectural default.
void debug_dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr);
::
void
debug_dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr);
dma-debug interface debug_dma_mapping_error() to debug drivers that fail
to check DMA mapping errors on addresses returned by dma_map_single() and
@ -702,4 +781,3 @@ the driver. When driver does unmap, debug_dma_unmap() checks the flag and if
this flag is still set, prints warning message that includes call trace that
leads up to the unmap. This interface can be called from dma_mapping_error()
routines to enable DMA mapping error check debugging.

73
Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt
View File

@ -1,19 +1,20 @@
DMA with ISA and LPC devices
============================
============================
DMA with ISA and LPC devices
============================
Pierre Ossman <drzeus@drzeus.cx>
:Author: Pierre Ossman <drzeus@drzeus.cx>
This document describes how to do DMA transfers using the old ISA DMA
controller. Even though ISA is more or less dead today the LPC bus
uses the same DMA system so it will be around for quite some time.
Part I - Headers and dependencies
---------------------------------
Headers and dependencies
------------------------
To do ISA style DMA you need to include two headers:
To do ISA style DMA you need to include two headers::
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
#include <asm/dma.h>
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
#include <asm/dma.h>
The first is the generic DMA API used to convert virtual addresses to
bus addresses (see Documentation/DMA-API.txt for details).
@ -23,8 +24,8 @@ this is not present on all platforms make sure you construct your
Kconfig to be dependent on ISA_DMA_API (not ISA) so that nobody tries
to build your driver on unsupported platforms.
Part II - Buffer allocation
---------------------------
Buffer allocation
-----------------
The ISA DMA controller has some very strict requirements on which
memory it can access so extra care must be taken when allocating
@ -42,13 +43,13 @@ requirements you pass the flag GFP_DMA to kmalloc.
Unfortunately the memory available for ISA DMA is scarce so unless you
allocate the memory during boot-up it's a good idea to also pass
__GFP_REPEAT and __GFP_NOWARN to make the allocator try a bit harder.
__GFP_RETRY_MAYFAIL and __GFP_NOWARN to make the allocator try a bit harder.
(This scarcity also means that you should allocate the buffer as
early as possible and not release it until the driver is unloaded.)
Part III - Address translation
------------------------------
Address translation
-------------------
To translate the virtual address to a bus address, use the normal DMA
API. Do _not_ use isa_virt_to_phys() even though it does the same
@ -61,8 +62,8 @@ Note: x86_64 had a broken DMA API when it came to ISA but has since
been fixed. If your arch has problems then fix the DMA API instead of
reverting to the ISA functions.
Part IV - Channels
------------------
Channels
--------
A normal ISA DMA controller has 8 channels. The lower four are for
8-bit transfers and the upper four are for 16-bit transfers.
@ -80,8 +81,8 @@ The ability to use 16-bit or 8-bit transfers is _not_ up to you as a
driver author but depends on what the hardware supports. Check your
specs or test different channels.
Part V - Transfer data
----------------------
Transfer data
-------------
Now for the good stuff, the actual DMA transfer. :)
@ -112,37 +113,37 @@ Once the DMA transfer is finished (or timed out) you should disable
the channel again. You should also check get_dma_residue() to make
sure that all data has been transferred.
Example:
Example::
int flags, residue;
int flags, residue;
flags = claim_dma_lock();
flags = claim_dma_lock();
clear_dma_ff();
clear_dma_ff();
set_dma_mode(channel, DMA_MODE_WRITE);
set_dma_addr(channel, phys_addr);
set_dma_count(channel, num_bytes);
set_dma_mode(channel, DMA_MODE_WRITE);
set_dma_addr(channel, phys_addr);
set_dma_count(channel, num_bytes);
dma_enable(channel);
dma_enable(channel);
release_dma_lock(flags);
release_dma_lock(flags);
while (!device_done());
while (!device_done());
flags = claim_dma_lock();
flags = claim_dma_lock();
dma_disable(channel);
dma_disable(channel);
residue = dma_get_residue(channel);
if (residue != 0)
printk(KERN_ERR "driver: Incomplete DMA transfer!"
" %d bytes left!\n", residue);
residue = dma_get_residue(channel);
if (residue != 0)
printk(KERN_ERR "driver: Incomplete DMA transfer!"
" %d bytes left!\n", residue);
release_dma_lock(flags);
release_dma_lock(flags);
Part VI - Suspend/resume
------------------------
Suspend/resume
--------------
It is the driver's responsibility to make sure that the machine isn't
suspended while a DMA transfer is in progress. Also, all DMA settings

15
Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
DMA attributes
==============
==============
DMA attributes
==============
This document describes the semantics of the DMA attributes that are
defined in linux/dma-mapping.h.
@ -108,6 +109,7 @@ This is a hint to the DMA-mapping subsystem that it's probably not worth
the time to try to allocate memory to in a way that gives better TLB
efficiency (AKA it's not worth trying to build the mapping out of larger
pages). You might want to specify this if:
- You know that the accesses to this memory won't thrash the TLB.
You might know that the accesses are likely to be sequential or
that they aren't sequential but it's unlikely you'll ping-pong
@ -121,11 +123,12 @@ pages). You might want to specify this if:
the mapping to have a short lifetime then it may be worth it to
optimize allocation (avoid coming up with large pages) instead of
getting the slight performance win of larger pages.
Setting this hint doesn't guarantee that you won't get huge pages, but it
means that we won't try quite as hard to get them.
NOTE: At the moment DMA_ATTR_ALLOC_SINGLE_PAGES is only implemented on ARM,
though ARM64 patches will likely be posted soon.
.. note:: At the moment DMA_ATTR_ALLOC_SINGLE_PAGES is only implemented on ARM,
though ARM64 patches will likely be posted soon.
DMA_ATTR_NO_WARN
----------------
@ -142,10 +145,10 @@ problem at all, depending on the implementation of the retry mechanism.
So, this provides a way for drivers to avoid those error messages on calls
where allocation failures are not a problem, and shouldn't bother the logs.
NOTE: At the moment DMA_ATTR_NO_WARN is only implemented on PowerPC.
.. note:: At the moment DMA_ATTR_NO_WARN is only implemented on PowerPC.
DMA_ATTR_PRIVILEGED
------------------------------
-------------------
Some advanced peripherals such as remote processors and GPUs perform
accesses to DMA buffers in both privileged "supervisor" and unprivileged

76
Documentation/IPMI.txt
View File

@ -1,9 +1,8 @@
=====================
The Linux IPMI Driver
=====================
The Linux IPMI Driver
---------------------
Corey Minyard
<minyard@mvista.com>
<minyard@acm.org>
:Author: Corey Minyard <minyard@mvista.com> / <minyard@acm.org>
The Intelligent Platform Management Interface, or IPMI, is a
standard for controlling intelligent devices that monitor a system.
@ -141,7 +140,7 @@ Addressing
----------
The IPMI addressing works much like IP addresses, you have an overlay
to handle the different address types. The overlay is:
to handle the different address types. The overlay is::
struct ipmi_addr
{
@ -153,7 +152,7 @@ to handle the different address types. The overlay is:
The addr_type determines what the address really is. The driver
currently understands two different types of addresses.
"System Interface" addresses are defined as:
"System Interface" addresses are defined as::
struct ipmi_system_interface_addr
{
@ -166,7 +165,7 @@ straight to the BMC on the current card. The channel must be
IPMI_BMC_CHANNEL.
Messages that are destined to go out on the IPMB bus use the
IPMI_IPMB_ADDR_TYPE address type. The format is
IPMI_IPMB_ADDR_TYPE address type. The format is::
struct ipmi_ipmb_addr
{
@ -184,16 +183,16 @@ spec.
Messages
--------
Messages are defined as:
Messages are defined as::
struct ipmi_msg
{
struct ipmi_msg
{
unsigned char netfn;
unsigned char lun;
unsigned char cmd;
unsigned char *data;
int data_len;
};
};
The driver takes care of adding/stripping the header information. The
data portion is just the data to be send (do NOT put addressing info
@ -208,7 +207,7 @@ block of data, even when receiving messages. Otherwise the driver
will have no place to put the message.
Messages coming up from the message handler in kernelland will come in
as:
as::
struct ipmi_recv_msg
{
@ -246,6 +245,7 @@ and the user should not have to care what type of SMI is below them.
Watching For Interfaces
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
When your code comes up, the IPMI driver may or may not have detected
if IPMI devices exist. So you might have to defer your setup until
@ -256,6 +256,7 @@ and tell you when they come and go.
Creating the User
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
To use the message handler, you must first create a user using
ipmi_create_user. The interface number specifies which SMI you want
@ -272,6 +273,7 @@ closing the device automatically destroys the user.
Messaging
^^^^^^^^^
To send a message from kernel-land, the ipmi_request_settime() call does
pretty much all message handling. Most of the parameter are
@ -321,6 +323,7 @@ though, since it is tricky to manage your own buffers.
Events and Incoming Commands
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The driver takes care of polling for IPMI events and receiving
commands (commands are messages that are not responses, they are
@ -367,7 +370,7 @@ in the system. It discovers interfaces through a host of different
methods, depending on the system.
You can specify up to four interfaces on the module load line and
control some module parameters:
control some module parameters::
modprobe ipmi_si.o type=<type1>,<type2>....
ports=<port1>,<port2>... addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>...
@ -437,7 +440,7 @@ default is one. Setting to 0 is useful with the hotmod, but is
obviously only useful for modules.
When compiled into the kernel, the parameters can be specified on the
kernel command line as:
kernel command line as::
ipmi_si.type=<type1>,<type2>...
ipmi_si.ports=<port1>,<port2>... ipmi_si.addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>...
@ -474,16 +477,22 @@ The driver supports a hot add and remove of interfaces. This way,
interfaces can be added or removed after the kernel is up and running.
This is done using /sys/modules/ipmi_si/parameters/hotmod, which is a
write-only parameter. You write a string to this interface. The string
has the format:
has the format::
<op1>[:op2[:op3...]]
The "op"s are:
The "op"s are::
add|remove,kcs|bt|smic,mem|i/o,<address>[,<opt1>[,<opt2>[,...]]]
You can specify more than one interface on the line. The "opt"s are:
You can specify more than one interface on the line. The "opt"s are::
rsp=<regspacing>
rsi=<regsize>
rsh=<regshift>
irq=<irq>
ipmb=<ipmb slave addr>
and these have the same meanings as discussed above. Note that you
can also use this on the kernel command line for a more compact format
for specifying an interface. Note that when removing an interface,
@ -496,7 +505,7 @@ The SMBus Driver (SSIF)
The SMBus driver allows up to 4 SMBus devices to be configured in the
system. By default, the driver will only register with something it
finds in DMI or ACPI tables. You can change this
at module load time (for a module) with:
at module load time (for a module) with::
modprobe ipmi_ssif.o
addr=<i2caddr1>[,<i2caddr2>[,...]]
@ -535,7 +544,7 @@ the smb_addr parameter unless you have DMI or ACPI data to tell the
driver what to use.
When compiled into the kernel, the addresses can be specified on the
kernel command line as:
kernel command line as::
ipmb_ssif.addr=<i2caddr1>[,<i2caddr2>[...]]
ipmi_ssif.adapter=<adapter1>[,<adapter2>[...]]
@ -565,9 +574,9 @@ Some users need more detailed information about a device, like where
the address came from or the raw base device for the IPMI interface.
You can use the IPMI smi_watcher to catch the IPMI interfaces as they
come or go, and to grab the information, you can use the function
ipmi_get_smi_info(), which returns the following structure:
ipmi_get_smi_info(), which returns the following structure::
struct ipmi_smi_info {
struct ipmi_smi_info {
enum ipmi_addr_src addr_src;
struct device *dev;
union {
@ -575,7 +584,7 @@ struct ipmi_smi_info {
void *acpi_handle;
} acpi_info;
} addr_info;
};
};
Currently special info for only for SI_ACPI address sources is
returned. Others may be added as necessary.
@ -590,7 +599,7 @@ Watchdog
A watchdog timer is provided that implements the Linux-standard
watchdog timer interface. It has three module parameters that can be
used to control it:
used to control it::
modprobe ipmi_watchdog timeout=<t> pretimeout=<t> action=<action type>
preaction=<preaction type> preop=<preop type> start_now=x
@ -635,7 +644,7 @@ watchdog device is closed. The default value of nowayout is true
if the CONFIG_WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT option is enabled, or false if not.
When compiled into the kernel, the kernel command line is available
for configuring the watchdog:
for configuring the watchdog::
ipmi_watchdog.timeout=<t> ipmi_watchdog.pretimeout=<t>
ipmi_watchdog.action=<action type>
@ -675,6 +684,7 @@ also get a bunch of OEM events holding the panic string.
The field settings of the events are:
* Generator ID: 0x21 (kernel)
* EvM Rev: 0x03 (this event is formatting in IPMI 1.0 format)
* Sensor Type: 0x20 (OS critical stop sensor)
@ -683,18 +693,20 @@ The field settings of the events are:
* Event Data 1: 0xa1 (Runtime stop in OEM bytes 2 and 3)
* Event data 2: second byte of panic string
* Event data 3: third byte of panic string
See the IPMI spec for the details of the event layout. This event is
always sent to the local management controller. It will handle routing
the message to the right place
Other OEM events have the following format:
Record ID (bytes 0-1): Set by the SEL.
Record type (byte 2): 0xf0 (OEM non-timestamped)
byte 3: The slave address of the card saving the panic
byte 4: A sequence number (starting at zero)
The rest of the bytes (11 bytes) are the panic string. If the panic string
is longer than 11 bytes, multiple messages will be sent with increasing
sequence numbers.
* Record ID (bytes 0-1): Set by the SEL.
* Record type (byte 2): 0xf0 (OEM non-timestamped)
* byte 3: The slave address of the card saving the panic
* byte 4: A sequence number (starting at zero)
The rest of the bytes (11 bytes) are the panic string. If the panic string
is longer than 11 bytes, multiple messages will be sent with increasing
sequence numbers.
Because you cannot send OEM events using the standard interface, this
function will attempt to find an SEL and add the events there. It

77
Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt
View File

@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
ChangeLog:
Started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
Update by Max Krasnyansky <maxk@qualcomm.com>
================
SMP IRQ affinity
================
ChangeLog:
- Started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
- Update by Max Krasnyansky <maxk@qualcomm.com>
/proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity and /proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity_list specify
which target CPUs are permitted for a given IRQ source. It's a bitmask
@ -16,50 +19,52 @@ will be set to the default mask. It can then be changed as described above.
Default mask is 0xffffffff.
Here is an example of restricting IRQ44 (eth1) to CPU0-3 then restricting
it to CPU4-7 (this is an 8-CPU SMP box):
it to CPU4-7 (this is an 8-CPU SMP box)::
[root@moon 44]# cd /proc/irq/44
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
ffffffff
[root@moon 44]# cd /proc/irq/44
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
ffffffff
[root@moon 44]# echo 0f > smp_affinity
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
0000000f
[root@moon 44]# ping -f h
PING hell (195.4.7.3): 56 data bytes
...
--- hell ping statistics ---
6029 packets transmitted, 6027 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.1/0.4 ms
[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | grep 'CPU\|44:'
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU6 CPU7
44: 1068 1785 1785 1783 0 0 0 0 IO-APIC-level eth1
[root@moon 44]# echo 0f > smp_affinity
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
0000000f
[root@moon 44]# ping -f h
PING hell (195.4.7.3): 56 data bytes
...
--- hell ping statistics ---
6029 packets transmitted, 6027 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.1/0.4 ms
[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | grep 'CPU\|44:'
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU6 CPU7
44: 1068 1785 1785 1783 0 0 0 0 IO-APIC-level eth1
As can be seen from the line above IRQ44 was delivered only to the first four
processors (0-3).
Now lets restrict that IRQ to CPU(4-7).
[root@moon 44]# echo f0 > smp_affinity
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
000000f0
[root@moon 44]# ping -f h
PING hell (195.4.7.3): 56 data bytes
..
--- hell ping statistics ---
2779 packets transmitted, 2777 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.5/585.4 ms
[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | 'CPU\|44:'
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU6 CPU7
44: 1068 1785 1785 1783 1784 1069 1070 1069 IO-APIC-level eth1
::
[root@moon 44]# echo f0 > smp_affinity
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
000000f0
[root@moon 44]# ping -f h
PING hell (195.4.7.3): 56 data bytes
..
--- hell ping statistics ---
2779 packets transmitted, 2777 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.5/585.4 ms
[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | 'CPU\|44:'
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU6 CPU7
44: 1068 1785 1785 1783 1784 1069 1070 1069 IO-APIC-level eth1
This time around IRQ44 was delivered only to the last four processors.
i.e counters for the CPU0-3 did not change.
Here is an example of limiting that same irq (44) to cpus 1024 to 1031:
Here is an example of limiting that same irq (44) to cpus 1024 to 1031::
[root@moon 44]# echo 1024-1031 > smp_affinity_list
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity_list
1024-1031
[root@moon 44]# echo 1024-1031 > smp_affinity_list
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity_list
1024-1031
Note that to do this with a bitmask would require 32 bitmasks of zero
to follow the pertinent one.

69
Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
irq_domain interrupt number mapping library
===============================================
The irq_domain interrupt number mapping library
===============================================
The current design of the Linux kernel uses a single large number
space where each separate IRQ source is assigned a different number.
@ -36,7 +38,9 @@ irq_domain also implements translation from an abstract irq_fwspec
structure to hwirq numbers (Device Tree and ACPI GSI so far), and can
be easily extended to support other IRQ topology data sources.
=== irq_domain usage ===
irq_domain usage
================
An interrupt controller driver creates and registers an irq_domain by
calling one of the irq_domain_add_*() functions (each mapping method
has a different allocator function, more on that later). The function
@ -62,15 +66,21 @@ If the driver has the Linux IRQ number or the irq_data pointer, and
needs to know the associated hwirq number (such as in the irq_chip
callbacks) then it can be directly obtained from irq_data->hwirq.
=== Types of irq_domain mappings ===
Types of irq_domain mappings
============================
There are several mechanisms available for reverse mapping from hwirq
to Linux irq, and each mechanism uses a different allocation function.
Which reverse map type should be used depends on the use case. Each
of the reverse map types are described below:
==== Linear ====
irq_domain_add_linear()
irq_domain_create_linear()
Linear
------
::
irq_domain_add_linear()
irq_domain_create_linear()
The linear reverse map maintains a fixed size table indexed by the
hwirq number. When a hwirq is mapped, an irq_desc is allocated for
@ -89,9 +99,13 @@ accepts a more general abstraction 'struct fwnode_handle'.
The majority of drivers should use the linear map.
==== Tree ====
irq_domain_add_tree()
irq_domain_create_tree()
Tree
----
::
irq_domain_add_tree()
irq_domain_create_tree()
The irq_domain maintains a radix tree map from hwirq numbers to Linux
IRQs. When an hwirq is mapped, an irq_desc is allocated and the
@ -109,8 +123,12 @@ accepts a more general abstraction 'struct fwnode_handle'.
Very few drivers should need this mapping.
==== No Map ===-
irq_domain_add_nomap()
No Map
------
::
irq_domain_add_nomap()
The No Map mapping is to be used when the hwirq number is
programmable in the hardware. In this case it is best to program the
@ -121,10 +139,14 @@ Linux IRQ number into the hardware.
Most drivers cannot use this mapping.
==== Legacy ====
irq_domain_add_simple()
irq_domain_add_legacy()
irq_domain_add_legacy_isa()
Legacy
------
::
irq_domain_add_simple()
irq_domain_add_legacy()
irq_domain_add_legacy_isa()
The Legacy mapping is a special case for drivers that already have a
range of irq_descs allocated for the hwirqs. It is used when the
@ -163,14 +185,17 @@ that the driver using the simple domain call irq_create_mapping()
before any irq_find_mapping() since the latter will actually work
for the static IRQ assignment case.
==== Hierarchy IRQ domain ====
Hierarchy IRQ domain
--------------------
On some architectures, there may be multiple interrupt controllers
involved in delivering an interrupt from the device to the target CPU.
Let's look at a typical interrupt delivering path on x86 platforms:
Let's look at a typical interrupt delivering path on x86 platforms::
Device --> IOAPIC -> Interrupt remapping Controller -> Local APIC -> CPU
Device --> IOAPIC -> Interrupt remapping Controller -> Local APIC -> CPU
There are three interrupt controllers involved:
1) IOAPIC controller
2) Interrupt remapping controller
3) Local APIC controller
@ -180,7 +205,8 @@ hardware architecture, an irq_domain data structure is built for each
interrupt controller and those irq_domains are organized into hierarchy.
When building irq_domain hierarchy, the irq_domain near to the device is
child and the irq_domain near to CPU is parent. So a hierarchy structure
as below will be built for the example above.
as below will be built for the example above::
CPU Vector irq_domain (root irq_domain to manage CPU vectors)
^
|
@ -190,6 +216,7 @@ as below will be built for the example above.
IOAPIC irq_domain (manage IOAPIC delivery entries/pins)
There are four major interfaces to use hierarchy irq_domain:
1) irq_domain_alloc_irqs(): allocate IRQ descriptors and interrupt
controller related resources to deliver these interrupts.
2) irq_domain_free_irqs(): free IRQ descriptors and interrupt controller
@ -199,7 +226,8 @@ There are four major interfaces to use hierarchy irq_domain:
4) irq_domain_deactivate_irq(): deactivate interrupt controller hardware
to stop delivering the interrupt.
Following changes are needed to support hierarchy irq_domain.
Following changes are needed to support hierarchy irq_domain:
1) a new field 'parent' is added to struct irq_domain; it's used to
maintain irq_domain hierarchy information.
2) a new field 'parent_data' is added to struct irq_data; it's used to
@ -223,6 +251,7 @@ software architecture.
For an interrupt controller driver to support hierarchy irq_domain, it
needs to:
1) Implement irq_domain_ops.alloc and irq_domain_ops.free
2) Optionally implement irq_domain_ops.activate and
irq_domain_ops.deactivate.

2
Documentation/IRQ.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
===============
What is an IRQ?
===============
An IRQ is an interrupt request from a device.
Currently they can come in over a pin, or over a packet.

37
Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt
View File

@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
===================
Linux IOMMU Support
===================
@ -9,11 +10,11 @@ This guide gives a quick cheat sheet for some basic understanding.
Some Keywords
DMAR - DMA remapping
DRHD - DMA Remapping Hardware Unit Definition
RMRR - Reserved memory Region Reporting Structure
ZLR - Zero length reads from PCI devices
IOVA - IO Virtual address.
- DMAR - DMA remapping
- DRHD - DMA Remapping Hardware Unit Definition
- RMRR - Reserved memory Region Reporting Structure
- ZLR - Zero length reads from PCI devices
- IOVA - IO Virtual address.
Basic stuff
-----------
@ -33,7 +34,7 @@ devices that need to access these regions. OS is expected to setup
unity mappings for these regions for these devices to access these regions.
How is IOVA generated?
---------------------
----------------------
Well behaved drivers call pci_map_*() calls before sending command to device
that needs to perform DMA. Once DMA is completed and mapping is no longer
@ -82,14 +83,14 @@ in ACPI.
ACPI: DMAR (v001 A M I OEMDMAR 0x00000001 MSFT 0x00000097) @ 0x000000007f5b5ef0
When DMAR is being processed and initialized by ACPI, prints DMAR locations
and any RMRR's processed.
and any RMRR's processed::
ACPI DMAR:Host address width 36
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000000)base: 0x00000000fed90000
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000000)base: 0x00000000fed91000
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000001)base: 0x00000000fed93000
ACPI DMAR:RMRR base: 0x00000000000ed000 end: 0x00000000000effff
ACPI DMAR:RMRR base: 0x000000007f600000 end: 0x000000007fffffff
ACPI DMAR:Host address width 36
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000000)base: 0x00000000fed90000
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000000)base: 0x00000000fed91000
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000001)base: 0x00000000fed93000
ACPI DMAR:RMRR base: 0x00000000000ed000 end: 0x00000000000effff
ACPI DMAR:RMRR base: 0x000000007f600000 end: 0x000000007fffffff
When DMAR is enabled for use, you will notice..
@ -98,10 +99,12 @@ PCI-DMA: Using DMAR IOMMU
Fault reporting
---------------
DMAR:[DMA Write] Request device [00:02.0] fault addr 6df084000
DMAR:[fault reason 05] PTE Write access is not set
DMAR:[DMA Write] Request device [00:02.0] fault addr 6df084000
DMAR:[fault reason 05] PTE Write access is not set
::
DMAR:[DMA Write] Request device [00:02.0] fault addr 6df084000
DMAR:[fault reason 05] PTE Write access is not set
DMAR:[DMA Write] Request device [00:02.0] fault addr 6df084000
DMAR:[fault reason 05] PTE Write access is not set
TBD
----

65
Documentation/SAK.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,9 @@
Linux 2.4.2 Secure Attention Key (SAK) handling
18 March 2001, Andrew Morton
=========================================
Linux Secure Attention Key (SAK) handling
=========================================
:Date: 18 March 2001
:Author: Andrew Morton
An operating system's Secure Attention Key is a security tool which is
provided as protection against trojan password capturing programs. It
@ -13,7 +17,7 @@ this sequence. It is only available if the kernel was compiled with
sysrq support.
The proper way of generating a SAK is to define the key sequence using
`loadkeys'. This will work whether or not sysrq support is compiled
``loadkeys``. This will work whether or not sysrq support is compiled
into the kernel.
SAK works correctly when the keyboard is in raw mode. This means that
@ -25,64 +29,63 @@ What key sequence should you use? Well, CTRL-ALT-DEL is used to reboot
the machine. CTRL-ALT-BACKSPACE is magical to the X server. We'll
choose CTRL-ALT-PAUSE.
In your rc.sysinit (or rc.local) file, add the command
In your rc.sysinit (or rc.local) file, add the command::
echo "control alt keycode 101 = SAK" | /bin/loadkeys
And that's it! Only the superuser may reprogram the SAK key.
NOTES
=====
.. note::
1: Linux SAK is said to be not a "true SAK" as is required by
systems which implement C2 level security. This author does not
know why.
1. Linux SAK is said to be not a "true SAK" as is required by
systems which implement C2 level security. This author does not
know why.
2: On the PC keyboard, SAK kills all applications which have
/dev/console opened.
2. On the PC keyboard, SAK kills all applications which have
/dev/console opened.
Unfortunately this includes a number of things which you don't
actually want killed. This is because these applications are
incorrectly holding /dev/console open. Be sure to complain to your
Linux distributor about this!
Unfortunately this includes a number of things which you don't
actually want killed. This is because these applications are
incorrectly holding /dev/console open. Be sure to complain to your
Linux distributor about this!
You can identify processes which will be killed by SAK with the
command
You can identify processes which will be killed by SAK with the
command::
# ls -l /proc/[0-9]*/fd/* | grep console
l-wx------ 1 root root 64 Mar 18 00:46 /proc/579/fd/0 -> /dev/console
Then:
Then::
# ps aux|grep 579
root 579 0.0 0.1 1088 436 ? S 00:43 0:00 gpm -t ps/2
So `gpm' will be killed by SAK. This is a bug in gpm. It should
be closing standard input. You can work around this by finding the
initscript which launches gpm and changing it thusly:
So ``gpm`` will be killed by SAK. This is a bug in gpm. It should
be closing standard input. You can work around this by finding the
initscript which launches gpm and changing it thusly:
Old:
Old::
daemon gpm
New:
New::
daemon gpm < /dev/null
Vixie cron also seems to have this problem, and needs the same treatment.
Vixie cron also seems to have this problem, and needs the same treatment.
Also, one prominent Linux distribution has the following three
lines in its rc.sysinit and rc scripts:
Also, one prominent Linux distribution has the following three
lines in its rc.sysinit and rc scripts::
exec 3<&0
exec 4>&1
exec 5>&2
These commands cause *all* daemons which are launched by the
initscripts to have file descriptors 3, 4 and 5 attached to
/dev/console. So SAK kills them all. A workaround is to simply
delete these lines, but this may cause system management
applications to malfunction - test everything well.
These commands cause **all** daemons which are launched by the
initscripts to have file descriptors 3, 4 and 5 attached to
/dev/console. So SAK kills them all. A workaround is to simply
delete these lines, but this may cause system management
applications to malfunction - test everything well.

9
Documentation/SM501.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
SM501 Driver
============
.. include:: <isonum.txt>
Copyright 2006, 2007 Simtec Electronics
============
SM501 Driver
============
:Copyright: |copy| 2006, 2007 Simtec Electronics
The Silicon Motion SM501 multimedia companion chip is a multifunction device
which may provide numerous interfaces including USB host controller USB gadget,

190
Documentation/bcache.txt
View File

@ -1,10 +1,15 @@
============================
A block layer cache (bcache)
============================
Say you've got a big slow raid 6, and an ssd or three. Wouldn't it be
nice if you could use them as cache... Hence bcache.
Wiki and git repositories are at:
http://bcache.evilpiepirate.org
http://evilpiepirate.org/git/linux-bcache.git
http://evilpiepirate.org/git/bcache-tools.git
- http://bcache.evilpiepirate.org
- http://evilpiepirate.org/git/linux-bcache.git
- http://evilpiepirate.org/git/bcache-tools.git
It's designed around the performance characteristics of SSDs - it only allocates
in erase block sized buckets, and it uses a hybrid btree/log to track cached
@ -37,17 +42,19 @@ to be flushed.
Getting started:
You'll need make-bcache from the bcache-tools repository. Both the cache device
and backing device must be formatted before use.
and backing device must be formatted before use::
make-bcache -B /dev/sdb
make-bcache -C /dev/sdc
make-bcache has the ability to format multiple devices at the same time - if
you format your backing devices and cache device at the same time, you won't
have to manually attach:
have to manually attach::
make-bcache -B /dev/sda /dev/sdb -C /dev/sdc
bcache-tools now ships udev rules, and bcache devices are known to the kernel
immediately. Without udev, you can manually register devices like this:
immediately. Without udev, you can manually register devices like this::
echo /dev/sdb > /sys/fs/bcache/register
echo /dev/sdc > /sys/fs/bcache/register
@ -60,16 +67,16 @@ slow devices as bcache backing devices without a cache, and you can choose to ad
a caching device later.
See 'ATTACHING' section below.
The devices show up as:
The devices show up as::
/dev/bcache<N>
As well as (with udev):
As well as (with udev)::
/dev/bcache/by-uuid/<uuid>
/dev/bcache/by-label/<label>
To get started:
To get started::
mkfs.ext4 /dev/bcache0
mount /dev/bcache0 /mnt
@ -81,13 +88,13 @@ Cache devices are managed as sets; multiple caches per set isn't supported yet
but will allow for mirroring of metadata and dirty data in the future. Your new
cache set shows up as /sys/fs/bcache/<UUID>
ATTACHING
Attaching
---------
After your cache device and backing device are registered, the backing device
must be attached to your cache set to enable caching. Attaching a backing
device to a cache set is done thusly, with the UUID of the cache set in
/sys/fs/bcache:
/sys/fs/bcache::
echo <CSET-UUID> > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/attach
@ -97,7 +104,7 @@ your bcache devices. If a backing device has data in a cache somewhere, the
important if you have writeback caching turned on.
If you're booting up and your cache device is gone and never coming back, you
can force run the backing device:
can force run the backing device::
echo 1 > /sys/block/sdb/bcache/running
@ -110,7 +117,7 @@ but all the cached data will be invalidated. If there was dirty data in the
cache, don't expect the filesystem to be recoverable - you will have massive
filesystem corruption, though ext4's fsck does work miracles.
ERROR HANDLING
Error Handling
--------------
Bcache tries to transparently handle IO errors to/from the cache device without
@ -134,25 +141,27 @@ the backing devices to passthrough mode.
read some of the dirty data, though.
HOWTO/COOKBOOK
Howto/cookbook
--------------
A) Starting a bcache with a missing caching device
If registering the backing device doesn't help, it's already there, you just need
to force it to run without the cache:
to force it to run without the cache::
host:~# echo /dev/sdb1 > /sys/fs/bcache/register
[ 119.844831] bcache: register_bcache() error opening /dev/sdb1: device already registered
Next, you try to register your caching device if it's present. However
if it's absent, or registration fails for some reason, you can still
start your bcache without its cache, like so:
start your bcache without its cache, like so::
host:/sys/block/sdb/sdb1/bcache# echo 1 > running
Note that this may cause data loss if you were running in writeback mode.
B) Bcache does not find its cache
B) Bcache does not find its cache::
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo 0226553a-37cf-41d5-b3ce-8b1e944543a8 > attach
[ 1933.455082] bcache: bch_cached_dev_attach() Couldn't find uuid for md5 in set
@ -160,7 +169,8 @@ B) Bcache does not find its cache
[ 1933.478179] : cache set not found
In this case, the caching device was simply not registered at boot
or disappeared and came back, and needs to be (re-)registered:
or disappeared and came back, and needs to be (re-)registered::
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo /dev/sdh2 > /sys/fs/bcache/register
@ -180,7 +190,8 @@ device is still available at an 8KiB offset. So either via a loopdev
of the backing device created with --offset 8K, or any value defined by
--data-offset when you originally formatted bcache with `make-bcache`.
For example:
For example::
losetup -o 8192 /dev/loop0 /dev/your_bcache_backing_dev
This should present your unmodified backing device data in /dev/loop0
@ -191,33 +202,38 @@ cache device without loosing data.
E) Wiping a cache device
host:~# wipefs -a /dev/sdh2
16 bytes were erased at offset 0x1018 (bcache)
they were: c6 85 73 f6 4e 1a 45 ca 82 65 f5 7f 48 ba 6d 81
::
After you boot back with bcache enabled, you recreate the cache and attach it:
host:~# make-bcache -C /dev/sdh2
UUID: 7be7e175-8f4c-4f99-94b2-9c904d227045
Set UUID: 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1
version: 0
nbuckets: 106874
block_size: 1
bucket_size: 1024
nr_in_set: 1
nr_this_dev: 0
first_bucket: 1
[ 650.511912] bcache: run_cache_set() invalidating existing data
[ 650.549228] bcache: register_cache() registered cache device sdh2
host:~# wipefs -a /dev/sdh2
16 bytes were erased at offset 0x1018 (bcache)
they were: c6 85 73 f6 4e 1a 45 ca 82 65 f5 7f 48 ba 6d 81
start backing device with missing cache:
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo 1 > running
After you boot back with bcache enabled, you recreate the cache and attach it::
attach new cache:
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1 > attach
[ 865.276616] bcache: bch_cached_dev_attach() Caching md5 as bcache0 on set 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1
host:~# make-bcache -C /dev/sdh2
UUID: 7be7e175-8f4c-4f99-94b2-9c904d227045
Set UUID: 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1
version: 0
nbuckets: 106874
block_size: 1
bucket_size: 1024
nr_in_set: 1
nr_this_dev: 0
first_bucket: 1
[ 650.511912] bcache: run_cache_set() invalidating existing data
[ 650.549228] bcache: register_cache() registered cache device sdh2
start backing device with missing cache::
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo 1 > running
attach new cache::
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1 > attach
[ 865.276616] bcache: bch_cached_dev_attach() Caching md5 as bcache0 on set 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1
F) Remove or replace a caching device
F) Remove or replace a caching device::
host:/sys/block/sda/sda7/bcache# echo 1 > detach
[ 695.872542] bcache: cached_dev_detach_finish() Caching disabled for sda7
@ -226,13 +242,15 @@ F) Remove or replace a caching device
wipefs: error: /dev/nvme0n1p4: probing initialization failed: Device or resource busy
Ooops, it's disabled, but not unregistered, so it's still protected
We need to go and unregister it:
We need to go and unregister it::
host:/sys/fs/bcache/b7ba27a1-2398-4649-8ae3-0959f57ba128# ls -l cache0
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Feb 25 18:33 cache0 -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.0/0000:70:00.0/nvme/nvme0/nvme0n1/nvme0n1p4/bcache/
host:/sys/fs/bcache/b7ba27a1-2398-4649-8ae3-0959f57ba128# echo 1 > stop
kernel: [ 917.041908] bcache: cache_set_free() Cache set b7ba27a1-2398-4649-8ae3-0959f57ba128 unregistered
Now we can wipe it:
Now we can wipe it::
host:~# wipefs -a /dev/nvme0n1p4
/dev/nvme0n1p4: 16 bytes were erased at offset 0x00001018 (bcache): c6 85 73 f6 4e 1a 45 ca 82 65 f5 7f 48 ba 6d 81
@ -252,40 +270,44 @@ if there are any active backing or caching devices left on it:
1) Is it present in /dev/bcache* ? (there are times where it won't be)
If so, it's easy:
If so, it's easy::
host:/sys/block/bcache0/bcache# echo 1 > stop
2) But if your backing device is gone, this won't work:
2) But if your backing device is gone, this won't work::
host:/sys/block/bcache0# cd bcache
bash: cd: bcache: No such file or directory
In this case, you may have to unregister the dmcrypt block device that
references this bcache to free it up:
In this case, you may have to unregister the dmcrypt block device that
references this bcache to free it up::
host:~# dmsetup remove oldds1
bcache: bcache_device_free() bcache0 stopped
bcache: cache_set_free() Cache set 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1 unregistered
This causes the backing bcache to be removed from /sys/fs/bcache and
then it can be reused. This would be true of any block device stacking
where bcache is a lower device.
This causes the backing bcache to be removed from /sys/fs/bcache and
then it can be reused. This would be true of any block device stacking
where bcache is a lower device.
3) In other cases, you can also look in /sys/fs/bcache/:
3) In other cases, you can also look in /sys/fs/bcache/::
host:/sys/fs/bcache# ls -l */{cache?,bdev?}
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 0226553a-37cf-41d5-b3ce-8b1e944543a8/bdev1 -> ../../../devices/virtual/block/dm-1/bcache/
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 0226553a-37cf-41d5-b3ce-8b1e944543a8/cache0 -> ../../../devices/virtual/block/dm-4/bcache/
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1/cache0 -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/ata10/host9/target9:0:0/9:0:0:0/block/sdl/sdl2/bcache/
host:/sys/fs/bcache# ls -l */{cache?,bdev?}
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 0226553a-37cf-41d5-b3ce-8b1e944543a8/bdev1 -> ../../../devices/virtual/block/dm-1/bcache/
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 0226553a-37cf-41d5-b3ce-8b1e944543a8/cache0 -> ../../../devices/virtual/block/dm-4/bcache/
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1/cache0 -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/ata10/host9/target9:0:0/9:0:0:0/block/sdl/sdl2/bcache/
The device names will show which UUID is relevant, cd in that directory
and stop the cache::
The device names will show which UUID is relevant, cd in that directory
and stop the cache:
host:/sys/fs/bcache/5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1# echo 1 > stop
This will free up bcache references and let you reuse the partition for
other purposes.
This will free up bcache references and let you reuse the partition for
other purposes.
TROUBLESHOOTING PERFORMANCE
Troubleshooting performance
---------------------------
Bcache has a bunch of config options and tunables. The defaults are intended to
@ -301,11 +323,13 @@ want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
raid stripe size to get the disk multiples that you would like.
For example: If you have a 64k stripe size, then the following offset
would provide alignment for many common RAID5 data spindle counts:
would provide alignment for many common RAID5 data spindle counts::
64k * 2*2*2*3*3*5*7 bytes = 161280k
That space is wasted, but for only 157.5MB you can grow your RAID 5
volume to the following data-spindle counts without re-aligning:
volume to the following data-spindle counts without re-aligning::
3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,12,14,15,18,20,21 ...
- Bad write performance
@ -313,9 +337,9 @@ want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
If write performance is not what you expected, you probably wanted to be
running in writeback mode, which isn't the default (not due to a lack of
maturity, but simply because in writeback mode you'll lose data if something
happens to your SSD)
happens to your SSD)::
# echo writeback > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/cache_mode
# echo writeback > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/cache_mode
- Bad performance, or traffic not going to the SSD that you'd expect
@ -325,13 +349,13 @@ want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
accessed data out of your cache.
But if you want to benchmark reads from cache, and you start out with fio
writing an 8 gigabyte test file - so you want to disable that.
writing an 8 gigabyte test file - so you want to disable that::
# echo 0 > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/sequential_cutoff
# echo 0 > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/sequential_cutoff
To set it back to the default (4 mb), do
To set it back to the default (4 mb), do::
# echo 4M > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/sequential_cutoff
# echo 4M > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/sequential_cutoff
- Traffic's still going to the spindle/still getting cache misses
@ -344,10 +368,10 @@ want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
throttles traffic if the latency exceeds a threshold (it does this by
cranking down the sequential bypass).
You can disable this if you need to by setting the thresholds to 0:
You can disable this if you need to by setting the thresholds to 0::
# echo 0 > /sys/fs/bcache/<cache set>/congested_read_threshold_us
# echo 0 > /sys/fs/bcache/<cache set>/congested_write_threshold_us
# echo 0 > /sys/fs/bcache/<cache set>/congested_read_threshold_us
# echo 0 > /sys/fs/bcache/<cache set>/congested_write_threshold_us
The default is 2000 us (2 milliseconds) for reads, and 20000 for writes.
@ -369,7 +393,7 @@ want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
a fix for the issue there).
SYSFS - BACKING DEVICE
Sysfs - backing device
----------------------
Available at /sys/block/<bdev>/bcache, /sys/block/bcache*/bcache and
@ -454,7 +478,8 @@ writeback_running
still be added to the cache until it is mostly full; only meant for
benchmarking. Defaults to on.
SYSFS - BACKING DEVICE STATS:
Sysfs - backing device stats
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
There are directories with these numbers for a running total, as well as
versions that decay over the past day, hour and 5 minutes; they're also
@ -463,14 +488,11 @@ aggregated in the cache set directory as well.
bypassed
Amount of IO (both reads and writes) that has bypassed the cache
cache_hits
cache_misses
cache_hit_ratio
cache_hits, cache_misses, cache_hit_ratio
Hits and misses are counted per individual IO as bcache sees them; a
partial hit is counted as a miss.
cache_bypass_hits
cache_bypass_misses
cache_bypass_hits, cache_bypass_misses
Hits and misses for IO that is intended to skip the cache are still counted,
but broken out here.
@ -482,7 +504,8 @@ cache_miss_collisions
cache_readaheads
Count of times readahead occurred.
SYSFS - CACHE SET:
Sysfs - cache set
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Available at /sys/fs/bcache/<cset-uuid>
@ -520,8 +543,7 @@ flash_vol_create
Echoing a size to this file (in human readable units, k/M/G) creates a thinly
provisioned volume backed by the cache set.
io_error_halflife
io_error_limit
io_error_halflife, io_error_limit
These determines how many errors we accept before disabling the cache.
Each error is decayed by the half life (in # ios). If the decaying count
reaches io_error_limit dirty data is written out and the cache is disabled.
@ -545,7 +567,8 @@ unregister
Detaches all backing devices and closes the cache devices; if dirty data is
present it will disable writeback caching and wait for it to be flushed.
SYSFS - CACHE SET INTERNAL:
Sysfs - cache set internal
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This directory also exposes timings for a number of internal operations, with
separate files for average duration, average frequency, last occurrence and max
@ -574,7 +597,8 @@ cache_read_races
trigger_gc
Writing to this file forces garbage collection to run.
SYSFS - CACHE DEVICE:
Sysfs - Cache device
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Available at /sys/block/<cdev>/bcache

19
Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt
View File

@ -1,12 +1,8 @@
===============================================================
== BT8XXGPIO driver ==
== ==
== A driver for a selfmade cheap BT8xx based PCI GPIO-card ==
== ==
== For advanced documentation, see ==
== http://www.bu3sch.de/btgpio.php ==
===============================================================
===================================================================
A driver for a selfmade cheap BT8xx based PCI GPIO-card (bt8xxgpio)
===================================================================
For advanced documentation, see http://www.bu3sch.de/btgpio.php
A generic digital 24-port PCI GPIO card can be built out of an ordinary
Brooktree bt848, bt849, bt878 or bt879 based analog TV tuner card. The
@ -17,9 +13,8 @@ The bt8xx chip does have 24 digital GPIO ports.
These ports are accessible via 24 pins on the SMD chip package.
==============================================
== How to physically access the GPIO pins ==
==============================================
How to physically access the GPIO pins
======================================
The are several ways to access these pins. One might unsolder the whole chip
and put it on a custom PCI board, or one might only unsolder each individual
@ -27,7 +22,7 @@ GPIO pin and solder that to some tiny wire. As the chip package really is tiny
there are some advanced soldering skills needed in any case.
The physical pinouts are drawn in the following ASCII art.
The GPIO pins are marked with G00-G23
The GPIO pins are marked with G00-G23::
G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

65
Documentation/btmrvl.txt
View File

@ -1,18 +1,16 @@
=======================================================================
README for btmrvl driver
=======================================================================
=============
btmrvl driver
=============
All commands are used via debugfs interface.
=====================
Set/get driver configurations:
Set/get driver configurations
=============================
Path: /debug/btmrvl/config/
gpiogap=[n]
hscfgcmd
These commands are used to configure the host sleep parameters.
gpiogap=[n], hscfgcmd
These commands are used to configure the host sleep parameters::
bit 8:0 -- Gap
bit 16:8 -- GPIO
@ -23,7 +21,8 @@ hscfgcmd
where Gap is the gap in milli seconds between wakeup signal and
wakeup event, or 0xff for special host sleep setting.
Usage:
Usage::
# Use SDIO interface to wake up the host and set GAP to 0x80:
echo 0xff80 > /debug/btmrvl/config/gpiogap
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscfgcmd
@ -32,15 +31,16 @@ hscfgcmd
echo 0x03ff > /debug/btmrvl/config/gpiogap
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscfgcmd
psmode=[n]
pscmd
psmode=[n], pscmd
These commands are used to enable/disable auto sleep mode
where the option is:
where the option is::
1 -- Enable auto sleep mode
0 -- Disable auto sleep mode
Usage:
Usage::
# Enable auto sleep mode
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/psmode
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/pscmd
@ -50,15 +50,16 @@ pscmd
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/pscmd
hsmode=[n]
hscmd
hsmode=[n], hscmd
These commands are used to enable host sleep or wake up firmware
where the option is:
where the option is::
1 -- Enable host sleep
0 -- Wake up firmware
Usage:
Usage::
# Enable host sleep
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hsmode
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscmd
@ -68,12 +69,13 @@ hscmd
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscmd
======================
Get driver status:
Get driver status
=================
Path: /debug/btmrvl/status/
Usage:
Usage::
cat /debug/btmrvl/status/<args>
where the args are:
@ -90,14 +92,17 @@ hsstate
txdnldrdy
This command displays the value of Tx download ready flag.
=====================
Issuing a raw hci command
=========================
Use hcitool to issue raw hci command, refer to hcitool manual
Usage: Hcitool cmd <ogf> <ocf> [Parameters]
Usage::
Hcitool cmd <ogf> <ocf> [Parameters]
Interface Control Command::
Interface Control Command
hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x01 0x00 --Enable All interface
hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x01 0x01 --Enable Wlan interface
hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x01 0x02 --Enable BT interface
@ -105,13 +110,13 @@ Use hcitool to issue raw hci command, refer to hcitool manual
hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x00 0x01 --Disable Wlan interface
hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x00 0x02 --Disable BT interface
=======================================================================
SD8688 firmware
===============
Images:
SD8688 firmware:
/lib/firmware/sd8688_helper.bin
/lib/firmware/sd8688.bin
- /lib/firmware/sd8688_helper.bin
- /lib/firmware/sd8688.bin
The images can be downloaded from:

64
Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt
View File

@ -1,17 +1,27 @@
[ NOTE: The virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() functions have been
==========================================================
How to access I/O mapped memory from within device drivers
==========================================================
:Author: Linus
.. warning::
The virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() functions have been
superseded by the functionality provided by the PCI DMA interface
(see Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt). They continue
to be documented below for historical purposes, but new code
must not use them. --davidm 00/12/12 ]
must not use them. --davidm 00/12/12
[ This is a mail message in response to a query on IO mapping, thus the
strange format for a "document" ]
::
[ This is a mail message in response to a query on IO mapping, thus the
strange format for a "document" ]
The AHA-1542 is a bus-master device, and your patch makes the driver give the
controller the physical address of the buffers, which is correct on x86
(because all bus master devices see the physical memory mappings directly).
However, on many setups, there are actually _three_ different ways of looking
However, on many setups, there are actually **three** different ways of looking
at memory addresses, and in this case we actually want the third, the
so-called "bus address".
@ -38,7 +48,7 @@ because the memory and the devices share the same address space, and that is
not generally necessarily true on other PCI/ISA setups.
Now, just as an example, on the PReP (PowerPC Reference Platform), the
CPU sees a memory map something like this (this is from memory):
CPU sees a memory map something like this (this is from memory)::
0-2 GB "real memory"
2 GB-3 GB "system IO" (inb/out and similar accesses on x86)
@ -52,7 +62,7 @@ So when the CPU wants any bus master to write to physical memory 0, it
has to give the master address 0x80000000 as the memory address.
So, for example, depending on how the kernel is actually mapped on the
PPC, you can end up with a setup like this:
PPC, you can end up with a setup like this::
physical address: 0
virtual address: 0xC0000000
@ -61,7 +71,7 @@ PPC, you can end up with a setup like this:
where all the addresses actually point to the same thing. It's just seen
through different translations..
Similarly, on the Alpha, the normal translation is
Similarly, on the Alpha, the normal translation is::
physical address: 0
virtual address: 0xfffffc0000000000
@ -70,7 +80,7 @@ Similarly, on the Alpha, the normal translation is
(but there are also Alphas where the physical address and the bus address
are the same).
Anyway, the way to look up all these translations, you do
Anyway, the way to look up all these translations, you do::
#include <asm/io.h>
@ -81,8 +91,8 @@ Anyway, the way to look up all these translations, you do
Now, when do you need these?
You want the _virtual_ address when you are actually going to access that
pointer from the kernel. So you can have something like this:
You want the **virtual** address when you are actually going to access that
pointer from the kernel. So you can have something like this::
/*
* this is the hardware "mailbox" we use to communicate with
@ -104,7 +114,7 @@ pointer from the kernel. So you can have something like this:
...
on the other hand, you want the bus address when you have a buffer that
you want to give to the controller:
you want to give to the controller::
/* ask the controller to read the sense status into "sense_buffer" */
mbox.bufstart = virt_to_bus(&sense_buffer);
@ -112,7 +122,7 @@ you want to give to the controller:
mbox.status = 0;
notify_controller(&mbox);
And you generally _never_ want to use the physical address, because you can't
And you generally **never** want to use the physical address, because you can't
use that from the CPU (the CPU only uses translated virtual addresses), and
you can't use it from the bus master.
@ -124,8 +134,10 @@ be remapped as measured in units of pages, a.k.a. the pfn (the memory
management layer doesn't know about devices outside the CPU, so it
shouldn't need to know about "bus addresses" etc).
NOTE NOTE NOTE! The above is only one part of the whole equation. The above
only talks about "real memory", that is, CPU memory (RAM).
.. note::
The above is only one part of the whole equation. The above
only talks about "real memory", that is, CPU memory (RAM).
There is a completely different type of memory too, and that's the "shared
memory" on the PCI or ISA bus. That's generally not RAM (although in the case
@ -137,20 +149,22 @@ whatever, and there is only one way to access it: the readb/writeb and
related functions. You should never take the address of such memory, because
there is really nothing you can do with such an address: it's not
conceptually in the same memory space as "real memory" at all, so you cannot
just dereference a pointer. (Sadly, on x86 it _is_ in the same memory space,
just dereference a pointer. (Sadly, on x86 it **is** in the same memory space,
so on x86 it actually works to just deference a pointer, but it's not
portable).
For such memory, you can do things like
For such memory, you can do things like:
- reading::
- reading:
/*
* read first 32 bits from ISA memory at 0xC0000, aka
* C000:0000 in DOS terms
*/
unsigned int signature = isa_readl(0xC0000);
- remapping and writing:
- remapping and writing::
/*
* remap framebuffer PCI memory area at 0xFC000000,
* size 1MB, so that we can access it: We can directly
@ -165,7 +179,8 @@ For such memory, you can do things like
/* unmap when we unload the driver */
iounmap(baseptr);
- copying and clearing:
- copying and clearing::
/* get the 6-byte Ethernet address at ISA address E000:0040 */
memcpy_fromio(kernel_buffer, 0xE0040, 6);
/* write a packet to the driver */
@ -181,10 +196,10 @@ happy that your driver works ;)
Note that kernel versions 2.0.x (and earlier) mistakenly called the
ioremap() function "vremap()". ioremap() is the proper name, but I
didn't think straight when I wrote it originally. People who have to
support both can do something like:
support both can do something like::
/* support old naming silliness */
#if LINUX_VERSION_CODE < 0x020100
#if LINUX_VERSION_CODE < 0x020100
#define ioremap vremap
#define iounmap vfree
#endif
@ -196,13 +211,10 @@ And the above sounds worse than it really is. Most real drivers really
don't do all that complex things (or rather: the complexity is not so
much in the actual IO accesses as in error handling and timeouts etc).
It's generally not hard to fix drivers, and in many cases the code
actually looks better afterwards:
actually looks better afterwards::
unsigned long signature = *(unsigned int *) 0xC0000;
vs
unsigned long signature = readl(0xC0000);
I think the second version actually is more readable, no?
Linus

92
Documentation/cachetlb.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
Cache and TLB Flushing
Under Linux
==================================
Cache and TLB Flushing Under Linux
==================================
David S. Miller <davem@redhat.com>
:Author: David S. Miller <davem@redhat.com>
This document describes the cache/tlb flushing interfaces called
by the Linux VM subsystem. It enumerates over each interface,
@ -28,7 +29,7 @@ Therefore when software page table changes occur, the kernel will
invoke one of the following flush methods _after_ the page table
changes occur:
1) void flush_tlb_all(void)
1) ``void flush_tlb_all(void)``
The most severe flush of all. After this interface runs,
any previous page table modification whatsoever will be
@ -37,7 +38,7 @@ changes occur:
This is usually invoked when the kernel page tables are
changed, since such translations are "global" in nature.
2) void flush_tlb_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)
2) ``void flush_tlb_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)``
This interface flushes an entire user address space from
the TLB. After running, this interface must make sure that
@ -49,8 +50,8 @@ changes occur:
page table operations such as what happens during
fork, and exec.
3) void flush_tlb_range(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long start, unsigned long end)
3) ``void flush_tlb_range(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long start, unsigned long end)``
Here we are flushing a specific range of (user) virtual
address translations from the TLB. After running, this
@ -69,7 +70,7 @@ changes occur:
call flush_tlb_page (see below) for each entry which may be
modified.
4) void flush_tlb_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, unsigned long addr)
4) ``void flush_tlb_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, unsigned long addr)``
This time we need to remove the PAGE_SIZE sized translation
from the TLB. The 'vma' is the backing structure used by
@ -87,8 +88,8 @@ changes occur:
This is used primarily during fault processing.
5) void update_mmu_cache(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long address, pte_t *ptep)
5) ``void update_mmu_cache(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long address, pte_t *ptep)``
At the end of every page fault, this routine is invoked to
tell the architecture specific code that a translation
@ -100,7 +101,7 @@ changes occur:
translations for software managed TLB configurations.
The sparc64 port currently does this.
6) void tlb_migrate_finish(struct mm_struct *mm)
6) ``void tlb_migrate_finish(struct mm_struct *mm)``
This interface is called at the end of an explicit
process migration. This interface provides a hook
@ -112,7 +113,7 @@ changes occur:
Next, we have the cache flushing interfaces. In general, when Linux
is changing an existing virtual-->physical mapping to a new value,
the sequence will be in one of the following forms:
the sequence will be in one of the following forms::
1) flush_cache_mm(mm);
change_all_page_tables_of(mm);
@ -143,7 +144,7 @@ and have no dependency on translation information.
Here are the routines, one by one:
1) void flush_cache_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)
1) ``void flush_cache_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)``
This interface flushes an entire user address space from
the caches. That is, after running, there will be no cache
@ -152,7 +153,7 @@ Here are the routines, one by one:
This interface is used to handle whole address space
page table operations such as what happens during exit and exec.
2) void flush_cache_dup_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)
2) ``void flush_cache_dup_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)``
This interface flushes an entire user address space from
the caches. That is, after running, there will be no cache
@ -164,8 +165,8 @@ Here are the routines, one by one:
This option is separate from flush_cache_mm to allow some
optimizations for VIPT caches.
3) void flush_cache_range(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long start, unsigned long end)
3) ``void flush_cache_range(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long start, unsigned long end)``
Here we are flushing a specific range of (user) virtual
addresses from the cache. After running, there will be no
@ -181,7 +182,7 @@ Here are the routines, one by one:
call flush_cache_page (see below) for each entry which may be
modified.
4) void flush_cache_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, unsigned long addr, unsigned long pfn)
4) ``void flush_cache_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, unsigned long addr, unsigned long pfn)``
This time we need to remove a PAGE_SIZE sized range
from the cache. The 'vma' is the backing structure used by
@ -202,7 +203,7 @@ Here are the routines, one by one:
This is used primarily during fault processing.
5) void flush_cache_kmaps(void)
5) ``void flush_cache_kmaps(void)``
This routine need only be implemented if the platform utilizes
highmem. It will be called right before all of the kmaps
@ -214,8 +215,8 @@ Here are the routines, one by one:
This routing should be implemented in asm/highmem.h
6) void flush_cache_vmap(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)
void flush_cache_vunmap(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)
6) ``void flush_cache_vmap(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)``
``void flush_cache_vunmap(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)``
Here in these two interfaces we are flushing a specific range
of (kernel) virtual addresses from the cache. After running,
@ -243,8 +244,10 @@ size). This setting will force the SYSv IPC layer to only allow user
processes to mmap shared memory at address which are a multiple of
this value.
NOTE: This does not fix shared mmaps, check out the sparc64 port for
one way to solve this (in particular SPARC_FLAG_MMAPSHARED).
.. note::
This does not fix shared mmaps, check out the sparc64 port for
one way to solve this (in particular SPARC_FLAG_MMAPSHARED).
Next, you have to solve the D-cache aliasing issue for all
other cases. Please keep in mind that fact that, for a given page
@ -255,8 +258,8 @@ physical page into its address space, by implication the D-cache
aliasing problem has the potential to exist since the kernel already
maps this page at its virtual address.
void copy_user_page(void *to, void *from, unsigned long addr, struct page *page)
void clear_user_page(void *to, unsigned long addr, struct page *page)
``void copy_user_page(void *to, void *from, unsigned long addr, struct page *page)``
``void clear_user_page(void *to, unsigned long addr, struct page *page)``
These two routines store data in user anonymous or COW
pages. It allows a port to efficiently avoid D-cache alias
@ -276,14 +279,16 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
If D-cache aliasing is not an issue, these two routines may
simply call memcpy/memset directly and do nothing more.
void flush_dcache_page(struct page *page)
``void flush_dcache_page(struct page *page)``
Any time the kernel writes to a page cache page, _OR_
the kernel is about to read from a page cache page and
user space shared/writable mappings of this page potentially
exist, this routine is called.
NOTE: This routine need only be called for page cache pages
.. note::
This routine need only be called for page cache pages
which can potentially ever be mapped into the address
space of a user process. So for example, VFS layer code
handling vfs symlinks in the page cache need not call
@ -322,18 +327,19 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
made of this flag bit, and if set the flush is done and the flag
bit is cleared.
IMPORTANT NOTE: It is often important, if you defer the flush,
.. important::
It is often important, if you defer the flush,
that the actual flush occurs on the same CPU
as did the cpu stores into the page to make it
dirty. Again, see sparc64 for examples of how
to deal with this.
void copy_to_user_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long user_vaddr,
void *dst, void *src, int len)
void copy_from_user_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long user_vaddr,
void *dst, void *src, int len)
``void copy_to_user_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long user_vaddr, void *dst, void *src, int len)``
``void copy_from_user_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long user_vaddr, void *dst, void *src, int len)``
When the kernel needs to copy arbitrary data in and out
of arbitrary user pages (f.e. for ptrace()) it will use
these two routines.
@ -344,8 +350,9 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
likely that you will need to flush the instruction cache
for copy_to_user_page().
void flush_anon_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long vmaddr)
``void flush_anon_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long vmaddr)``
When the kernel needs to access the contents of an anonymous
page, it calls this function (currently only
get_user_pages()). Note: flush_dcache_page() deliberately
@ -354,7 +361,8 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
architectures). For incoherent architectures, it should flush
the cache of the page at vmaddr.
void flush_kernel_dcache_page(struct page *page)
``void flush_kernel_dcache_page(struct page *page)``
When the kernel needs to modify a user page is has obtained
with kmap, it calls this function after all modifications are
complete (but before kunmapping it) to bring the underlying
@ -366,14 +374,16 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
the kernel cache for page (using page_address(page)).
void flush_icache_range(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)
``void flush_icache_range(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)``
When the kernel stores into addresses that it will execute
out of (eg when loading modules), this function is called.
If the icache does not snoop stores then this routine will need
to flush it.
void flush_icache_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page)
``void flush_icache_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page)``
All the functionality of flush_icache_page can be implemented in
flush_dcache_page and update_mmu_cache. In the future, the hope
is to remove this interface completely.
@ -387,7 +397,8 @@ the kernel trying to do I/O to vmap areas must manually manage
coherency. It must do this by flushing the vmap range before doing
I/O and invalidating it after the I/O returns.
void flush_kernel_vmap_range(void *vaddr, int size)
``void flush_kernel_vmap_range(void *vaddr, int size)``
flushes the kernel cache for a given virtual address range in
the vmap area. This is to make sure that any data the kernel
modified in the vmap range is made visible to the physical
@ -395,7 +406,8 @@ I/O and invalidating it after the I/O returns.
Note that this API does *not* also flush the offset map alias
of the area.
void invalidate_kernel_vmap_range(void *vaddr, int size) invalidates
``void invalidate_kernel_vmap_range(void *vaddr, int size) invalidates``
the cache for a given virtual address range in the vmap area
which prevents the processor from making the cache stale by
speculatively reading data while the I/O was occurring to the

452
Documentation/cgroup-v2.txt
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

51
Documentation/circular-buffers.txt
View File

@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
================
CIRCULAR BUFFERS
================
================
Circular Buffers
================
By: David Howells <dhowells@redhat.com>
Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
:Author: David Howells <dhowells@redhat.com>
:Author: Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Linux provides a number of features that can be used to implement circular
@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ producer and just one consumer. It is possible to handle multiple producers by
serialising them, and to handle multiple consumers by serialising them.
Contents:
.. Contents:
(*) What is a circular buffer?
@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ Contents:
- The consumer.
==========================
WHAT IS A CIRCULAR BUFFER?
What is a circular buffer?
==========================
First of all, what is a circular buffer? A circular buffer is a buffer of
@ -60,9 +60,7 @@ buffer, provided that neither index overtakes the other. The implementer must
be careful, however, as a region more than one unit in size may wrap the end of
the buffer and be broken into two segments.
============================
MEASURING POWER-OF-2 BUFFERS
Measuring power-of-2 buffers
============================
Calculation of the occupancy or the remaining capacity of an arbitrarily sized
@ -71,13 +69,13 @@ modulus (divide) instruction. However, if the buffer is of a power-of-2 size,
then a much quicker bitwise-AND instruction can be used instead.
Linux provides a set of macros for handling power-of-2 circular buffers. These
can be made use of by:
can be made use of by::
#include <linux/circ_buf.h>
The macros are:
(*) Measure the remaining capacity of a buffer:
(#) Measure the remaining capacity of a buffer::
CIRC_SPACE(head_index, tail_index, buffer_size);
@ -85,7 +83,7 @@ The macros are:
can be inserted.
(*) Measure the maximum consecutive immediate space in a buffer:
(#) Measure the maximum consecutive immediate space in a buffer::
CIRC_SPACE_TO_END(head_index, tail_index, buffer_size);
@ -94,14 +92,14 @@ The macros are:
beginning of the buffer.
(*) Measure the occupancy of a buffer:
(#) Measure the occupancy of a buffer::
CIRC_CNT(head_index, tail_index, buffer_size);
This returns the number of items currently occupying a buffer[2].
(*) Measure the non-wrapping occupancy of a buffer:
(#) Measure the non-wrapping occupancy of a buffer::
CIRC_CNT_TO_END(head_index, tail_index, buffer_size);
@ -112,7 +110,7 @@ The macros are:
Each of these macros will nominally return a value between 0 and buffer_size-1,
however:
[1] CIRC_SPACE*() are intended to be used in the producer. To the producer
(1) CIRC_SPACE*() are intended to be used in the producer. To the producer
they will return a lower bound as the producer controls the head index,
but the consumer may still be depleting the buffer on another CPU and
moving the tail index.
@ -120,7 +118,7 @@ however:
To the consumer it will show an upper bound as the producer may be busy
depleting the space.
[2] CIRC_CNT*() are intended to be used in the consumer. To the consumer they
(2) CIRC_CNT*() are intended to be used in the consumer. To the consumer they
will return a lower bound as the consumer controls the tail index, but the
producer may still be filling the buffer on another CPU and moving the
head index.
@ -128,14 +126,12 @@ however:
To the producer it will show an upper bound as the consumer may be busy
emptying the buffer.
[3] To a third party, the order in which the writes to the indices by the
(3) To a third party, the order in which the writes to the indices by the
producer and consumer become visible cannot be guaranteed as they are
independent and may be made on different CPUs - so the result in such a
situation will merely be a guess, and may even be negative.
===========================================
USING MEMORY BARRIERS WITH CIRCULAR BUFFERS
Using memory barriers with circular buffers
===========================================
By using memory barriers in conjunction with circular buffers, you can avoid
@ -152,10 +148,10 @@ time, and only one thing should be emptying a buffer at any one time, but the
two sides can operate simultaneously.
THE PRODUCER
The producer
------------
The producer will look something like this:
The producer will look something like this::
spin_lock(&producer_lock);
@ -193,10 +189,10 @@ ordering between the read of the index indicating that the consumer has
vacated a given element and the write by the producer to that same element.
THE CONSUMER
The Consumer
------------
The consumer will look something like this:
The consumer will look something like this::
spin_lock(&consumer_lock);
@ -235,8 +231,7 @@ prevents the compiler from tearing the store, and enforces ordering
against previous accesses.
===============
FURTHER READING
Further reading
===============
See also Documentation/memory-barriers.txt for a description of Linux's memory

189
Documentation/clk.txt
View File

@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
The Common Clk Framework
Mike Turquette <mturquette@ti.com>
========================
The Common Clk Framework
========================
:Author: Mike Turquette <mturquette@ti.com>
This document endeavours to explain the common clk framework details,
and how to port a platform over to this framework. It is not yet a
detailed explanation of the clock api in include/linux/clk.h, but
perhaps someday it will include that information.
Part 1 - introduction and interface split
Introduction and interface split
================================
The common clk framework is an interface to control the clock nodes
available on various devices today. This may come in the form of clock
@ -35,10 +39,11 @@ is defined in struct clk_foo and pointed to within struct clk_core. This
allows for easy navigation between the two discrete halves of the common
clock interface.
Part 2 - common data structures and api
Common data structures and api
==============================
Below is the common struct clk_core definition from
drivers/clk/clk.c, modified for brevity:
drivers/clk/clk.c, modified for brevity::
struct clk_core {
const char *name;
@ -59,7 +64,7 @@ struct clk. That api is documented in include/linux/clk.h.
Platforms and devices utilizing the common struct clk_core use the struct
clk_ops pointer in struct clk_core to perform the hardware-specific parts of
the operations defined in clk-provider.h:
the operations defined in clk-provider.h::
struct clk_ops {
int (*prepare)(struct clk_hw *hw);
@ -95,19 +100,20 @@ the operations defined in clk-provider.h:
struct dentry *dentry);
};
Part 3 - hardware clk implementations
Hardware clk implementations
============================
The strength of the common struct clk_core comes from its .ops and .hw pointers
which abstract the details of struct clk from the hardware-specific bits, and
vice versa. To illustrate consider the simple gateable clk implementation in
drivers/clk/clk-gate.c:
drivers/clk/clk-gate.c::
struct clk_gate {
struct clk_hw hw;
void __iomem *reg;
u8 bit_idx;
...
};
struct clk_gate {
struct clk_hw hw;
void __iomem *reg;
u8 bit_idx;
...
};
struct clk_gate contains struct clk_hw hw as well as hardware-specific
knowledge about which register and bit controls this clk's gating.
@ -115,7 +121,7 @@ Nothing about clock topology or accounting, such as enable_count or
notifier_count, is needed here. That is all handled by the common
framework code and struct clk_core.
Let's walk through enabling this clk from driver code:
Let's walk through enabling this clk from driver code::
struct clk *clk;
clk = clk_get(NULL, "my_gateable_clk");
@ -123,70 +129,71 @@ Let's walk through enabling this clk from driver code:
clk_prepare(clk);
clk_enable(clk);
The call graph for clk_enable is very simple:
The call graph for clk_enable is very simple::
clk_enable(clk);
clk->ops->enable(clk->hw);
[resolves to...]
clk_gate_enable(hw);
[resolves struct clk gate with to_clk_gate(hw)]
clk_gate_set_bit(gate);
clk_enable(clk);
clk->ops->enable(clk->hw);
[resolves to...]
clk_gate_enable(hw);
[resolves struct clk gate with to_clk_gate(hw)]
clk_gate_set_bit(gate);
And the definition of clk_gate_set_bit:
And the definition of clk_gate_set_bit::
static void clk_gate_set_bit(struct clk_gate *gate)
{
u32 reg;
static void clk_gate_set_bit(struct clk_gate *gate)
{
u32 reg;
reg = __raw_readl(gate->reg);
reg |= BIT(gate->bit_idx);
writel(reg, gate->reg);
}
reg = __raw_readl(gate->reg);
reg |= BIT(gate->bit_idx);
writel(reg, gate->reg);
}
Note that to_clk_gate is defined as:
Note that to_clk_gate is defined as::
#define to_clk_gate(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_gate, hw)
#define to_clk_gate(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_gate, hw)
This pattern of abstraction is used for every clock hardware
representation.
Part 4 - supporting your own clk hardware
Supporting your own clk hardware
================================
When implementing support for a new type of clock it is only necessary to
include the following header:
include the following header::
#include <linux/clk-provider.h>
#include <linux/clk-provider.h>
To construct a clk hardware structure for your platform you must define
the following:
the following::
struct clk_foo {
struct clk_hw hw;
... hardware specific data goes here ...
};
struct clk_foo {
struct clk_hw hw;
... hardware specific data goes here ...
};
To take advantage of your data you'll need to support valid operations
for your clk:
for your clk::
struct clk_ops clk_foo_ops {
.enable = &clk_foo_enable;
.disable = &clk_foo_disable;
};
struct clk_ops clk_foo_ops {
.enable = &clk_foo_enable;
.disable = &clk_foo_disable;
};
Implement the above functions using container_of:
Implement the above functions using container_of::
#define to_clk_foo(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_foo, hw)
#define to_clk_foo(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_foo, hw)
int clk_foo_enable(struct clk_hw *hw)
{
struct clk_foo *foo;
int clk_foo_enable(struct clk_hw *hw)
{
struct clk_foo *foo;
foo = to_clk_foo(hw);
foo = to_clk_foo(hw);
... perform magic on foo ...
... perform magic on foo ...
return 0;
};
return 0;
};
Below is a matrix detailing which clk_ops are mandatory based upon the
hardware capabilities of that clock. A cell marked as "y" means
@ -194,41 +201,56 @@ mandatory, a cell marked as "n" implies that either including that
callback is invalid or otherwise unnecessary. Empty cells are either
optional or must be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.
clock hardware characteristics
-----------------------------------------------------------
| gate | change rate | single parent | multiplexer | root |
|------|-------------|---------------|-------------|------|
.prepare | | | | | |
.unprepare | | | | | |
| | | | | |
.enable | y | | | | |
.disable | y | | | | |
.is_enabled | y | | | | |
| | | | | |
.recalc_rate | | y | | | |
.round_rate | | y [1] | | | |
.determine_rate | | y [1] | | | |
.set_rate | | y | | | |
| | | | | |
.set_parent | | | n | y | n |
.get_parent | | | n | y | n |
| | | | | |
.recalc_accuracy| | | | | |
| | | | | |
.init | | | | | |
-----------------------------------------------------------
[1] either one of round_rate or determine_rate is required.
.. table:: clock hardware characteristics
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
| | gate | change rate | single parent | multiplexer | root |
+================+======+=============+===============+=============+======+
|.prepare | | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.unprepare | | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.enable | y | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.disable | y | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.is_enabled | y | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.recalc_rate | | y | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.round_rate | | y [1]_ | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.determine_rate | | y [1]_ | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.set_rate | | y | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.set_parent | | | n | y | n |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.get_parent | | | n | y | n |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.recalc_accuracy| | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.init | | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
.. [1] either one of round_rate or determine_rate is required.
Finally, register your clock at run-time with a hardware-specific
registration function. This function simply populates struct clk_foo's
data and then passes the common struct clk parameters to the framework
with a call to:
with a call to::
clk_register(...)
clk_register(...)
See the basic clock types in drivers/clk/clk-*.c for examples.
See the basic clock types in ``drivers/clk/clk-*.c`` for examples.
Part 5 - Disabling clock gating of unused clocks
Disabling clock gating of unused clocks
=======================================
Sometimes during development it can be useful to be able to bypass the
default disabling of unused clocks. For example, if drivers aren't enabling
@ -239,7 +261,8 @@ are sorted out.
To bypass this disabling, include "clk_ignore_unused" in the bootargs to the
kernel.
Part 6 - Locking
Locking
=======
The common clock framework uses two global locks, the prepare lock and the
enable lock.

2
Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst
View File

@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ The Slab Cache
User Space Memory Access
------------------------
.. kernel-doc:: arch/x86/include/asm/uaccess_32.h
.. kernel-doc:: arch/x86/include/asm/uaccess.h
:internal:
.. kernel-doc:: arch/x86/lib/usercopy_32.c

117
Documentation/cpu-load.txt
View File

@ -1,9 +1,10 @@
========
CPU load
--------
========
Linux exports various bits of information via `/proc/stat' and
`/proc/uptime' that userland tools, such as top(1), use to calculate
the average time system spent in a particular state, for example:
Linux exports various bits of information via ``/proc/stat`` and
``/proc/uptime`` that userland tools, such as top(1), use to calculate
the average time system spent in a particular state, for example::
$ iostat
Linux 2.6.18.3-exp (linmac) 02/20/2007
@ -17,7 +18,7 @@ Here the system thinks that over the default sampling period the
system spent 10.01% of the time doing work in user space, 2.92% in the
kernel, and was overall 81.63% of the time idle.
In most cases the `/proc/stat' information reflects the reality quite
In most cases the ``/proc/stat`` information reflects the reality quite
closely, however due to the nature of how/when the kernel collects
this data sometimes it can not be trusted at all.
@ -33,78 +34,78 @@ Example
-------
If we imagine the system with one task that periodically burns cycles
in the following manner:
in the following manner::
time line between two timer interrupts
|--------------------------------------|
^ ^
|_ something begins working |
|_ something goes to sleep
(only to be awaken quite soon)
time line between two timer interrupts
|--------------------------------------|
^ ^
|_ something begins working |
|_ something goes to sleep
(only to be awaken quite soon)
In the above situation the system will be 0% loaded according to the
`/proc/stat' (since the timer interrupt will always happen when the
``/proc/stat`` (since the timer interrupt will always happen when the
system is executing the idle handler), but in reality the load is
closer to 99%.
One can imagine many more situations where this behavior of the kernel
will lead to quite erratic information inside `/proc/stat'.
will lead to quite erratic information inside ``/proc/stat``::
/* gcc -o hog smallhog.c */
#include <time.h>
#include <limits.h>
#include <signal.h>
#include <sys/time.h>
#define HIST 10
/* gcc -o hog smallhog.c */
#include <time.h>
#include <limits.h>
#include <signal.h>
#include <sys/time.h>
#define HIST 10
static volatile sig_atomic_t stop;
static volatile sig_atomic_t stop;
static void sighandler (int signr)
{
(void) signr;
stop = 1;
}
static unsigned long hog (unsigned long niters)
{
stop = 0;
while (!stop && --niters);
return niters;
}
int main (void)
{
int i;
struct itimerval it = { .it_interval = { .tv_sec = 0, .tv_usec = 1 },
.it_value = { .tv_sec = 0, .tv_usec = 1 } };
sigset_t set;
unsigned long v[HIST];
double tmp = 0.0;
unsigned long n;
signal (SIGALRM, &sighandler);
setitimer (ITIMER_REAL, &it, NULL);
static void sighandler (int signr)
{
(void) signr;
stop = 1;
}
static unsigned long hog (unsigned long niters)
{
stop = 0;
while (!stop && --niters);
return niters;
}
int main (void)
{
int i;
struct itimerval it = { .it_interval = { .tv_sec = 0, .tv_usec = 1 },
.it_value = { .tv_sec = 0, .tv_usec = 1 } };
sigset_t set;
unsigned long v[HIST];
double tmp = 0.0;
unsigned long n;
signal (SIGALRM, &sighandler);
setitimer (ITIMER_REAL, &it, NULL);
hog (ULONG_MAX);
for (i = 0; i < HIST; ++i) v[i] = ULONG_MAX - hog (ULONG_MAX);
for (i = 0; i < HIST; ++i) tmp += v[i];
tmp /= HIST;
n = tmp - (tmp / 3.0);
hog (ULONG_MAX);
for (i = 0; i < HIST; ++i) v[i] = ULONG_MAX - hog (ULONG_MAX);
for (i = 0; i < HIST; ++i) tmp += v[i];
tmp /= HIST;
n = tmp - (tmp / 3.0);
sigemptyset (&set);
sigaddset (&set, SIGALRM);
sigemptyset (&set);
sigaddset (&set, SIGALRM);
for (;;) {
hog (n);
sigwait (&set, &i);
}
return 0;
}
for (;;) {
hog (n);
sigwait (&set, &i);
}
return 0;
}
References
----------
http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/2/12/6
Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt (1.8)
- http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/2/12/6
- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt (1.8)
Thanks

35
Documentation/cputopology.txt
View File

@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
===========================================
How CPU topology info is exported via sysfs
===========================================
Export CPU topology info via sysfs. Items (attributes) are similar
to /proc/cpuinfo output of some architectures:
@ -75,24 +78,26 @@ CONFIG_SCHED_BOOK and CONFIG_DRAWER are currently only used on s390, where
they reflect the cpu and cache hierarchy.
For an architecture to support this feature, it must define some of
these macros in include/asm-XXX/topology.h:
#define topology_physical_package_id(cpu)
#define topology_core_id(cpu)
#define topology_book_id(cpu)
#define topology_drawer_id(cpu)
#define topology_sibling_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_core_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_book_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_drawer_cpumask(cpu)
these macros in include/asm-XXX/topology.h::
The type of **_id macros is int.
The type of **_cpumask macros is (const) struct cpumask *. The latter
correspond with appropriate **_siblings sysfs attributes (except for
#define topology_physical_package_id(cpu)
#define topology_core_id(cpu)
#define topology_book_id(cpu)
#define topology_drawer_id(cpu)
#define topology_sibling_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_core_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_book_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_drawer_cpumask(cpu)
The type of ``**_id macros`` is int.
The type of ``**_cpumask macros`` is ``(const) struct cpumask *``. The latter
correspond with appropriate ``**_siblings`` sysfs attributes (except for
topology_sibling_cpumask() which corresponds with thread_siblings).
To be consistent on all architectures, include/linux/topology.h
provides default definitions for any of the above macros that are
not defined by include/asm-XXX/topology.h:
1) physical_package_id: -1
2) core_id: 0
3) sibling_cpumask: just the given CPU
@ -107,6 +112,7 @@ Additionally, CPU topology information is provided under
/sys/devices/system/cpu and includes these files. The internal
source for the output is in brackets ("[]").
=========== ==========================================================
kernel_max: the maximum CPU index allowed by the kernel configuration.
[NR_CPUS-1]
@ -122,6 +128,7 @@ source for the output is in brackets ("[]").
present: CPUs that have been identified as being present in the
system. [cpu_present_mask]
=========== ==========================================================
The format for the above output is compatible with cpulist_parse()
[see <linux/cpumask.h>]. Some examples follow.
@ -129,7 +136,7 @@ The format for the above output is compatible with cpulist_parse()
In this example, there are 64 CPUs in the system but cpus 32-63 exceed
the kernel max which is limited to 0..31 by the NR_CPUS config option
being 32. Note also that CPUs 2 and 4-31 are not online but could be
brought online as they are both present and possible.
brought online as they are both present and possible::
kernel_max: 31
offline: 2,4-31,32-63
@ -140,7 +147,7 @@ brought online as they are both present and possible.
In this example, the NR_CPUS config option is 128, but the kernel was
started with possible_cpus=144. There are 4 CPUs in the system and cpu2
was manually taken offline (and is the only CPU that can be brought
online.)
online.)::
kernel_max: 127
offline: 2,4-127,128-143

77
Documentation/crc32.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
A brief CRC tutorial.
=================================
brief tutorial on CRC computation
=================================
A CRC is a long-division remainder. You add the CRC to the message,
and the whole thing (message+CRC) is a multiple of the given
@ -8,7 +10,8 @@ remainder computed on the message+CRC is 0. This latter approach
is used by a lot of hardware implementations, and is why so many
protocols put the end-of-frame flag after the CRC.
It's actually the same long division you learned in school, except that
It's actually the same long division you learned in school, except that:
- We're working in binary, so the digits are only 0 and 1, and
- When dividing polynomials, there are no carries. Rather than add and
subtract, we just xor. Thus, we tend to get a bit sloppy about
@ -40,11 +43,12 @@ throw the quotient bit away, but subtract the appropriate multiple of
the polynomial from the remainder and we're back to where we started,
ready to process the next bit.
A big-endian CRC written this way would be coded like:
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
multiple = remainder & 0x80000000 ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1 | next_input_bit()) ^ multiple;
}
A big-endian CRC written this way would be coded like::
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
multiple = remainder & 0x80000000 ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1 | next_input_bit()) ^ multiple;
}
Notice how, to get at bit 32 of the shifted remainder, we look
at bit 31 of the remainder *before* shifting it.
@ -54,25 +58,26 @@ the remainder don't actually affect any decision-making until
32 bits later. Thus, the first 32 cycles of this are pretty boring.
Also, to add the CRC to a message, we need a 32-bit-long hole for it at
the end, so we have to add 32 extra cycles shifting in zeros at the
end of every message,
end of every message.
These details lead to a standard trick: rearrange merging in the
next_input_bit() until the moment it's needed. Then the first 32 cycles
can be precomputed, and merging in the final 32 zero bits to make room
for the CRC can be skipped entirely. This changes the code to:
for the CRC can be skipped entirely. This changes the code to::
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_bit() << 31;
multiple = (remainder & 0x80000000) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1) ^ multiple;
}
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_bit() << 31;
multiple = (remainder & 0x80000000) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1) ^ multiple;
}
With this optimization, the little-endian code is particularly simple:
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_bit();
multiple = (remainder & 1) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder >> 1) ^ multiple;
}
With this optimization, the little-endian code is particularly simple::
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_bit();
multiple = (remainder & 1) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder >> 1) ^ multiple;
}
The most significant coefficient of the remainder polynomial is stored
in the least significant bit of the binary "remainder" variable.
@ -81,23 +86,25 @@ be bit-reversed) and next_input_bit().
As long as next_input_bit is returning the bits in a sensible order, we don't
*have* to wait until the last possible moment to merge in additional bits.
We can do it 8 bits at a time rather than 1 bit at a time:
for (i = 0; i < input_bytes; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_byte() << 24;
for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
multiple = (remainder & 0x80000000) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1) ^ multiple;
}
}
We can do it 8 bits at a time rather than 1 bit at a time::
Or in little-endian:
for (i = 0; i < input_bytes; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_byte();
for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
multiple = (remainder & 1) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder >> 1) ^ multiple;
for (i = 0; i < input_bytes; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_byte() << 24;
for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
multiple = (remainder & 0x80000000) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1) ^ multiple;
}
}
Or in little-endian::
for (i = 0; i < input_bytes; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_byte();
for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
multiple = (remainder & 1) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder >> 1) ^ multiple;
}
}
}
If the input is a multiple of 32 bits, you can even XOR in a 32-bit
word at a time and increase the inner loop count to 32.

65
Documentation/crypto/asymmetric-keys.txt
View File

@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Contents:
- Signature verification.
- Asymmetric key subtypes.
- Instantiation data parsers.
- Keyring link restrictions.
========
@ -318,7 +319,8 @@ KEYRING LINK RESTRICTIONS
=========================
Keyrings created from userspace using add_key can be configured to check the
signature of the key being linked.
signature of the key being linked. Keys without a valid signature are not
allowed to link.
Several restriction methods are available:
@ -327,9 +329,10 @@ Several restriction methods are available:
- Option string used with KEYCTL_RESTRICT_KEYRING:
- "builtin_trusted"
The kernel builtin trusted keyring will be searched for the signing
key. The ca_keys kernel parameter also affects which keys are used for
signature verification.
The kernel builtin trusted keyring will be searched for the signing key.
If the builtin trusted keyring is not configured, all links will be
rejected. The ca_keys kernel parameter also affects which keys are used
for signature verification.
(2) Restrict using the kernel builtin and secondary trusted keyrings
@ -337,8 +340,10 @@ Several restriction methods are available:
- "builtin_and_secondary_trusted"
The kernel builtin and secondary trusted keyrings will be searched for the
signing key. The ca_keys kernel parameter also affects which keys are used
for signature verification.
signing key. If the secondary trusted keyring is not configured, this
restriction will behave like the "builtin_trusted" option. The ca_keys
kernel parameter also affects which keys are used for signature
verification.
(3) Restrict using a separate key or keyring
@ -346,7 +351,7 @@ Several restriction methods are available:
- "key_or_keyring:<key or keyring serial number>[:chain]"
Whenever a key link is requested, the link will only succeed if the key
being linked is signed by one of the designated keys. This key may be
being linked is signed by one of the designated keys. This key may be
specified directly by providing a serial number for one asymmetric key, or
a group of keys may be searched for the signing key by providing the
serial number for a keyring.
@ -354,7 +359,51 @@ Several restriction methods are available:
When the "chain" option is provided at the end of the string, the keys
within the destination keyring will also be searched for signing keys.
This allows for verification of certificate chains by adding each
cert in order (starting closest to the root) to one keyring.
certificate in order (starting closest to the root) to a keyring. For
instance, one keyring can be populated with links to a set of root
certificates, with a separate, restricted keyring set up for each
certificate chain to be validated:
# Create and populate a keyring for root certificates
root_id=`keyctl add keyring root-certs "" @s`
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $root_id < root1.cert
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $root_id < root2.cert
# Create and restrict a keyring for the certificate chain
chain_id=`keyctl add keyring chain "" @s`
keyctl restrict_keyring $chain_id asymmetric key_or_keyring:$root_id:chain
# Attempt to add each certificate in the chain, starting with the
# certificate closest to the root.
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain_id < intermediateA.cert
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain_id < intermediateB.cert
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain_id < end-entity.cert
If the final end-entity certificate is successfully added to the "chain"
keyring, we can be certain that it has a valid signing chain going back to
one of the root certificates.
A single keyring can be used to verify a chain of signatures by
restricting the keyring after linking the root certificate:
# Create a keyring for the certificate chain and add the root
chain2_id=`keyctl add keyring chain2 "" @s`
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain2_id < root1.cert
# Restrict the keyring that already has root1.cert linked. The cert
# will remain linked by the keyring.
keyctl restrict_keyring $chain2_id asymmetric key_or_keyring:0:chain
# Attempt to add each certificate in the chain, starting with the
# certificate closest to the root.
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain2_id < intermediateA.cert
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain2_id < intermediateB.cert
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain2_id < end-entity.cert
If the final end-entity certificate is successfully added to the "chain2"
keyring, we can be certain that there is a valid signing chain going back
to the root certificate that was added before the keyring was restricted.
In all of these cases, if the signing key is found the signature of the key to
be linked will be verified using the signing key. The requested key is added

24
Documentation/dcdbas.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
===================================
Dell Systems Management Base Driver
===================================
Overview
========
The Dell Systems Management Base Driver provides a sysfs interface for
systems management software such as Dell OpenManage to perform system
@ -17,6 +22,7 @@ more information about the libsmbios project.
System Management Interrupt
===========================
On some Dell systems, systems management software must access certain
management information via a system management interrupt (SMI). The SMI data
@ -24,12 +30,12 @@ buffer must reside in 32-bit address space, and the physical address of the
buffer is required for the SMI. The driver maintains the memory required for
the SMI and provides a way for the application to generate the SMI.
The driver creates the following sysfs entries for systems management
software to perform these system management interrupts:
software to perform these system management interrupts::
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_phys_addr
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_size
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_request
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_phys_addr
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_size
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_request
Systems management software must perform the following steps to execute
a SMI using this driver:
@ -43,6 +49,7 @@ a SMI using this driver:
Host Control Action
===================
Dell OpenManage supports a host control feature that allows the administrator
to perform a power cycle or power off of the system after the OS has finished
@ -69,12 +76,14 @@ power off host control action using this driver:
Host Control SMI Type
=====================
The following table shows the value to write to host_control_smi_type to
perform a power cycle or power off host control action:
=================== =====================
PowerEdge System Host Control SMI Type
---------------- ---------------------
=================== =====================
300 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE1
1300 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE1
1400 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2
@ -87,5 +96,4 @@ PowerEdge System Host Control SMI Type
1655MC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2
700 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE3
750 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE3
=================== =====================

21
Documentation/debugging-via-ohci1394.txt
View File

@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Using physical DMA provided by OHCI-1394 FireWire controllers for debugging
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
===========================================================================
Using physical DMA provided by OHCI-1394 FireWire controllers for debugging
===========================================================================
Introduction
------------
@ -91,10 +91,10 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization:
1) Verify that your hardware is supported:
Load the firewire-ohci module and check your kernel logs.
You should see a line similar to
You should see a line similar to::
firewire_ohci 0000:15:00.1: added OHCI v1.0 device as card 2, 4 IR + 4 IT
... contexts, quirks 0x11
firewire_ohci 0000:15:00.1: added OHCI v1.0 device as card 2, 4 IR + 4 IT
... contexts, quirks 0x11
when loading the driver. If you have no supported controller, many PCI,
CardBus and even some Express cards which are fully compliant to OHCI-1394
@ -113,9 +113,9 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization:
stable connection and has matching connectors (there are small 4-pin and
large 6-pin FireWire ports) will do.
If an driver is running on both machines you should see a line like
If an driver is running on both machines you should see a line like::
firewire_core 0000:15:00.1: created device fw1: GUID 00061b0020105917, S400
firewire_core 0000:15:00.1: created device fw1: GUID 00061b0020105917, S400
on both machines in the kernel log when the cable is plugged in
and connects the two machines.
@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization:
3) Test physical DMA using firescope:
On the debug host, make sure that /dev/fw* is accessible,
then start firescope:
then start firescope::
$ firescope
Port 0 (/dev/fw1) opened, 2 nodes detected
@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization:
host loaded, reboot the debugged machine, booting the kernel which has
CONFIG_PROVIDE_OHCI1394_DMA_INIT enabled, with the option ohci1394_dma=early.
Then, on the debugging host, run firescope, for example by using -A:
Then, on the debugging host, run firescope, for example by using -A::
firescope -A System.map-of-debug-target-kernel
@ -178,6 +178,7 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization:
Notes
-----
Documentation and specifications: http://halobates.de/firewire/
FireWire is a trademark of Apple Inc. - for more information please refer to:

81
Documentation/dell_rbu.txt
View File

@ -1,18 +1,30 @@
Purpose:
Demonstrate the usage of the new open sourced rbu (Remote BIOS Update) driver
=============================================================
Usage of the new open sourced rbu (Remote BIOS Update) driver
=============================================================
Purpose
=======
Document demonstrating the use of the Dell Remote BIOS Update driver.
for updating BIOS images on Dell servers and desktops.
Scope:
Scope
=====
This document discusses the functionality of the rbu driver only.
It does not cover the support needed from applications to enable the BIOS to
update itself with the image downloaded in to the memory.
Overview:
Overview
========
This driver works with Dell OpenManage or Dell Update Packages for updating
the BIOS on Dell servers (starting from servers sold since 1999), desktops
and notebooks (starting from those sold in 2005).
Please go to http://support.dell.com register and you can find info on
OpenManage and Dell Update packages (DUP).
Libsmbios can also be used to update BIOS on Dell systems go to
http://linux.dell.com/libsmbios/ for details.
@ -22,6 +34,7 @@ of physical pages having the BIOS image. In case of packetized the app
using the driver breaks the image in to packets of fixed sizes and the driver
would place each packet in contiguous physical memory. The driver also
maintains a link list of packets for reading them back.
If the dell_rbu driver is unloaded all the allocated memory is freed.
The rbu driver needs to have an application (as mentioned above)which will
@ -30,28 +43,33 @@ inform the BIOS to enable the update in the next system reboot.
The user should not unload the rbu driver after downloading the BIOS image
or updating.
The driver load creates the following directories under the /sys file system.
/sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
/sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/packet_size
The driver load creates the following directories under the /sys file system::
/sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
/sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/packet_size
The driver supports two types of update mechanism; monolithic and packetized.
These update mechanism depends upon the BIOS currently running on the system.
Most of the Dell systems support a monolithic update where the BIOS image is
copied to a single contiguous block of physical memory.
In case of packet mechanism the single memory can be broken in smaller chunks
of contiguous memory and the BIOS image is scattered in these packets.
By default the driver uses monolithic memory for the update type. This can be
changed to packets during the driver load time by specifying the load
parameter image_type=packet. This can also be changed later as below
echo packet > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
parameter image_type=packet. This can also be changed later as below::
echo packet > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
In packet update mode the packet size has to be given before any packets can
be downloaded. It is done as below
echo XXXX > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/packet_size
be downloaded. It is done as below::
echo XXXX > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/packet_size
In the packet update mechanism, the user needs to create a new file having
packets of data arranged back to back. It can be done as follows
The user creates packets header, gets the chunk of the BIOS image and
@ -60,41 +78,54 @@ added together should match the specified packet_size. This makes one
packet, the user needs to create more such packets out of the entire BIOS
image file and then arrange all these packets back to back in to one single
file.
This file is then copied to /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data.
Once this file gets to the driver, the driver extracts packet_size data from
the file and spreads it across the physical memory in contiguous packet_sized
space.
This method makes sure that all the packets get to the driver in a single operation.
In monolithic update the user simply get the BIOS image (.hdr file) and copies
to the data file as is without any change to the BIOS image itself.
Do the steps below to download the BIOS image.
1) echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
2) cp bios_image.hdr /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data
3) echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
The /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries will remain till the following is
done.
echo -1 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
::
echo -1 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
Until this step is completed the driver cannot be unloaded.
Also echoing either mono, packet or init in to image_type will free up the
memory allocated by the driver.
If a user by accident executes steps 1 and 3 above without executing step 2;
it will make the /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries disappear.
The entries can be recreated by doing the following
echo init > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
NOTE: echoing init in image_type does not change it original value.
The entries can be recreated by doing the following::
echo init > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
.. note:: echoing init in image_type does not change it original value.
Also the driver provides /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data readonly file to
read back the image downloaded.
NOTE:
This driver requires a patch for firmware_class.c which has the modified
request_firmware_nowait function.
Also after updating the BIOS image a user mode application needs to execute
code which sends the BIOS update request to the BIOS. So on the next reboot
the BIOS knows about the new image downloaded and it updates itself.
Also don't unload the rbu driver if the image has to be updated.
.. note::
This driver requires a patch for firmware_class.c which has the modified
request_firmware_nowait function.
Also after updating the BIOS image a user mode application needs to execute
code which sends the BIOS update request to the BIOS. So on the next reboot
the BIOS knows about the new image downloaded and it updates itself.
Also don't unload the rbu driver if the image has to be updated.

31
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/img,boston-clock.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
Binding for Imagination Technologies MIPS Boston clock sources.
This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
The device node must be a child node of the syscon node corresponding to the
Boston system's platform registers.
Required properties:
- compatible : Should be "img,boston-clock".
- #clock-cells : Should be set to 1.
Values available for clock consumers can be found in the header file:
<dt-bindings/clock/boston-clock.h>
Example:
system-controller@17ffd000 {
compatible = "img,boston-platform-regs", "syscon";
reg = <0x17ffd000 0x1000>;
clk_boston: clock {
compatible = "img,boston-clock";
#clock-cells = <1>;
};
};
uart0: uart@17ffe000 {
/* ... */
clocks = <&clk_boston BOSTON_CLK_SYS>;
};

13
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt
View File

@ -3,10 +3,23 @@
Required properties:
- compatible : should be one of the following:
"altr,socfpga-denali-nand" - for Altera SOCFPGA
"socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5a" - for Socionext UniPhier (v5a)
"socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5b" - for Socionext UniPhier (v5b)
- reg : should contain registers location and length for data and reg.
- reg-names: Should contain the reg names "nand_data" and "denali_reg"
- interrupts : The interrupt number.
Optional properties:
- nand-ecc-step-size: see nand.txt for details. If present, the value must be
512 for "altr,socfpga-denali-nand"
1024 for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5a"
1024 for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5b"
- nand-ecc-strength: see nand.txt for details. Valid values are:
8, 15 for "altr,socfpga-denali-nand"
8, 16, 24 for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5a"
8, 16 for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5b"
- nand-ecc-maximize: see nand.txt for details
The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
address space. See partition.txt for more detail.

2
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/elm.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
Error location module
Required properties:
- compatible: Must be "ti,am33xx-elm"
- compatible: Must be "ti,am3352-elm"
- reg: physical base address and size of the registers map.
- interrupts: Interrupt number for the elm.

2
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ the GPMC controller with a name of "nand".
All timing relevant properties as well as generic gpmc child properties are
explained in a separate documents - please refer to
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/omap-gpmc.txt
For NAND specific properties such as ECC modes or bus width, please refer to
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt

4
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nor.txt
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ child nodes of the GPMC controller with a name of "nor".
All timing relevant properties as well as generic GPMC child properties are
explained in a separate documents. Please refer to
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/omap-gpmc.txt
Required properties:
- bank-width: Width of NOR flash in bytes. GPMC supports 8-bit and
@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Required properties:
Optional properties:
- gpmc,XXX Additional GPMC timings and settings parameters. See
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/omap-gpmc.txt
Optional properties for partition table parsing:
- #address-cells: should be set to 1

2
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-onenand.txt
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ the GPMC controller with a name of "onenand".
All timing relevant properties as well as generic gpmc child properties are
explained in a separate documents - please refer to
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/omap-gpmc.txt
Required properties:

14
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmi-nand.txt
View File

@ -4,7 +4,12 @@ The GPMI nand controller provides an interface to control the
NAND flash chips.
Required properties:
- compatible : should be "fsl,<chip>-gpmi-nand"
- compatible : should be "fsl,<chip>-gpmi-nand", chip can be:
* imx23
* imx28
* imx6q
* imx6sx
* imx7d
- reg : should contain registers location and length for gpmi and bch.
- reg-names: Should contain the reg names "gpmi-nand" and "bch"
- interrupts : BCH interrupt number.
@ -13,6 +18,13 @@ Required properties:
and GPMI DMA channel ID.
Refer to dma.txt and fsl-mxs-dma.txt for details.
- dma-names: Must be "rx-tx".
- clocks : clocks phandle and clock specifier corresponding to each clock
specified in clock-names.
- clock-names : The "gpmi_io" clock is always required. Which clocks are
exactly required depends on chip:
* imx23/imx28 : "gpmi_io"
* imx6q/sx : "gpmi_io", "gpmi_apb", "gpmi_bch", "gpmi_bch_apb", "per1_bch"
* imx7d : "gpmi_io", "gpmi_bch_apb"
Optional properties:
- nand-on-flash-bbt: boolean to enable on flash bbt option if not

18
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/microchip,mchp23k256.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
* MTD SPI driver for Microchip 23K256 (and similar) serial SRAM
Required properties:
- #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has sub-nodes
representing partitions.
- compatible : Must be one of "microchip,mchp23k256" or "microchip,mchp23lcv1024"
- reg : Chip-Select number
- spi-max-frequency : Maximum frequency of the SPI bus the chip can operate at
Example:
spi-sram@0 {
#address-cells = <1>;
#size-cells = <1>;
compatible = "microchip,mchp23k256";
reg = <0>;
spi-max-frequency = <20000000>;
};

5
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtk-nand.txt
View File

@ -12,7 +12,8 @@ tree nodes.
The first part of NFC is NAND Controller Interface (NFI) HW.
Required NFI properties:
- compatible: Should be "mediatek,mtxxxx-nfc".
- compatible: Should be one of "mediatek,mt2701-nfc",
"mediatek,mt2712-nfc".
- reg: Base physical address and size of NFI.
- interrupts: Interrupts of NFI.
- clocks: NFI required clocks.
@ -141,7 +142,7 @@ Example:
==============
Required BCH properties:
- compatible: Should be "mediatek,mtxxxx-ecc".
- compatible: Should be one of "mediatek,mt2701-ecc", "mediatek,mt2712-ecc".
- reg: Base physical address and size of ECC.
- interrupts: Interrupts of ECC.
- clocks: ECC required clocks.

2
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt
View File

@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Optional NAND chip properties:
- nand-ecc-mode : String, operation mode of the NAND ecc mode.
Supported values are: "none", "soft", "hw", "hw_syndrome",
"hw_oob_first".
"hw_oob_first", "on-die".
Deprecated values:
"soft_bch": use "soft" and nand-ecc-algo instead
- nand-ecc-algo: string, algorithm of NAND ECC.

32
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt
View File

@ -1,29 +1,49 @@
Representing flash partitions in devicetree
Flash partitions in device tree
===============================
Partitions can be represented by sub-nodes of an mtd device. This can be used
Flash devices can be partitioned into one or more functional ranges (e.g. "boot
code", "nvram", "kernel").
Different devices may be partitioned in a different ways. Some may use a fixed
flash layout set at production time. Some may use on-flash table that describes
the geometry and naming/purpose of each functional region. It is also possible
to see these methods mixed.
To assist system software in locating partitions, we allow describing which
method is used for a given flash device. To describe the method there should be
a subnode of the flash device that is named 'partitions'. It must have a
'compatible' property, which is used to identify the method to use.
We currently only document a binding for fixed layouts.
Fixed Partitions
================
Partitions can be represented by sub-nodes of a flash device. This can be used
on platforms which have strong conventions about which portions of a flash are
used for what purposes, but which don't use an on-flash partition table such
as RedBoot.
The partition table should be a subnode of the mtd node and should be named
The partition table should be a subnode of the flash node and should be named
'partitions'. This node should have the following property:
- compatible : (required) must be "fixed-partitions"
Partitions are then defined in subnodes of the partitions node.
For backwards compatibility partitions as direct subnodes of the mtd device are
For backwards compatibility partitions as direct subnodes of the flash device are
supported. This use is discouraged.
NOTE: also for backwards compatibility, direct subnodes that have a compatible
string are not considered partitions, as they may be used for other bindings.
#address-cells & #size-cells must both be present in the partitions subnode of the
mtd device. There are two valid values for both:
flash device. There are two valid values for both:
<1>: for partitions that require a single 32-bit cell to represent their
size/address (aka the value is below 4 GiB)
<2>: for partitions that require two 32-bit cells to represent their
size/address (aka the value is 4 GiB or greater).
Required properties:
- reg : The partition's offset and size within the mtd bank.
- reg : The partition's offset and size within the flash
Optional properties:
- label : The label / name for this partition. If omitted, the label is taken

1
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,amac.txt
View File

@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Required properties:
- reg-names: Names of the registers.
"amac_base": Address and length of the GMAC registers
"idm_base": Address and length of the GMAC IDM registers
(required for NSP and Northstar2)
"nicpm_base": Address and length of the NIC Port Manager
registers (required for Northstar2)
- interrupts: Interrupt number

24
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,bgmac-nsp.txt
View File

@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
Broadcom GMAC Ethernet Controller Device Tree Bindings
-------------------------------------------------------------
Required properties:
- compatible: "brcm,bgmac-nsp"
- reg: Address and length of the GMAC registers,
Address and length of the GMAC IDM registers
- reg-names: Names of the registers. Must have both "gmac_base" and
"idm_base"
- interrupts: Interrupt number
Optional properties:
- mac-address: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory
Examples:
gmac0: ethernet@18022000 {
compatible = "brcm,bgmac-nsp";
reg = <0x18022000 0x1000>,
<0x18110000 0x1000>;
reg-names = "gmac_base", "idm_base";
interrupts = <GIC_SPI 147 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
status = "disabled";
};

4
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/gpmc-eth.txt
View File

@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ the GPMC controller with an "ethernet" name.
All timing relevant properties as well as generic GPMC child properties are
explained in a separate documents. Please refer to
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/omap-gpmc.txt
For the properties relevant to the ethernet controller connected to the GPMC
refer to the binding documentation of the device. For example, the documentation
@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Required properties:
Optional properties:
- gpmc,XXX Additional GPMC timings and settings parameters. See
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/omap-gpmc.txt
Example:

15
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/brcm,ptp-dte.txt
View File

@ -1,13 +1,20 @@
* Broadcom Digital Timing Engine(DTE) based PTP clock driver
* Broadcom Digital Timing Engine(DTE) based PTP clock
Required properties:
- compatible: should be "brcm,ptp-dte"
- compatible: should contain the core compatibility string
and the SoC compatibility string. The SoC
compatibility string is to handle SoC specific
hardware differences.
Core compatibility string:
"brcm,ptp-dte"
SoC compatibility strings:
"brcm,iproc-ptp-dte" - for iproc based SoC's
- reg: address and length of the DTE block's NCO registers
Example:
ptp_dte: ptp_dte@180af650 {
compatible = "brcm,ptp-dte";
ptp: ptp-dte@180af650 {
compatible = "brcm,iproc-ptp-dte", "brcm,ptp-dte";
reg = <0x180af650 0x10>;
status = "okay";
};

4
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-meson.txt
View File

@ -2,7 +2,9 @@ Amlogic Meson PWM Controller
============================
Required properties:
- compatible: Shall contain "amlogic,meson8b-pwm" or "amlogic,meson-gxbb-pwm".
- compatible: Shall contain "amlogic,meson8b-pwm"
or "amlogic,meson-gxbb-pwm"
or "amlogic,meson-gxbb-ao-pwm"
- #pwm-cells: Should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
the cells format.

2
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-stm32.txt
View File

@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Example:
compatible = "st,stm32-timers";
reg = <0x40010000 0x400>;
clocks = <&rcc 0 160>;
clock-names = "clk_int";
clock-names = "int";
pwm {
compatible = "st,stm32-pwm";

1
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/renesas,pwm-rcar.txt
View File

@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Required Properties:
- "renesas,pwm-r8a7791": for R-Car M2-W
- "renesas,pwm-r8a7794": for R-Car E2
- "renesas,pwm-r8a7795": for R-Car H3
- "renesas,pwm-r8a7796": for R-Car M3-W
- reg: base address and length of the registers block for the PWM.
- #pwm-cells: should be 2. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
the cells format.

22
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/brcm,brcmstb-waketimer.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
Broadcom STB wake-up Timer
The Broadcom STB wake-up timer provides a 27Mhz resolution timer, with the
ability to wake up the system from low-power suspend/standby modes.
Required properties:
- compatible : should contain "brcm,brcmstb-waketimer"
- reg : the register start and length for the WKTMR block
- interrupts : The TIMER interrupt
- interrupt-parent: The phandle to the Always-On (AON) Power Management (PM) L2
interrupt controller node
- clocks : The phandle to the UPG fixed clock (27Mhz domain)
Example:
waketimer@f0411580 {
compatible = "brcm,brcmstb-waketimer";
reg = <0xf0411580 0x14>;
interrupts = <0x3>;
interrupt-parent = <&aon_pm_l2_intc>;
clocks = <&upg_fixed>;
};

14
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/cortina,gemini.txt
View File

@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
* Cortina Systems Gemini RTC
Gemini SoC real-time clock.
Required properties:
- compatible : Should be "cortina,gemini-rtc"
Examples:
rtc@45000000 {
compatible = "cortina,gemini-rtc";
reg = <0x45000000 0x100>;
interrupts = <17 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
};

28
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/faraday,ftrtc010.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
* Faraday Technology FTRTC010 Real Time Clock
This RTC appears in for example the Storlink Gemini family of
SoCs.
Required properties:
- compatible : Should be one of:
"faraday,ftrtc010"
"cortina,gemini-rtc", "faraday,ftrtc010"
Optional properties:
- clocks: when present should contain clock references to the
PCLK and EXTCLK clocks. Faraday calls the later CLK1HZ and
says the clock should be 1 Hz, but implementers actually seem
to choose different clocks here, like Cortina who chose
32768 Hz (a typical low-power clock).
- clock-names: should name the clocks "PCLK" and "EXTCLK"
respectively.
Examples:
rtc@45000000 {
compatible = "cortina,gemini-rtc";
reg = <0x45000000 0x100>;
interrupts = <17 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
clocks = <&foo 0>, <&foo 1>;
clock-names = "PCLK", "EXTCLK";
};

32
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/st,stm32-rtc.txt
View File

@ -1,17 +1,25 @@
STM32 Real Time Clock
Required properties:
- compatible: "st,stm32-rtc".
- compatible: can be either "st,stm32-rtc" or "st,stm32h7-rtc", depending on
the device is compatible with stm32(f4/f7) or stm32h7.
- reg: address range of rtc register set.
- clocks: reference to the clock entry ck_rtc.
- clocks: can use up to two clocks, depending on part used:
- "rtc_ck": RTC clock source.
It is required on stm32(f4/f7) and stm32h7.
- "pclk": RTC APB interface clock.
It is not present on stm32(f4/f7).
It is required on stm32h7.
- clock-names: must be "rtc_ck" and "pclk".
It is required only on stm32h7.
- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller.
- interrupts: rtc alarm interrupt.
- st,syscfg: phandle for pwrcfg, mandatory to disable/enable backup domain
(RTC registers) write protection.
Optional properties (to override default ck_rtc parent clock):
- assigned-clocks: reference to the ck_rtc clock entry.
- assigned-clock-parents: phandle of the new parent clock of ck_rtc.
Optional properties (to override default rtc_ck parent clock):
- assigned-clocks: reference to the rtc_ck clock entry.
- assigned-clock-parents: phandle of the new parent clock of rtc_ck.
Example:
@ -25,3 +33,17 @@ Example:
interrupts = <17 1>;
st,syscfg = <&pwrcfg>;
};
rtc: rtc@58004000 {
compatible = "st,stm32h7-rtc";
reg = <0x58004000 0x400>;
clocks = <&rcc RTCAPB_CK>, <&rcc RTC_CK>;
clock-names = "pclk", "rtc_ck";
assigned-clocks = <&rcc RTC_CK>;
assigned-clock-parents = <&rcc LSE_CK>;
interrupt-parent = <&exti>;
interrupts = <17 1>;
interrupt-names = "alarm";
st,syscfg = <&pwrcfg>;
status = "disabled";
};

123
Documentation/digsig.txt
View File

@ -1,13 +1,20 @@
==================================
Digital Signature Verification API
==================================
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. API
3. User-space utilities
:Author: Dmitry Kasatkin
:Date: 06.10.2011
1. Introduction
.. CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. API
3. User-space utilities
Introduction
============
Digital signature verification API provides a method to verify digital signature.
Currently digital signatures are used by the IMA/EVM integrity protection subsystem.
@ -17,25 +24,25 @@ GnuPG multi-precision integers (MPI) library. The kernel port provides
memory allocation errors handling, has been refactored according to kernel
coding style, and checkpatch.pl reported errors and warnings have been fixed.
Public key and signature consist of header and MPIs.
Public key and signature consist of header and MPIs::
struct pubkey_hdr {
uint8_t version; /* key format version */
time_t timestamp; /* key made, always 0 for now */
uint8_t algo;
uint8_t nmpi;
char mpi[0];
} __packed;
struct pubkey_hdr {
uint8_t version; /* key format version */
time_t timestamp; /* key made, always 0 for now */
uint8_t algo;
uint8_t nmpi;
char mpi[0];
} __packed;
struct signature_hdr {
uint8_t version; /* signature format version */
time_t timestamp; /* signature made */
uint8_t algo;
uint8_t hash;
uint8_t keyid[8];
uint8_t nmpi;
char mpi[0];
} __packed;
struct signature_hdr {
uint8_t version; /* signature format version */
time_t timestamp; /* signature made */
uint8_t algo;
uint8_t hash;
uint8_t keyid[8];
uint8_t nmpi;
char mpi[0];
} __packed;
keyid equals to SHA1[12-19] over the total key content.
Signature header is used as an input to generate a signature.
@ -43,31 +50,33 @@ Such approach insures that key or signature header could not be changed.
It protects timestamp from been changed and can be used for rollback
protection.
2. API
API
===
API currently includes only 1 function:
API currently includes only 1 function::
digsig_verify() - digital signature verification with public key
/**
* digsig_verify() - digital signature verification with public key
* @keyring: keyring to search key in
* @sig: digital signature
* @sigen: length of the signature
* @data: data
* @datalen: length of the data
* @return: 0 on success, -EINVAL otherwise
*
* Verifies data integrity against digital signature.
* Currently only RSA is supported.
* Normally hash of the content is used as a data for this function.
*
*/
int digsig_verify(struct key *keyring, const char *sig, int siglen,
const char *data, int datalen);
/**
* digsig_verify() - digital signature verification with public key
* @keyring: keyring to search key in
* @sig: digital signature
* @sigen: length of the signature
* @data: data
* @datalen: length of the data
* @return: 0 on success, -EINVAL otherwise
*
* Verifies data integrity against digital signature.
* Currently only RSA is supported.
* Normally hash of the content is used as a data for this function.
*
*/
int digsig_verify(struct key *keyring, const char *sig, int siglen,
const char *data, int datalen);
3. User-space utilities
User-space utilities
====================
The signing and key management utilities evm-utils provide functionality
to generate signatures, to load keys into the kernel keyring.
@ -75,22 +84,18 @@ Keys can be in PEM or converted to the kernel format.
When the key is added to the kernel keyring, the keyid defines the name
of the key: 5D2B05FC633EE3E8 in the example bellow.
Here is example output of the keyctl utility.
Here is example output of the keyctl utility::
$ keyctl show
Session Keyring
-3 --alswrv 0 0 keyring: _ses
603976250 --alswrv 0 -1 \_ keyring: _uid.0
817777377 --alswrv 0 0 \_ user: kmk
891974900 --alswrv 0 0 \_ encrypted: evm-key
170323636 --alswrv 0 0 \_ keyring: _module
548221616 --alswrv 0 0 \_ keyring: _ima
128198054 --alswrv 0 0 \_ keyring: _evm
$ keyctl show
Session Keyring
-3 --alswrv 0 0 keyring: _ses
603976250 --alswrv 0 -1 \_ keyring: _uid.0
817777377 --alswrv 0 0 \_ user: kmk
891974900 --alswrv 0 0 \_ encrypted: evm-key
170323636 --alswrv 0 0 \_ keyring: _module
548221616 --alswrv 0 0 \_ keyring: _ima
128198054 --alswrv 0 0 \_ keyring: _evm
$ keyctl list 128198054
1 key in keyring:
620789745: --alswrv 0 0 user: 5D2B05FC633EE3E8
Dmitry Kasatkin
06.10.2011
$ keyctl list 128198054
1 key in keyring:
620789745: --alswrv 0 0 user: 5D2B05FC633EE3E8

3
Documentation/driver-api/basics.rst
View File

@ -106,9 +106,6 @@ Kernel utility functions
.. kernel-doc:: kernel/sys.c
:export:
.. kernel-doc:: kernel/rcu/srcu.c
:export:
.. kernel-doc:: kernel/rcu/tree.c
:export:

25
Documentation/efi-stub.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
The EFI Boot Stub
---------------------------
=================
The EFI Boot Stub
=================
On the x86 and ARM platforms, a kernel zImage/bzImage can masquerade
as a PE/COFF image, thereby convincing EFI firmware loaders to load
@ -25,7 +26,8 @@ a certain sense it *IS* the boot loader.
The EFI boot stub is enabled with the CONFIG_EFI_STUB kernel option.
**** How to install bzImage.efi
How to install bzImage.efi
--------------------------
The bzImage located in arch/x86/boot/bzImage must be copied to the EFI
System Partition (ESP) and renamed with the extension ".efi". Without
@ -37,14 +39,16 @@ may not need to be renamed. Similarly for arm64, arch/arm64/boot/Image
should be copied but not necessarily renamed.
**** Passing kernel parameters from the EFI shell
Passing kernel parameters from the EFI shell
--------------------------------------------
Arguments to the kernel can be passed after bzImage.efi, e.g.
Arguments to the kernel can be passed after bzImage.efi, e.g.::
fs0:> bzImage.efi console=ttyS0 root=/dev/sda4
**** The "initrd=" option
The "initrd=" option
--------------------
Like most boot loaders, the EFI stub allows the user to specify
multiple initrd files using the "initrd=" option. This is the only EFI
@ -54,9 +58,9 @@ kernel when it boots.
The path to the initrd file must be an absolute path from the
beginning of the ESP, relative path names do not work. Also, the path
is an EFI-style path and directory elements must be separated with
backslashes (\). For example, given the following directory layout,
backslashes (\). For example, given the following directory layout::
fs0:>
fs0:>
Kernels\
bzImage.efi
initrd-large.img
@ -66,7 +70,7 @@ fs0:>
initrd-medium.img
to boot with the initrd-large.img file if the current working
directory is fs0:\Kernels, the following command must be used,
directory is fs0:\Kernels, the following command must be used::
fs0:\Kernels> bzImage.efi initrd=\Kernels\initrd-large.img
@ -76,7 +80,8 @@ which understands relative paths, whereas the rest of the command line
is passed to bzImage.efi.
**** The "dtb=" option
The "dtb=" option
-----------------
For the ARM and arm64 architectures, we also need to be able to provide a
device tree to the kernel. This is done with the "dtb=" command line option,

247
Documentation/eisa.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,8 @@
EISA bus support (Marc Zyngier <maz@wild-wind.fr.eu.org>)
================
EISA bus support
================
:Author: Marc Zyngier <maz@wild-wind.fr.eu.org>
This document groups random notes about porting EISA drivers to the
new EISA/sysfs API.
@ -14,168 +18,189 @@ detection code is generally also used to probe ISA cards). Moreover,
most EISA drivers are among the oldest Linux drivers so, as you can
imagine, some dust has settled here over the years.
The EISA infrastructure is made up of three parts :
The EISA infrastructure is made up of three parts:
- The bus code implements most of the generic code. It is shared
among all the architectures that the EISA code runs on. It
implements bus probing (detecting EISA cards available on the bus),
allocates I/O resources, allows fancy naming through sysfs, and
offers interfaces for driver to register.
among all the architectures that the EISA code runs on. It
implements bus probing (detecting EISA cards available on the bus),
allocates I/O resources, allows fancy naming through sysfs, and
offers interfaces for driver to register.
- The bus root driver implements the glue between the bus hardware
and the generic bus code. It is responsible for discovering the
device implementing the bus, and setting it up to be latter probed
by the bus code. This can go from something as simple as reserving
an I/O region on x86, to the rather more complex, like the hppa
EISA code. This is the part to implement in order to have EISA
running on an "new" platform.
and the generic bus code. It is responsible for discovering the
device implementing the bus, and setting it up to be latter probed
by the bus code. This can go from something as simple as reserving
an I/O region on x86, to the rather more complex, like the hppa
EISA code. This is the part to implement in order to have EISA
running on an "new" platform.
- The driver offers the bus a list of devices that it manages, and
implements the necessary callbacks to probe and release devices
whenever told to.
implements the necessary callbacks to probe and release devices
whenever told to.
Every function/structure below lives in <linux/eisa.h>, which depends
heavily on <linux/device.h>.
** Bus root driver :
Bus root driver
===============
int eisa_root_register (struct eisa_root_device *root);
::
int eisa_root_register (struct eisa_root_device *root);
The eisa_root_register function is used to declare a device as the
root of an EISA bus. The eisa_root_device structure holds a reference
to this device, as well as some parameters for probing purposes.
to this device, as well as some parameters for probing purposes::
struct eisa_root_device {
struct device *dev; /* Pointer to bridge device */
struct resource *res;
unsigned long bus_base_addr;
int slots; /* Max slot number */
int force_probe; /* Probe even when no slot 0 */
u64 dma_mask; /* from bridge device */
int bus_nr; /* Set by eisa_root_register */
struct resource eisa_root_res; /* ditto */
};
struct eisa_root_device {
struct device *dev; /* Pointer to bridge device */
struct resource *res;
unsigned long bus_base_addr;
int slots; /* Max slot number */
int force_probe; /* Probe even when no slot 0 */
u64 dma_mask; /* from bridge device */
int bus_nr; /* Set by eisa_root_register */
struct resource eisa_root_res; /* ditto */
};
node : used for eisa_root_register internal purpose
dev : pointer to the root device
res : root device I/O resource
bus_base_addr : slot 0 address on this bus
slots : max slot number to probe
force_probe : Probe even when slot 0 is empty (no EISA mainboard)
dma_mask : Default DMA mask. Usually the bridge device dma_mask.
bus_nr : unique bus id, set by eisa_root_register
============= ======================================================
node used for eisa_root_register internal purpose
dev pointer to the root device
res root device I/O resource
bus_base_addr slot 0 address on this bus
slots max slot number to probe
force_probe Probe even when slot 0 is empty (no EISA mainboard)
dma_mask Default DMA mask. Usually the bridge device dma_mask.
bus_nr unique bus id, set by eisa_root_register
============= ======================================================
** Driver :
Driver
======
int eisa_driver_register (struct eisa_driver *edrv);
void eisa_driver_unregister (struct eisa_driver *edrv);
::
int eisa_driver_register (struct eisa_driver *edrv);
void eisa_driver_unregister (struct eisa_driver *edrv);
Clear enough ?
struct eisa_device_id {
char sig[EISA_SIG_LEN];
unsigned long driver_data;
};
::
struct eisa_driver {
const struct eisa_device_id *id_table;
struct device_driver driver;
};
struct eisa_device_id {
char sig[EISA_SIG_LEN];
unsigned long driver_data;
};
id_table : an array of NULL terminated EISA id strings,
followed by an empty string. Each string can
optionally be paired with a driver-dependent value
(driver_data).
struct eisa_driver {
const struct eisa_device_id *id_table;
struct device_driver driver;
};
driver : a generic driver, such as described in
Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt. Only .name,
.probe and .remove members are mandatory.
=============== ====================================================
id_table an array of NULL terminated EISA id strings,
followed by an empty string. Each string can
optionally be paired with a driver-dependent value
(driver_data).
An example is the 3c59x driver :
driver a generic driver, such as described in
Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt. Only .name,
.probe and .remove members are mandatory.
=============== ====================================================
static struct eisa_device_id vortex_eisa_ids[] = {
{ "TCM5920", EISA_3C592_OFFSET },
{ "TCM5970", EISA_3C597_OFFSET },
{ "" }
};
An example is the 3c59x driver::
static struct eisa_driver vortex_eisa_driver = {
.id_table = vortex_eisa_ids,
.driver = {
.name = "3c59x",
.probe = vortex_eisa_probe,
.remove = vortex_eisa_remove
}
};
static struct eisa_device_id vortex_eisa_ids[] = {
{ "TCM5920", EISA_3C592_OFFSET },
{ "TCM5970", EISA_3C597_OFFSET },
{ "" }
};
** Device :
static struct eisa_driver vortex_eisa_driver = {
.id_table = vortex_eisa_ids,
.driver = {
.name = "3c59x",
.probe = vortex_eisa_probe,
.remove = vortex_eisa_remove
}
};
Device
======
The sysfs framework calls .probe and .remove functions upon device
discovery and removal (note that the .remove function is only called
when driver is built as a module).
Both functions are passed a pointer to a 'struct device', which is
encapsulated in a 'struct eisa_device' described as follows :
encapsulated in a 'struct eisa_device' described as follows::
struct eisa_device {
struct eisa_device_id id;
int slot;
int state;
unsigned long base_addr;
struct resource res[EISA_MAX_RESOURCES];
u64 dma_mask;
struct device dev; /* generic device */
};
struct eisa_device {
struct eisa_device_id id;
int slot;
int state;
unsigned long base_addr;
struct resource res[EISA_MAX_RESOURCES];
u64 dma_mask;
struct device dev; /* generic device */
};
id : EISA id, as read from device. id.driver_data is set from the
matching driver EISA id.
slot : slot number which the device was detected on
state : set of flags indicating the state of the device. Current
flags are EISA_CONFIG_ENABLED and EISA_CONFIG_FORCED.
res : set of four 256 bytes I/O regions allocated to this device
dma_mask: DMA mask set from the parent device.
dev : generic device (see Documentation/driver-model/device.txt)
======== ============================================================
id EISA id, as read from device. id.driver_data is set from the
matching driver EISA id.
slot slot number which the device was detected on
state set of flags indicating the state of the device. Current
flags are EISA_CONFIG_ENABLED and EISA_CONFIG_FORCED.
res set of four 256 bytes I/O regions allocated to this device
dma_mask DMA mask set from the parent device.
dev generic device (see Documentation/driver-model/device.txt)
======== ============================================================
You can get the 'struct eisa_device' from 'struct device' using the
'to_eisa_device' macro.
** Misc stuff :
Misc stuff
==========
void eisa_set_drvdata (struct eisa_device *edev, void *data);
::
void eisa_set_drvdata (struct eisa_device *edev, void *data);
Stores data into the device's driver_data area.
void *eisa_get_drvdata (struct eisa_device *edev):
::
void *eisa_get_drvdata (struct eisa_device *edev):
Gets the pointer previously stored into the device's driver_data area.
int eisa_get_region_index (void *addr);
::
int eisa_get_region_index (void *addr);
Returns the region number (0 <= x < EISA_MAX_RESOURCES) of a given
address.
** Kernel parameters :
Kernel parameters
=================
eisa_bus.enable_dev :
eisa_bus.enable_dev
A comma-separated list of slots to be enabled, even if the firmware
set the card as disabled. The driver must be able to properly
initialize the device in such conditions.
A comma-separated list of slots to be enabled, even if the firmware
set the card as disabled. The driver must be able to properly
initialize the device in such conditions.
eisa_bus.disable_dev
A comma-separated list of slots to be enabled, even if the firmware
set the card as enabled. The driver won't be called to handle this
device.
eisa_bus.disable_dev :
virtual_root.force_probe
Force the probing code to probe EISA slots even when it cannot find an
EISA compliant mainboard (nothing appears on slot 0). Defaults to 0
(don't force), and set to 1 (force probing) when either
CONFIG_ALPHA_JENSEN or CONFIG_EISA_VLB_PRIMING are set.
A comma-separated list of slots to be enabled, even if the firmware
set the card as enabled. The driver won't be called to handle this
device.
virtual_root.force_probe :
Force the probing code to probe EISA slots even when it cannot find an
EISA compliant mainboard (nothing appears on slot 0). Defaults to 0
(don't force), and set to 1 (force probing) when either
CONFIG_ALPHA_JENSEN or CONFIG_EISA_VLB_PRIMING are set.
** Random notes :
Random notes
============
Converting an EISA driver to the new API mostly involves *deleting*
code (since probing is now in the core EISA code). Unfortunately, most
@ -194,9 +219,11 @@ routine.
For example, switching your favorite EISA SCSI card to the "hotplug"
model is "the right thing"(tm).
** Thanks :
Thanks
======
I'd like to thank the following people for their help:
I'd like to thank the following people for their help :
- Xavier Benigni for lending me a wonderful Alpha Jensen,
- James Bottomley, Jeff Garzik for getting this stuff into the kernel,
- Andries Brouwer for contributing numerous EISA ids,

79
Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt
View File

@ -134,6 +134,23 @@ use the boot option:
fail_futex=
mmc_core.fail_request=<interval>,<probability>,<space>,<times>
o proc entries
- /proc/<pid>/fail-nth:
- /proc/self/task/<tid>/fail-nth:
Write to this file of integer N makes N-th call in the task fail.
Read from this file returns a integer value. A value of '0' indicates
that the fault setup with a previous write to this file was injected.
A positive integer N indicates that the fault wasn't yet injected.
Note that this file enables all types of faults (slab, futex, etc).
This setting takes precedence over all other generic debugfs settings
like probability, interval, times, etc. But per-capability settings
(e.g. fail_futex/ignore-private) take precedence over it.
This feature is intended for systematic testing of faults in a single
system call. See an example below.
How to add new fault injection capability
-----------------------------------------
@ -278,3 +295,65 @@ allocation failure.
# env FAILCMD_TYPE=fail_page_alloc \
./tools/testing/fault-injection/failcmd.sh --times=100 \
-- make -C tools/testing/selftests/ run_tests
Systematic faults using fail-nth
---------------------------------
The following code systematically faults 0-th, 1-st, 2-nd and so on
capabilities in the socketpair() system call.
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <sys/syscall.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <errno.h>
int main()
{
int i, err, res, fail_nth, fds[2];
char buf[128];
system("echo N > /sys/kernel/debug/failslab/ignore-gfp-wait");
sprintf(buf, "/proc/self/task/%ld/fail-nth", syscall(SYS_gettid));
fail_nth = open(buf, O_RDWR);
for (i = 1;; i++) {
sprintf(buf, "%d", i);
write(fail_nth, buf, strlen(buf));
res = socketpair(AF_LOCAL, SOCK_STREAM, 0, fds);
err = errno;
pread(fail_nth, buf, sizeof(buf), 0);
if (res == 0) {
close(fds[0]);
close(fds[1]);
}
printf("%d-th fault %c: res=%d/%d\n", i, atoi(buf) ? 'N' : 'Y',
res, err);
if (atoi(buf))
break;
}
return 0;
}
An example output:
1-th fault Y: res=-1/23
2-th fault Y: res=-1/23
3-th fault Y: res=-1/12
4-th fault Y: res=-1/12
5-th fault Y: res=-1/23
6-th fault Y: res=-1/23
7-th fault Y: res=-1/23
8-th fault Y: res=-1/12
9-th fault Y: res=-1/12
10-th fault Y: res=-1/12
11-th fault Y: res=-1/12
12-th fault Y: res=-1/12
13-th fault Y: res=-1/12
14-th fault Y: res=-1/12
15-th fault Y: res=-1/12
16-th fault N: res=0/12

6
Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
View File

@ -1786,12 +1786,16 @@ pair provide additional information particular to the objects they represent.
pos: 0
flags: 02
mnt_id: 9
tfd: 5 events: 1d data: ffffffffffffffff
tfd: 5 events: 1d data: ffffffffffffffff pos:0 ino:61af sdev:7
where 'tfd' is a target file descriptor number in decimal form,
'events' is events mask being watched and the 'data' is data
associated with a target [see epoll(7) for more details].
The 'pos' is current offset of the target file in decimal form
[see lseek(2)], 'ino' and 'sdev' are inode and device numbers
where target file resides, all in hex format.
Fsnotify files
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
For inotify files the format is the following

6
Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
View File

@ -1225,12 +1225,6 @@ The underlying reason for the above rules is to make sure, that a
mount can be accurately replicated (e.g. umounting and mounting again)
based on the information found in /proc/mounts.
A simple method of saving options at mount/remount time and showing
them is provided with the save_mount_options() and
generic_show_options() helper functions. Please note, that using
these may have drawbacks. For more info see header comments for these
functions in fs/namespace.c.
Resources
=========

25
Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt
View File

@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
===================================
Using flexible arrays in the kernel
Last updated for 2.6.32
Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net>
===================================
:Updated: Last updated for 2.6.32
:Author: Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net>
Large contiguous memory allocations can be unreliable in the Linux kernel.
Kernel programmers will sometimes respond to this problem by allocating
@ -26,7 +29,7 @@ operation. It's also worth noting that flexible arrays do no internal
locking at all; if concurrent access to an array is possible, then the
caller must arrange for appropriate mutual exclusion.
The creation of a flexible array is done with:
The creation of a flexible array is done with::
#include <linux/flex_array.h>
@ -40,14 +43,14 @@ argument is passed directly to the internal memory allocation calls. With
the current code, using flags to ask for high memory is likely to lead to
notably unpleasant side effects.
It is also possible to define flexible arrays at compile time with:
It is also possible to define flexible arrays at compile time with::
DEFINE_FLEX_ARRAY(name, element_size, total);
This macro will result in a definition of an array with the given name; the
element size and total will be checked for validity at compile time.
Storing data into a flexible array is accomplished with a call to:
Storing data into a flexible array is accomplished with a call to::
int flex_array_put(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr,
void *src, gfp_t flags);
@ -63,7 +66,7 @@ running in some sort of atomic context; in this situation, sleeping in the
memory allocator would be a bad thing. That can be avoided by using
GFP_ATOMIC for the flags value, but, often, there is a better way. The
trick is to ensure that any needed memory allocations are done before
entering atomic context, using:
entering atomic context, using::
int flex_array_prealloc(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int start,
unsigned int nr_elements, gfp_t flags);
@ -73,7 +76,7 @@ defined by start and nr_elements has been allocated. Thereafter, a
flex_array_put() call on an element in that range is guaranteed not to
block.
Getting data back out of the array is done with:
Getting data back out of the array is done with::
void *flex_array_get(struct flex_array *fa, unsigned int element_nr);
@ -89,7 +92,7 @@ involving that number probably result from use of unstored array entries.
Note that, if array elements are allocated with __GFP_ZERO, they will be
initialized to zero and this poisoning will not happen.
Individual elements in the array can be cleared with:
Individual elements in the array can be cleared with::
int flex_array_clear(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr);
@ -97,7 +100,7 @@ This function will set the given element to FLEX_ARRAY_FREE and return
zero. If storage for the indicated element is not allocated for the array,
flex_array_clear() will return -EINVAL instead. Note that clearing an
element does not release the storage associated with it; to reduce the
allocated size of an array, call:
allocated size of an array, call::
int flex_array_shrink(struct flex_array *array);
@ -106,12 +109,12 @@ This function works by scanning the array for pages containing nothing but
FLEX_ARRAY_FREE bytes, so (1) it can be expensive, and (2) it will not work
if the array's pages are allocated with __GFP_ZERO.
It is possible to remove all elements of an array with a call to:
It is possible to remove all elements of an array with a call to::
void flex_array_free_parts(struct flex_array *array);
This call frees all elements, but leaves the array itself in place.
Freeing the entire array is done with:
Freeing the entire array is done with::
void flex_array_free(struct flex_array *array);

83
Documentation/futex-requeue-pi.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
================
Futex Requeue PI
----------------
================
Requeueing of tasks from a non-PI futex to a PI futex requires
special handling in order to ensure the underlying rt_mutex is never
@ -20,28 +21,28 @@ implementation would wake the highest-priority waiter, and leave the
rest to the natural wakeup inherent in unlocking the mutex
associated with the condvar.
Consider the simplified glibc calls:
Consider the simplified glibc calls::
/* caller must lock mutex */
pthread_cond_wait(cond, mutex)
{
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
unlock(mutex);
do {
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
futex_wait(cond->__data.__futex);
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
} while(...)
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
lock(mutex);
}
/* caller must lock mutex */
pthread_cond_wait(cond, mutex)
{
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
unlock(mutex);
do {
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
futex_wait(cond->__data.__futex);
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
} while(...)
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
lock(mutex);
}
pthread_cond_broadcast(cond)
{
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
futex_requeue(cond->data.__futex, cond->mutex);
}
pthread_cond_broadcast(cond)
{
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
futex_requeue(cond->data.__futex, cond->mutex);
}
Once pthread_cond_broadcast() requeues the tasks, the cond->mutex
has waiters. Note that pthread_cond_wait() attempts to lock the
@ -53,29 +54,29 @@ In order to support PI-aware pthread_condvar's, the kernel needs to
be able to requeue tasks to PI futexes. This support implies that
upon a successful futex_wait system call, the caller would return to
user space already holding the PI futex. The glibc implementation
would be modified as follows:
would be modified as follows::
/* caller must lock mutex */
pthread_cond_wait_pi(cond, mutex)
{
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
unlock(mutex);
do {
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
futex_wait_requeue_pi(cond->__data.__futex);
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
} while(...)
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
/* the kernel acquired the mutex for us */
}
/* caller must lock mutex */
pthread_cond_wait_pi(cond, mutex)
{
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
unlock(mutex);
do {
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
futex_wait_requeue_pi(cond->__data.__futex);
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
} while(...)
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
/* the kernel acquired the mutex for us */
}
pthread_cond_broadcast_pi(cond)
{
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
futex_requeue_pi(cond->data.__futex, cond->mutex);
}
pthread_cond_broadcast_pi(cond)
{
lock(cond->__data.__lock);
unlock(cond->__data.__lock);
futex_requeue_pi(cond->data.__futex, cond->mutex);
}
The actual glibc implementation will likely test for PI and make the
necessary changes inside the existing calls rather than creating new

58
Documentation/gcc-plugins.txt
View File

@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
=========================
GCC plugin infrastructure
=========================
1. Introduction
===============
Introduction
============
GCC plugins are loadable modules that provide extra features to the
compiler [1]. They are useful for runtime instrumentation and static analysis.
compiler [1]_. They are useful for runtime instrumentation and static analysis.
We can analyse, change and add further code during compilation via
callbacks [2], GIMPLE [3], IPA [4] and RTL passes [5].
callbacks [2]_, GIMPLE [3]_, IPA [4]_ and RTL passes [5]_.
The GCC plugin infrastructure of the kernel supports all gcc versions from
4.5 to 6.0, building out-of-tree modules, cross-compilation and building in a
@ -21,56 +22,61 @@ and versions 4.8+ can only be compiled by a C++ compiler.
Currently the GCC plugin infrastructure supports only the x86, arm, arm64 and
powerpc architectures.
This infrastructure was ported from grsecurity [6] and PaX [7].
This infrastructure was ported from grsecurity [6]_ and PaX [7]_.
--
[1] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gccint/Plugins.html
[2] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gccint/Plugin-API.html#Plugin-API
[3] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gccint/GIMPLE.html
[4] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gccint/IPA.html
[5] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gccint/RTL.html
[6] https://grsecurity.net/
[7] https://pax.grsecurity.net/
.. [1] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gccint/Plugins.html
.. [2] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gccint/Plugin-API.html#Plugin-API
.. [3] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gccint/GIMPLE.html
.. [4] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gccint/IPA.html
.. [5] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gccint/RTL.html
.. [6] https://grsecurity.net/
.. [7] https://pax.grsecurity.net/
2. Files
========
Files
=====
**$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins**
$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins
This is the directory of the GCC plugins.
$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins/gcc-common.h
**$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins/gcc-common.h**
This is a compatibility header for GCC plugins.
It should be always included instead of individual gcc headers.
$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugin.sh
**$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugin.sh**
This script checks the availability of the included headers in
gcc-common.h and chooses the proper host compiler to build the plugins
(gcc-4.7 can be built by either gcc or g++).
$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins/gcc-generate-gimple-pass.h
$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins/gcc-generate-ipa-pass.h
$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins/gcc-generate-simple_ipa-pass.h
$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins/gcc-generate-rtl-pass.h
**$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins/gcc-generate-gimple-pass.h,
$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins/gcc-generate-ipa-pass.h,
$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins/gcc-generate-simple_ipa-pass.h,
$(src)/scripts/gcc-plugins/gcc-generate-rtl-pass.h**
These headers automatically generate the registration structures for
GIMPLE, SIMPLE_IPA, IPA and RTL passes. They support all gcc versions
from 4.5 to 6.0.
They should be preferred to creating the structures by hand.
3. Usage
========
Usage
=====
You must install the gcc plugin headers for your gcc version,
e.g., on Ubuntu for gcc-4.9:
e.g., on Ubuntu for gcc-4.9::
apt-get install gcc-4.9-plugin-dev
Enable a GCC plugin based feature in the kernel config:
Enable a GCC plugin based feature in the kernel config::
CONFIG_GCC_PLUGIN_CYC_COMPLEXITY = y
To compile only the plugin(s):
To compile only the plugin(s)::
make gcc-plugins

47
Documentation/highuid.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
Notes on the change from 16-bit UIDs to 32-bit UIDs:
===================================================
Notes on the change from 16-bit UIDs to 32-bit UIDs
===================================================
:Author: Chris Wing <wingc@umich.edu>
:Last updated: January 11, 2000
- kernel code MUST take into account __kernel_uid_t and __kernel_uid32_t
when communicating between user and kernel space in an ioctl or data
@ -28,30 +33,34 @@ What's left to be done for 32-bit UIDs on all Linux architectures:
uses the 32-bit UID system calls properly otherwise.
This affects at least:
iBCS on Intel
sparc32 emulation on sparc64
(need to support whatever new 32-bit UID system calls are added to
sparc32)
- iBCS on Intel
- sparc32 emulation on sparc64
(need to support whatever new 32-bit UID system calls are added to
sparc32)
- Validate that all filesystems behave properly.
At present, 32-bit UIDs _should_ work for:
ext2
ufs
isofs
nfs
coda
udf
- ext2
- ufs
- isofs
- nfs
- coda
- udf
Ioctl() fixups have been made for:
ncpfs
smbfs
- ncpfs
- smbfs
Filesystems with simple fixups to prevent 16-bit UID wraparound:
minix
sysv
qnx4
- minix
- sysv
- qnx4
Other filesystems have not been checked yet.
@ -69,9 +78,3 @@ What's left to be done for 32-bit UIDs on all Linux architectures:
- make sure that the UID mapping feature of AX25 networking works properly
(it should be safe because it's always used a 32-bit integer to
communicate between user and kernel)
Chris Wing
wingc@umich.edu
last updated: January 11, 2000

141
Documentation/hw_random.txt
View File

@ -1,90 +1,105 @@
Introduction:
==========================================================
Linux support for random number generator in i8xx chipsets
==========================================================
The hw_random framework is software that makes use of a
special hardware feature on your CPU or motherboard,
a Random Number Generator (RNG). The software has two parts:
a core providing the /dev/hwrng character device and its
sysfs support, plus a hardware-specific driver that plugs
into that core.
Introduction
============
To make the most effective use of these mechanisms, you
should download the support software as well. Download the
latest version of the "rng-tools" package from the
hw_random driver's official Web site:
The hw_random framework is software that makes use of a
special hardware feature on your CPU or motherboard,
a Random Number Generator (RNG). The software has two parts:
a core providing the /dev/hwrng character device and its
sysfs support, plus a hardware-specific driver that plugs
into that core.
http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel/
To make the most effective use of these mechanisms, you
should download the support software as well. Download the
latest version of the "rng-tools" package from the
hw_random driver's official Web site:
Those tools use /dev/hwrng to fill the kernel entropy pool,
which is used internally and exported by the /dev/urandom and
/dev/random special files.
http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel/
Theory of operation:
Those tools use /dev/hwrng to fill the kernel entropy pool,
which is used internally and exported by the /dev/urandom and
/dev/random special files.
CHARACTER DEVICE. Using the standard open()
and read() system calls, you can read random data from
the hardware RNG device. This data is NOT CHECKED by any
fitness tests, and could potentially be bogus (if the
hardware is faulty or has been tampered with). Data is only
output if the hardware "has-data" flag is set, but nevertheless
a security-conscious person would run fitness tests on the
data before assuming it is truly random.
Theory of operation
===================
The rng-tools package uses such tests in "rngd", and lets you
run them by hand with a "rngtest" utility.
CHARACTER DEVICE. Using the standard open()
and read() system calls, you can read random data from
the hardware RNG device. This data is NOT CHECKED by any
fitness tests, and could potentially be bogus (if the
hardware is faulty or has been tampered with). Data is only
output if the hardware "has-data" flag is set, but nevertheless
a security-conscious person would run fitness tests on the
data before assuming it is truly random.
/dev/hwrng is char device major 10, minor 183.
The rng-tools package uses such tests in "rngd", and lets you
run them by hand with a "rngtest" utility.
CLASS DEVICE. There is a /sys/class/misc/hw_random node with
two unique attributes, "rng_available" and "rng_current". The
"rng_available" attribute lists the hardware-specific drivers
available, while "rng_current" lists the one which is currently
connected to /dev/hwrng. If your system has more than one
RNG available, you may change the one used by writing a name from
the list in "rng_available" into "rng_current".
/dev/hwrng is char device major 10, minor 183.
CLASS DEVICE. There is a /sys/class/misc/hw_random node with
two unique attributes, "rng_available" and "rng_current". The
"rng_available" attribute lists the hardware-specific drivers
available, while "rng_current" lists the one which is currently
connected to /dev/hwrng. If your system has more than one
RNG available, you may change the one used by writing a name from
the list in "rng_available" into "rng_current".
==========================================================================
Hardware driver for Intel/AMD/VIA Random Number Generators (RNG)
Copyright 2000,2001 Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
Copyright 2000,2001 Philipp Rumpf <prumpf@mandrakesoft.com>
Hardware driver for Intel/AMD/VIA Random Number Generators (RNG)
- Copyright 2000,2001 Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
- Copyright 2000,2001 Philipp Rumpf <prumpf@mandrakesoft.com>
About the Intel RNG hardware, from the firmware hub datasheet:
About the Intel RNG hardware, from the firmware hub datasheet
=============================================================
The Firmware Hub integrates a Random Number Generator (RNG)
using thermal noise generated from inherently random quantum
mechanical properties of silicon. When not generating new random
bits the RNG circuitry will enter a low power state. Intel will
provide a binary software driver to give third party software
access to our RNG for use as a security feature. At this time,
the RNG is only to be used with a system in an OS-present state.
The Firmware Hub integrates a Random Number Generator (RNG)
using thermal noise generated from inherently random quantum
mechanical properties of silicon. When not generating new random
bits the RNG circuitry will enter a low power state. Intel will
provide a binary software driver to give third party software
access to our RNG for use as a security feature. At this time,
the RNG is only to be used with a system in an OS-present state.
Intel RNG Driver notes:
Intel RNG Driver notes
======================
* FIXME: support poll(2)
FIXME: support poll(2)
NOTE: request_mem_region was removed, for three reasons:
1) Only one RNG is supported by this driver, 2) The location
used by the RNG is a fixed location in MMIO-addressable memory,
.. note::
request_mem_region was removed, for three reasons:
1) Only one RNG is supported by this driver;
2) The location used by the RNG is a fixed location in
MMIO-addressable memory;
3) users with properly working BIOS e820 handling will always
have the region in which the RNG is located reserved, so
request_mem_region calls always fail for proper setups.
However, for people who use mem=XX, BIOS e820 information is
-not- in /proc/iomem, and request_mem_region(RNG_ADDR) can
succeed.
have the region in which the RNG is located reserved, so
request_mem_region calls always fail for proper setups.
However, for people who use mem=XX, BIOS e820 information is
**not** in /proc/iomem, and request_mem_region(RNG_ADDR) can
succeed.
Driver details:
Driver details
==============
Based on:
Based on:
Intel 82802AB/82802AC Firmware Hub (FWH) Datasheet
May 1999 Order Number: 290658-002 R
May 1999 Order Number: 290658-002 R
Intel 82802 Firmware Hub: Random Number Generator
Intel 82802 Firmware Hub:
Random Number Generator
Programmer's Reference Manual
December 1999 Order Number: 298029-001 R
December 1999 Order Number: 298029-001 R
Intel 82802 Firmware HUB Random Number Generator Driver
Intel 82802 Firmware HUB Random Number Generator Driver
Copyright (c) 2000 Matt Sottek <msottek@quiknet.com>
Special thanks to Matt Sottek. I did the "guts", he
did the "brains" and all the testing.
Special thanks to Matt Sottek. I did the "guts", he
did the "brains" and all the testing.

497
Documentation/hwspinlock.txt
View File

@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
===========================
Hardware Spinlock Framework
===========================
1. Introduction
Introduction
============
Hardware spinlock modules provide hardware assistance for synchronization
and mutual exclusion between heterogeneous processors and those not operating
@ -32,286 +35,370 @@ structure).
A common hwspinlock interface makes it possible to have generic, platform-
independent, drivers.
2. User API
User API
========
::
struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_request(void);
- dynamically assign an hwspinlock and return its address, or NULL
in case an unused hwspinlock isn't available. Users of this
API will usually want to communicate the lock's id to the remote core
before it can be used to achieve synchronization.
Should be called from a process context (might sleep).
Dynamically assign an hwspinlock and return its address, or NULL
in case an unused hwspinlock isn't available. Users of this
API will usually want to communicate the lock's id to the remote core
before it can be used to achieve synchronization.
Should be called from a process context (might sleep).
::
struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_request_specific(unsigned int id);
- assign a specific hwspinlock id and return its address, or NULL
if that hwspinlock is already in use. Usually board code will
be calling this function in order to reserve specific hwspinlock
ids for predefined purposes.
Should be called from a process context (might sleep).
Assign a specific hwspinlock id and return its address, or NULL
if that hwspinlock is already in use. Usually board code will
be calling this function in order to reserve specific hwspinlock
ids for predefined purposes.
Should be called from a process context (might sleep).
::
int of_hwspin_lock_get_id(struct device_node *np, int index);
- retrieve the global lock id for an OF phandle-based specific lock.
This function provides a means for DT users of a hwspinlock module
to get the global lock id of a specific hwspinlock, so that it can
be requested using the normal hwspin_lock_request_specific() API.
The function returns a lock id number on success, -EPROBE_DEFER if
the hwspinlock device is not yet registered with the core, or other
error values.
Should be called from a process context (might sleep).
Retrieve the global lock id for an OF phandle-based specific lock.
This function provides a means for DT users of a hwspinlock module
to get the global lock id of a specific hwspinlock, so that it can
be requested using the normal hwspin_lock_request_specific() API.
The function returns a lock id number on success, -EPROBE_DEFER if
the hwspinlock device is not yet registered with the core, or other
error values.
Should be called from a process context (might sleep).
::
int hwspin_lock_free(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
- free a previously-assigned hwspinlock; returns 0 on success, or an
appropriate error code on failure (e.g. -EINVAL if the hwspinlock
is already free).
Should be called from a process context (might sleep).
Free a previously-assigned hwspinlock; returns 0 on success, or an
appropriate error code on failure (e.g. -EINVAL if the hwspinlock
is already free).
Should be called from a process context (might sleep).
::
int hwspin_lock_timeout(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int timeout);
- lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in
msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop
waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled so
the caller must not sleep, and is advised to release the hwspinlock as
soon as possible, in order to minimize remote cores polling on the
hardware interconnect.
Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs).
The function will never sleep.
Lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in
msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop
waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled so
the caller must not sleep, and is advised to release the hwspinlock as
soon as possible, in order to minimize remote cores polling on the
hardware interconnect.
Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs).
The function will never sleep.
::
int hwspin_lock_timeout_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int timeout);
- lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in
msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop
waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and the local
interrupts are disabled, so the caller must not sleep, and is advised to
release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs).
The function will never sleep.
Lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in
msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop
waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and the local
interrupts are disabled, so the caller must not sleep, and is advised to
release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs).
The function will never sleep.
::
int hwspin_lock_timeout_irqsave(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int to,
unsigned long *flags);
- lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in
msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop
waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled,
local interrupts are disabled and their previous state is saved at the
given flags placeholder. The caller must not sleep, and is advised to
release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs).
The function will never sleep.
unsigned long *flags);
Lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in
msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop
waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled,
local interrupts are disabled and their previous state is saved at the
given flags placeholder. The caller must not sleep, and is advised to
release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs).
The function will never sleep.
::
int hwspin_trylock(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
- attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if
it is already taken.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled so
caller must not sleep, and is advised to release the hwspinlock as soon as
possible, in order to minimize remote cores polling on the hardware
interconnect.
Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken).
The function will never sleep.
Attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if
it is already taken.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled so
caller must not sleep, and is advised to release the hwspinlock as soon as
possible, in order to minimize remote cores polling on the hardware
interconnect.
Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken).
The function will never sleep.
::
int hwspin_trylock_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
- attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if
it is already taken.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and the local
interrupts are disabled so caller must not sleep, and is advised to
release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken).
The function will never sleep.
Attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if
it is already taken.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and the local
interrupts are disabled so caller must not sleep, and is advised to
release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken).
The function will never sleep.
::
int hwspin_trylock_irqsave(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned long *flags);
- attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if
it is already taken.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled,
the local interrupts are disabled and their previous state is saved
at the given flags placeholder. The caller must not sleep, and is advised
to release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken).
The function will never sleep.
Attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if
it is already taken.
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled,
the local interrupts are disabled and their previous state is saved
at the given flags placeholder. The caller must not sleep, and is advised
to release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken).
The function will never sleep.
::
void hwspin_unlock(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
- unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock. Always succeed, and can be called
from any context (the function never sleeps). Note: code should _never_
unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked (there is no protection
against this).
Unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock. Always succeed, and can be called
from any context (the function never sleeps).
.. note::
code should **never** unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked
(there is no protection against this).
::
void hwspin_unlock_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
- unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock and enable local interrupts.
The caller should _never_ unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked.
Doing so is considered a bug (there is no protection against this).
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and local
interrupts are enabled. This function will never sleep.
Unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock and enable local interrupts.
The caller should **never** unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked.
Doing so is considered a bug (there is no protection against this).
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and local
interrupts are enabled. This function will never sleep.
::
void
hwspin_unlock_irqrestore(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned long *flags);
- unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock.
The caller should _never_ unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked.
Doing so is considered a bug (there is no protection against this).
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is reenabled,
and the state of the local interrupts is restored to the state saved at
the given flags. This function will never sleep.
Unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock.
The caller should **never** unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked.
Doing so is considered a bug (there is no protection against this).
Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is reenabled,
and the state of the local interrupts is restored to the state saved at
the given flags. This function will never sleep.
::
int hwspin_lock_get_id(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
- retrieve id number of a given hwspinlock. This is needed when an
hwspinlock is dynamically assigned: before it can be used to achieve
mutual exclusion with a remote cpu, the id number should be communicated
to the remote task with which we want to synchronize.
Returns the hwspinlock id number, or -EINVAL if hwlock is null.
3. Typical usage
Retrieve id number of a given hwspinlock. This is needed when an
hwspinlock is dynamically assigned: before it can be used to achieve
mutual exclusion with a remote cpu, the id number should be communicated
to the remote task with which we want to synchronize.
#include <linux/hwspinlock.h>
#include <linux/err.h>
Returns the hwspinlock id number, or -EINVAL if hwlock is null.
int hwspinlock_example1(void)
{
struct hwspinlock *hwlock;
int ret;
Typical usage
=============
/* dynamically assign a hwspinlock */
hwlock = hwspin_lock_request();
if (!hwlock)
...
::
id = hwspin_lock_get_id(hwlock);
/* probably need to communicate id to a remote processor now */
#include <linux/hwspinlock.h>
#include <linux/err.h>
/* take the lock, spin for 1 sec if it's already taken */
ret = hwspin_lock_timeout(hwlock, 1000);
if (ret)
...
int hwspinlock_example1(void)
{
struct hwspinlock *hwlock;
int ret;
/*
* we took the lock, do our thing now, but do NOT sleep
*/
/* dynamically assign a hwspinlock */
hwlock = hwspin_lock_request();
if (!hwlock)
...
/* release the lock */
hwspin_unlock(hwlock);
id = hwspin_lock_get_id(hwlock);
/* probably need to communicate id to a remote processor now */
/* free the lock */
ret = hwspin_lock_free(hwlock);
if (ret)
...
/* take the lock, spin for 1 sec if it's already taken */
ret = hwspin_lock_timeout(hwlock, 1000);
if (ret)
...
return ret;
}
/*
* we took the lock, do our thing now, but do NOT sleep
*/
int hwspinlock_example2(void)
{
struct hwspinlock *hwlock;
int ret;
/* release the lock */
hwspin_unlock(hwlock);
/*
* assign a specific hwspinlock id - this should be called early
* by board init code.
*/
hwlock = hwspin_lock_request_specific(PREDEFINED_LOCK_ID);
if (!hwlock)
...
/* free the lock */
ret = hwspin_lock_free(hwlock);
if (ret)
...
/* try to take it, but don't spin on it */
ret = hwspin_trylock(hwlock);
if (!ret) {
pr_info("lock is already taken\n");
return -EBUSY;
return ret;
}
/*
* we took the lock, do our thing now, but do NOT sleep
*/
int hwspinlock_example2(void)
{
struct hwspinlock *hwlock;
int ret;
/* release the lock */
hwspin_unlock(hwlock);
/*
* assign a specific hwspinlock id - this should be called early
* by board init code.
*/
hwlock = hwspin_lock_request_specific(PREDEFINED_LOCK_ID);
if (!hwlock)
...
/* free the lock */
ret = hwspin_lock_free(hwlock);
if (ret)
...
/* try to take it, but don't spin on it */
ret = hwspin_trylock(hwlock);
if (!ret) {
pr_info("lock is already taken\n");
return -EBUSY;
}
return ret;
}
/*
* we took the lock, do our thing now, but do NOT sleep
*/
/* release the lock */
hwspin_unlock(hwlock);
/* free the lock */
ret = hwspin_lock_free(hwlock);
if (ret)
...
return ret;
}
4. API for implementors
API for implementors
====================
::
int hwspin_lock_register(struct hwspinlock_device *bank, struct device *dev,
const struct hwspinlock_ops *ops, int base_id, int num_locks);
- to be called from the underlying platform-specific implementation, in
order to register a new hwspinlock device (which is usually a bank of
numerous locks). Should be called from a process context (this function
might sleep).
Returns 0 on success, or appropriate error code on failure.
To be called from the underlying platform-specific implementation, in
order to register a new hwspinlock device (which is usually a bank of
numerous locks). Should be called from a process context (this function
might sleep).
Returns 0 on success, or appropriate error code on failure.
::
int hwspin_lock_unregister(struct hwspinlock_device *bank);
- to be called from the underlying vendor-specific implementation, in order
to unregister an hwspinlock device (which is usually a bank of numerous
locks).
Should be called from a process context (this function might sleep).
Returns the address of hwspinlock on success, or NULL on error (e.g.
if the hwspinlock is still in use).
5. Important structs
To be called from the underlying vendor-specific implementation, in order
to unregister an hwspinlock device (which is usually a bank of numerous
locks).
Should be called from a process context (this function might sleep).
Returns the address of hwspinlock on success, or NULL on error (e.g.
if the hwspinlock is still in use).
Important structs
=================
struct hwspinlock_device is a device which usually contains a bank
of hardware locks. It is registered by the underlying hwspinlock
implementation using the hwspin_lock_register() API.
/**
* struct hwspinlock_device - a device which usually spans numerous hwspinlocks
* @dev: underlying device, will be used to invoke runtime PM api
* @ops: platform-specific hwspinlock handlers
* @base_id: id index of the first lock in this device
* @num_locks: number of locks in this device
* @lock: dynamically allocated array of 'struct hwspinlock'
*/
struct hwspinlock_device {
struct device *dev;
const struct hwspinlock_ops *ops;
int base_id;
int num_locks;
struct hwspinlock lock[0];
};
::
/**
* struct hwspinlock_device - a device which usually spans numerous hwspinlocks
* @dev: underlying device, will be used to invoke runtime PM api
* @ops: platform-specific hwspinlock handlers
* @base_id: id index of the first lock in this device
* @num_locks: number of locks in this device
* @lock: dynamically allocated array of 'struct hwspinlock'
*/
struct hwspinlock_device {
struct device *dev;
const struct hwspinlock_ops *ops;
int base_id;
int num_locks;
struct hwspinlock lock[0];
};
struct hwspinlock_device contains an array of hwspinlock structs, each
of which represents a single hardware lock:
of which represents a single hardware lock::
/**
* struct hwspinlock - this struct represents a single hwspinlock instance
* @bank: the hwspinlock_device structure which owns this lock
* @lock: initialized and used by hwspinlock core
* @priv: private data, owned by the underlying platform-specific hwspinlock drv
*/
struct hwspinlock {
struct hwspinlock_device *bank;
spinlock_t lock;
void *priv;
};
/**
* struct hwspinlock - this struct represents a single hwspinlock instance
* @bank: the hwspinlock_device structure which owns this lock
* @lock: initialized and used by hwspinlock core
* @priv: private data, owned by the underlying platform-specific hwspinlock drv
*/
struct hwspinlock {
struct hwspinlock_device *bank;
spinlock_t lock;
void *priv;
};
When registering a bank of locks, the hwspinlock driver only needs to
set the priv members of the locks. The rest of the members are set and
initialized by the hwspinlock core itself.
6. Implementation callbacks
Implementation callbacks
========================
There are three possible callbacks defined in 'struct hwspinlock_ops':
There are three possible callbacks defined in 'struct hwspinlock_ops'::
struct hwspinlock_ops {
int (*trylock)(struct hwspinlock *lock);
void (*unlock)(struct hwspinlock *lock);
void (*relax)(struct hwspinlock *lock);
};
struct hwspinlock_ops {
int (*trylock)(struct hwspinlock *lock);
void (*unlock)(struct hwspinlock *lock);
void (*relax)(struct hwspinlock *lock);
};
The first two callbacks are mandatory:
The ->trylock() callback should make a single attempt to take the lock, and
return 0 on failure and 1 on success. This callback may _not_ sleep.
return 0 on failure and 1 on success. This callback may **not** sleep.
The ->unlock() callback releases the lock. It always succeed, and it, too,
may _not_ sleep.
may **not** sleep.
The ->relax() callback is optional. It is called by hwspinlock core while
spinning on a lock, and can be used by the underlying implementation to force
a delay between two successive invocations of ->trylock(). It may _not_ sleep.
a delay between two successive invocations of ->trylock(). It may **not** sleep.

1
Documentation/input/index.rst
View File

@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Contents:
.. toctree::
:maxdepth: 2
:numbered:
input_uapi
input_kapi

65
Documentation/intel_txt.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
Intel(R) TXT Overview:
=====================
Intel(R) TXT Overview
=====================
Intel's technology for safer computing, Intel(R) Trusted Execution
@ -8,9 +9,10 @@ provide the building blocks for creating trusted platforms.
Intel TXT was formerly known by the code name LaGrande Technology (LT).
Intel TXT in Brief:
o Provides dynamic root of trust for measurement (DRTM)
o Data protection in case of improper shutdown
o Measurement and verification of launched environment
- Provides dynamic root of trust for measurement (DRTM)
- Data protection in case of improper shutdown
- Measurement and verification of launched environment
Intel TXT is part of the vPro(TM) brand and is also available some
non-vPro systems. It is currently available on desktop systems
@ -24,16 +26,21 @@ which has been updated for the new released platforms.
Intel TXT has been presented at various events over the past few
years, some of which are:
LinuxTAG 2008:
- LinuxTAG 2008:
http://www.linuxtag.org/2008/en/conf/events/vp-donnerstag.html
TRUST2008:
- TRUST2008:
http://www.trust-conference.eu/downloads/Keynote-Speakers/
3_David-Grawrock_The-Front-Door-of-Trusted-Computing.pdf
IDF, Shanghai:
http://www.prcidf.com.cn/index_en.html
IDFs 2006, 2007 (I'm not sure if/where they are online)
Trusted Boot Project Overview:
- IDF, Shanghai:
http://www.prcidf.com.cn/index_en.html
- IDFs 2006, 2007
(I'm not sure if/where they are online)
Trusted Boot Project Overview
=============================
Trusted Boot (tboot) is an open source, pre-kernel/VMM module that
@ -87,11 +94,12 @@ Intel-provided firmware).
How Does it Work?
=================
o Tboot is an executable that is launched by the bootloader as
- Tboot is an executable that is launched by the bootloader as
the "kernel" (the binary the bootloader executes).
o It performs all of the work necessary to determine if the
- It performs all of the work necessary to determine if the
platform supports Intel TXT and, if so, executes the GETSEC[SENTER]
processor instruction that initiates the dynamic root of trust.
- If tboot determines that the system does not support Intel TXT
or is not configured correctly (e.g. the SINIT AC Module was
incorrect), it will directly launch the kernel with no changes
@ -99,12 +107,14 @@ o It performs all of the work necessary to determine if the
- Tboot will output various information about its progress to the
terminal, serial port, and/or an in-memory log; the output
locations can be configured with a command line switch.
o The GETSEC[SENTER] instruction will return control to tboot and
- The GETSEC[SENTER] instruction will return control to tboot and
tboot then verifies certain aspects of the environment (e.g. TPM NV
lock, e820 table does not have invalid entries, etc.).
o It will wake the APs from the special sleep state the GETSEC[SENTER]
- It will wake the APs from the special sleep state the GETSEC[SENTER]
instruction had put them in and place them into a wait-for-SIPI
state.
- Because the processors will not respond to an INIT or SIPI when
in the TXT environment, it is necessary to create a small VT-x
guest for the APs. When they run in this guest, they will
@ -112,8 +122,10 @@ o It will wake the APs from the special sleep state the GETSEC[SENTER]
VMEXITs, and then disable VT and jump to the SIPI vector. This
approach seemed like a better choice than having to insert
special code into the kernel's MP wakeup sequence.
o Tboot then applies an (optional) user-defined launch policy to
- Tboot then applies an (optional) user-defined launch policy to
verify the kernel and initrd.
- This policy is rooted in TPM NV and is described in the tboot
project. The tboot project also contains code for tools to
create and provision the policy.
@ -121,30 +133,34 @@ o Tboot then applies an (optional) user-defined launch policy to
then any kernel will be launched.
- Policy action is flexible and can include halting on failures
or simply logging them and continuing.
o Tboot adjusts the e820 table provided by the bootloader to reserve
- Tboot adjusts the e820 table provided by the bootloader to reserve
its own location in memory as well as to reserve certain other
TXT-related regions.
o As part of its launch, tboot DMA protects all of RAM (using the
- As part of its launch, tboot DMA protects all of RAM (using the
VT-d PMRs). Thus, the kernel must be booted with 'intel_iommu=on'
in order to remove this blanket protection and use VT-d's
page-level protection.
o Tboot will populate a shared page with some data about itself and
- Tboot will populate a shared page with some data about itself and
pass this to the Linux kernel as it transfers control.
- The location of the shared page is passed via the boot_params
struct as a physical address.
o The kernel will look for the tboot shared page address and, if it
- The kernel will look for the tboot shared page address and, if it
exists, map it.
o As one of the checks/protections provided by TXT, it makes a copy
- As one of the checks/protections provided by TXT, it makes a copy
of the VT-d DMARs in a DMA-protected region of memory and verifies
them for correctness. The VT-d code will detect if the kernel was
launched with tboot and use this copy instead of the one in the
ACPI table.
o At this point, tboot and TXT are out of the picture until a
- At this point, tboot and TXT are out of the picture until a
shutdown (S<n>)
o In order to put a system into any of the sleep states after a TXT
- In order to put a system into any of the sleep states after a TXT
launch, TXT must first be exited. This is to prevent attacks that
attempt to crash the system to gain control on reboot and steal
data left in memory.
- The kernel will perform all of its sleep preparation and
populate the shared page with the ACPI data needed to put the
platform in the desired sleep state.
@ -172,7 +188,7 @@ o In order to put a system into any of the sleep states after a TXT
That's pretty much it for TXT support.
Configuring the System:
Configuring the System
======================
This code works with 32bit, 32bit PAE, and 64bit (x86_64) kernels.
@ -181,7 +197,8 @@ In BIOS, the user must enable: TPM, TXT, VT-x, VT-d. Not all BIOSes
allow these to be individually enabled/disabled and the screens in
which to find them are BIOS-specific.
grub.conf needs to be modified as follows:
grub.conf needs to be modified as follows::
title Linux 2.6.29-tip w/ tboot
root (hd0,0)
kernel /tboot.gz logging=serial,vga,memory

67
Documentation/io-mapping.txt
View File

@ -1,66 +1,81 @@
========================
The io_mapping functions
========================
API
===
The io_mapping functions in linux/io-mapping.h provide an abstraction for
efficiently mapping small regions of an I/O device to the CPU. The initial
usage is to support the large graphics aperture on 32-bit processors where
ioremap_wc cannot be used to statically map the entire aperture to the CPU
as it would consume too much of the kernel address space.
A mapping object is created during driver initialization using
A mapping object is created during driver initialization using::
struct io_mapping *io_mapping_create_wc(unsigned long base,
unsigned long size)
'base' is the bus address of the region to be made
mappable, while 'size' indicates how large a mapping region to
enable. Both are in bytes.
'base' is the bus address of the region to be made
mappable, while 'size' indicates how large a mapping region to
enable. Both are in bytes.
This _wc variant provides a mapping which may only be used
with the io_mapping_map_atomic_wc or io_mapping_map_wc.
This _wc variant provides a mapping which may only be used
with the io_mapping_map_atomic_wc or io_mapping_map_wc.
With this mapping object, individual pages can be mapped either atomically
or not, depending on the necessary scheduling environment. Of course, atomic
maps are more efficient:
maps are more efficient::
void *io_mapping_map_atomic_wc(struct io_mapping *mapping,
unsigned long offset)
'offset' is the offset within the defined mapping region.
Accessing addresses beyond the region specified in the
creation function yields undefined results. Using an offset
which is not page aligned yields an undefined result. The
return value points to a single page in CPU address space.
'offset' is the offset within the defined mapping region.
Accessing addresses beyond the region specified in the
creation function yields undefined results. Using an offset
which is not page aligned yields an undefined result. The
return value points to a single page in CPU address space.
This _wc variant returns a write-combining map to the
page and may only be used with mappings created by
io_mapping_create_wc
This _wc variant returns a write-combining map to the
page and may only be used with mappings created by
io_mapping_create_wc
Note that the task may not sleep while holding this page
mapped.
Note that the task may not sleep while holding this page
mapped.
::
void io_mapping_unmap_atomic(void *vaddr)
'vaddr' must be the value returned by the last
io_mapping_map_atomic_wc call. This unmaps the specified
page and allows the task to sleep once again.
'vaddr' must be the value returned by the last
io_mapping_map_atomic_wc call. This unmaps the specified
page and allows the task to sleep once again.
If you need to sleep while holding the lock, you can use the non-atomic
variant, although they may be significantly slower.
::
void *io_mapping_map_wc(struct io_mapping *mapping,
unsigned long offset)
This works like io_mapping_map_atomic_wc except it allows
the task to sleep while holding the page mapped.
This works like io_mapping_map_atomic_wc except it allows
the task to sleep while holding the page mapped.
::
void io_mapping_unmap(void *vaddr)
This works like io_mapping_unmap_atomic, except it is used
for pages mapped with io_mapping_map_wc.
This works like io_mapping_unmap_atomic, except it is used
for pages mapped with io_mapping_map_wc.
At driver close time, the io_mapping object must be freed:
At driver close time, the io_mapping object must be freed::
void io_mapping_free(struct io_mapping *mapping)
Current Implementation:
Current Implementation
======================
The initial implementation of these functions uses existing mapping
mechanisms and so provides only an abstraction layer and no new

62
Documentation/io_ordering.txt
View File

@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
==============================================
Ordering I/O writes to memory-mapped addresses
==============================================
On some platforms, so-called memory-mapped I/O is weakly ordered. On such
platforms, driver writers are responsible for ensuring that I/O writes to
memory-mapped addresses on their device arrive in the order intended. This is
@ -8,39 +12,39 @@ critical section of code protected by spinlocks. This would ensure that
subsequent writes to I/O space arrived only after all prior writes (much like a
memory barrier op, mb(), only with respect to I/O).
A more concrete example from a hypothetical device driver:
A more concrete example from a hypothetical device driver::
...
CPU A: spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
CPU A: val = readl(my_status);
CPU A: ...
CPU A: writel(newval, ring_ptr);
CPU A: spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
...
CPU B: spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
CPU B: val = readl(my_status);
CPU B: ...
CPU B: writel(newval2, ring_ptr);
CPU B: spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
...
...
CPU A: spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
CPU A: val = readl(my_status);
CPU A: ...
CPU A: writel(newval, ring_ptr);
CPU A: spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
...
CPU B: spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
CPU B: val = readl(my_status);
CPU B: ...
CPU B: writel(newval2, ring_ptr);
CPU B: spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
...
In the case above, the device may receive newval2 before it receives newval,
which could cause problems. Fixing it is easy enough though:
which could cause problems. Fixing it is easy enough though::
...
CPU A: spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
CPU A: val = readl(my_status);
CPU A: ...
CPU A: writel(newval, ring_ptr);
CPU A: (void)readl(safe_register); /* maybe a config register? */
CPU A: spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
...
CPU B: spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
CPU B: val = readl(my_status);
CPU B: ...
CPU B: writel(newval2, ring_ptr);
CPU B: (void)readl(safe_register); /* maybe a config register? */
CPU B: spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
...
CPU A: spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
CPU A: val = readl(my_status);
CPU A: ...
CPU A: writel(newval, ring_ptr);
CPU A: (void)readl(safe_register); /* maybe a config register? */
CPU A: spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
...
CPU B: spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
CPU B: val = readl(my_status);
CPU B: ...
CPU B: writel(newval2, ring_ptr);
CPU B: (void)readl(safe_register); /* maybe a config register? */
CPU B: spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
Here, the reads from safe_register will cause the I/O chipset to flush any
pending writes before actually posting the read to the chipset, preventing

76
Documentation/iostats.txt
View File

@ -1,49 +1,50 @@
=====================
I/O statistics fields
---------------
=====================
Since 2.4.20 (and some versions before, with patches), and 2.5.45,
more extensive disk statistics have been introduced to help measure disk
activity. Tools such as sar and iostat typically interpret these and do
activity. Tools such as ``sar`` and ``iostat`` typically interpret these and do
the work for you, but in case you are interested in creating your own
tools, the fields are explained here.
In 2.4 now, the information is found as additional fields in
/proc/partitions. In 2.6, the same information is found in two
places: one is in the file /proc/diskstats, and the other is within
``/proc/partitions``. In 2.6 and upper, the same information is found in two
places: one is in the file ``/proc/diskstats``, and the other is within
the sysfs file system, which must be mounted in order to obtain
the information. Throughout this document we'll assume that sysfs
is mounted on /sys, although of course it may be mounted anywhere.
Both /proc/diskstats and sysfs use the same source for the information
is mounted on ``/sys``, although of course it may be mounted anywhere.
Both ``/proc/diskstats`` and sysfs use the same source for the information
and so should not differ.
Here are examples of these different formats:
Here are examples of these different formats::
2.4:
3 0 39082680 hda 446216 784926 9550688 4382310 424847 312726 5922052 19310380 0 3376340 23705160
3 1 9221278 hda1 35486 0 35496 38030 0 0 0 0 0 38030 38030
2.4:
3 0 39082680 hda 446216 784926 9550688 4382310 424847 312726 5922052 19310380 0 3376340 23705160
3 1 9221278 hda1 35486 0 35496 38030 0 0 0 0 0 38030 38030
2.6+ sysfs:
446216 784926 9550688 4382310 424847 312726 5922052 19310380 0 3376340 23705160
35486 38030 38030 38030
2.6 sysfs:
446216 784926 9550688 4382310 424847 312726 5922052 19310380 0 3376340 23705160
35486 38030 38030 38030
2.6+ diskstats:
3 0 hda 446216 784926 9550688 4382310 424847 312726 5922052 19310380 0 3376340 23705160
3 1 hda1 35486 38030 38030 38030
2.6 diskstats:
3 0 hda 446216 784926 9550688 4382310 424847 312726 5922052 19310380 0 3376340 23705160
3 1 hda1 35486 38030 38030 38030
On 2.4 you might execute ``grep 'hda ' /proc/partitions``. On 2.6+, you have
a choice of ``cat /sys/block/hda/stat`` or ``grep 'hda ' /proc/diskstats``.
On 2.4 you might execute "grep 'hda ' /proc/partitions". On 2.6, you have
a choice of "cat /sys/block/hda/stat" or "grep 'hda ' /proc/diskstats".
The advantage of one over the other is that the sysfs choice works well
if you are watching a known, small set of disks. /proc/diskstats may
if you are watching a known, small set of disks. ``/proc/diskstats`` may
be a better choice if you are watching a large number of disks because
you'll avoid the overhead of 50, 100, or 500 or more opens/closes with
each snapshot of your disk statistics.
In 2.4, the statistics fields are those after the device name. In
the above example, the first field of statistics would be 446216.
By contrast, in 2.6 if you look at /sys/block/hda/stat, you'll
By contrast, in 2.6+ if you look at ``/sys/block/hda/stat``, you'll
find just the eleven fields, beginning with 446216. If you look at
/proc/diskstats, the eleven fields will be preceded by the major and
``/proc/diskstats``, the eleven fields will be preceded by the major and
minor device numbers, and device name. Each of these formats provides
eleven fields of statistics, each meaning exactly the same things.
All fields except field 9 are cumulative since boot. Field 9 should
@ -59,30 +60,40 @@ system-wide stats you'll have to find all the devices and sum them all up.
Field 1 -- # of reads completed
This is the total number of reads completed successfully.
Field 2 -- # of reads merged, field 6 -- # of writes merged
Reads and writes which are adjacent to each other may be merged for
efficiency. Thus two 4K reads may become one 8K read before it is
ultimately handed to the disk, and so it will be counted (and queued)
as only one I/O. This field lets you know how often this was done.
Field 3 -- # of sectors read
This is the total number of sectors read successfully.
Field 4 -- # of milliseconds spent reading
This is the total number of milliseconds spent by all reads (as
measured from __make_request() to end_that_request_last()).
Field 5 -- # of writes completed
This is the total number of writes completed successfully.
Field 6 -- # of writes merged
See the description of field 2.
Field 7 -- # of sectors written
This is the total number of sectors written successfully.
Field 8 -- # of milliseconds spent writing
This is the total number of milliseconds spent by all writes (as
measured from __make_request() to end_that_request_last()).
Field 9 -- # of I/Os currently in progress
The only field that should go to zero. Incremented as requests are
given to appropriate struct request_queue and decremented as they finish.
Field 10 -- # of milliseconds spent doing I/Os
This field increases so long as field 9 is nonzero.
Field 11 -- weighted # of milliseconds spent doing I/Os
This field is incremented at each I/O start, I/O completion, I/O
merge, or read of these stats by the number of I/Os in progress
@ -97,7 +108,7 @@ introduced when changes collide, so (for instance) adding up all the
read I/Os issued per partition should equal those made to the disks ...
but due to the lack of locking it may only be very close.
In 2.6, there are counters for each CPU, which make the lack of locking
In 2.6+, there are counters for each CPU, which make the lack of locking
almost a non-issue. When the statistics are read, the per-CPU counters
are summed (possibly overflowing the unsigned long variable they are
summed to) and the result given to the user. There is no convenient
@ -106,22 +117,25 @@ user interface for accessing the per-CPU counters themselves.
Disks vs Partitions
-------------------
There were significant changes between 2.4 and 2.6 in the I/O subsystem.
There were significant changes between 2.4 and 2.6+ in the I/O subsystem.
As a result, some statistic information disappeared. The translation from
a disk address relative to a partition to the disk address relative to
the host disk happens much earlier. All merges and timings now happen
at the disk level rather than at both the disk and partition level as
in 2.4. Consequently, you'll see a different statistics output on 2.6 for
in 2.4. Consequently, you'll see a different statistics output on 2.6+ for
partitions from that for disks. There are only *four* fields available
for partitions on 2.6 machines. This is reflected in the examples above.
for partitions on 2.6+ machines. This is reflected in the examples above.
Field 1 -- # of reads issued
This is the total number of reads issued to this partition.
Field 2 -- # of sectors read
This is the total number of sectors requested to be read from this
partition.
Field 3 -- # of writes issued
This is the total number of writes issued to this partition.
Field 4 -- # of sectors written
This is the total number of sectors requested to be written to
this partition.
@ -149,16 +163,16 @@ to some (probably insignificant) inaccuracy.
Additional notes
----------------
In 2.6, sysfs is not mounted by default. If your distribution of
In 2.6+, sysfs is not mounted by default. If your distribution of
Linux hasn't added it already, here's the line you'll want to add to
your /etc/fstab:
your ``/etc/fstab``::
none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
In 2.6, all disk statistics were removed from /proc/stat. In 2.4, they
appear in both /proc/partitions and /proc/stat, although the ones in
/proc/stat take a very different format from those in /proc/partitions
In 2.6+, all disk statistics were removed from ``/proc/stat``. In 2.4, they
appear in both ``/proc/partitions`` and ``/proc/stat``, although the ones in
``/proc/stat`` take a very different format from those in ``/proc/partitions``
(see proc(5), if your system has it.)
-- ricklind@us.ibm.com

10
Documentation/irqflags-tracing.txt
View File

@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
=======================
IRQ-flags state tracing
=======================
started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
:Author: started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
the "irq-flags tracing" feature "traces" hardirq and softirq state, in
The "irq-flags tracing" feature "traces" hardirq and softirq state, in
that it gives interested subsystems an opportunity to be notified of
every hardirqs-off/hardirqs-on, softirqs-off/softirqs-on event that
happens in the kernel.
@ -14,7 +16,7 @@ CONFIG_PROVE_RWSEM_LOCKING will be offered on an architecture - these
are locking APIs that are not used in IRQ context. (the one exception
for rwsems is worked around)
architecture support for this is certainly not in the "trivial"
Architecture support for this is certainly not in the "trivial"
category, because lots of lowlevel assembly code deal with irq-flags
state changes. But an architecture can be irq-flags-tracing enabled in a
rather straightforward and risk-free manner.
@ -41,7 +43,7 @@ irq-flags-tracing support:
excluded from the irq-tracing [and lock validation] mechanism via
lockdep_off()/lockdep_on().
in general there is no risk from having an incomplete irq-flags-tracing
In general there is no risk from having an incomplete irq-flags-tracing
implementation in an architecture: lockdep will detect that and will
turn itself off. I.e. the lock validator will still be reliable. There
should be no crashes due to irq-tracing bugs. (except if the assembly

53
Documentation/isa.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
===========
ISA Drivers
-----------
===========
The following text is adapted from the commit message of the initial
commit of the ISA bus driver authored by Rene Herman.
@ -23,17 +24,17 @@ that all device creation has been made internal as well.
The usage model this provides is nice, and has been acked from the ALSA
side by Takashi Iwai and Jaroslav Kysela. The ALSA driver module_init's
now (for oldisa-only drivers) become:
now (for oldisa-only drivers) become::
static int __init alsa_card_foo_init(void)
{
return isa_register_driver(&snd_foo_isa_driver, SNDRV_CARDS);
}
static int __init alsa_card_foo_init(void)
{
return isa_register_driver(&snd_foo_isa_driver, SNDRV_CARDS);
}
static void __exit alsa_card_foo_exit(void)
{
isa_unregister_driver(&snd_foo_isa_driver);
}
static void __exit alsa_card_foo_exit(void)
{
isa_unregister_driver(&snd_foo_isa_driver);
}
Quite like the other bus models therefore. This removes a lot of
duplicated init code from the ALSA ISA drivers.
@ -47,11 +48,11 @@ parameter, indicating how many devices to create and call our methods
with.
The platform_driver callbacks are called with a platform_device param;
the isa_driver callbacks are being called with a "struct device *dev,
unsigned int id" pair directly -- with the device creation completely
the isa_driver callbacks are being called with a ``struct device *dev,
unsigned int id`` pair directly -- with the device creation completely
internal to the bus it's much cleaner to not leak isa_dev's by passing
them in at all. The id is the only thing we ever want other then the
struct device * anyways, and it makes for nicer code in the callbacks as
struct device anyways, and it makes for nicer code in the callbacks as
well.
With this additional .match() callback ISA drivers have all options. If
@ -75,20 +76,20 @@ This exports only two functions; isa_{,un}register_driver().
isa_register_driver() register's the struct device_driver, and then
loops over the passed in ndev creating devices and registering them.
This causes the bus match method to be called for them, which is:
This causes the bus match method to be called for them, which is::
int isa_bus_match(struct device *dev, struct device_driver *driver)
{
struct isa_driver *isa_driver = to_isa_driver(driver);
int isa_bus_match(struct device *dev, struct device_driver *driver)
{
struct isa_driver *isa_driver = to_isa_driver(driver);
if (dev->platform_data == isa_driver) {
if (!isa_driver->match ||
isa_driver->match(dev, to_isa_dev(dev)->id))
return 1;
dev->platform_data = NULL;
}
return 0;
}
if (dev->platform_data == isa_driver) {
if (!isa_driver->match ||
isa_driver->match(dev, to_isa_dev(dev)->id))
return 1;
dev->platform_data = NULL;
}
return 0;
}
The first thing this does is check if this device is in fact one of this
driver's devices by seeing if the device's platform_data pointer is set
@ -102,7 +103,7 @@ well.
Then, if the the driver did not provide a .match, it matches. If it did,
the driver match() method is called to determine a match.
If it did _not_ match, dev->platform_data is reset to indicate this to
If it did **not** match, dev->platform_data is reset to indicate this to
isa_register_driver which can then unregister the device again.
If during all this, there's any error, or no devices matched at all

1
Documentation/isapnp.txt
View File

@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
==========================================================
ISA Plug & Play support by Jaroslav Kysela <perex@suse.cz>
==========================================================

12
Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
View File

@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ There are two possible methods of using Kdump.
2) Or use the system kernel binary itself as dump-capture kernel and there is
no need to build a separate dump-capture kernel. This is possible
only with the architectures which support a relocatable kernel. As
of today, i386, x86_64, ppc64, ia64 and arm architectures support relocatable
kernel.
of today, i386, x86_64, ppc64, ia64, arm and arm64 architectures support
relocatable kernel.
Building a relocatable kernel is advantageous from the point of view that
one does not have to build a second kernel for capturing the dump. But
@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ For arm:
For arm64:
- Use vmlinux or Image
If you are using a uncompressed vmlinux image then use following command
If you are using an uncompressed vmlinux image then use following command
to load dump-capture kernel.
kexec -p <dump-capture-kernel-vmlinux-image> \
@ -361,6 +361,12 @@ to load dump-capture kernel.
--dtb=<dtb-for-dump-capture-kernel> \
--append="root=<root-dev> <arch-specific-options>"
If you are using an uncompressed Image, then use following command
to load dump-capture kernel.
kexec -p <dump-capture-kernel-Image> \
--initrd=<initrd-for-dump-capture-kernel> \
--append="root=<root-dev> <arch-specific-options>"
Please note, that --args-linux does not need to be specified for ia64.
It is planned to make this a no-op on that architecture, but for now

156
Documentation/kernel-per-CPU-kthreads.txt
View File

@ -1,27 +1,29 @@
REDUCING OS JITTER DUE TO PER-CPU KTHREADS
==========================================
Reducing OS jitter due to per-cpu kthreads
==========================================
This document lists per-CPU kthreads in the Linux kernel and presents
options to control their OS jitter. Note that non-per-CPU kthreads are
not listed here. To reduce OS jitter from non-per-CPU kthreads, bind
them to a "housekeeping" CPU dedicated to such work.
References
==========
REFERENCES
- Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt: Binding interrupts to sets of CPUs.
o Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt: Binding interrupts to sets of CPUs.
- Documentation/cgroup-v1: Using cgroups to bind tasks to sets of CPUs.
o Documentation/cgroup-v1: Using cgroups to bind tasks to sets of CPUs.
o man taskset: Using the taskset command to bind tasks to sets
- man taskset: Using the taskset command to bind tasks to sets
of CPUs.
o man sched_setaffinity: Using the sched_setaffinity() system
- man sched_setaffinity: Using the sched_setaffinity() system
call to bind tasks to sets of CPUs.
o /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuN/online: Control CPU N's hotplug state,
- /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuN/online: Control CPU N's hotplug state,
writing "0" to offline and "1" to online.
o In order to locate kernel-generated OS jitter on CPU N:
- In order to locate kernel-generated OS jitter on CPU N:
cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing
echo 1 > max_graph_depth # Increase the "1" for more detail
@ -29,12 +31,17 @@ o In order to locate kernel-generated OS jitter on CPU N:
# run workload
cat per_cpu/cpuN/trace
kthreads
========
KTHREADS
Name:
ehca_comp/%u
Purpose:
Periodically process Infiniband-related work.
Name: ehca_comp/%u
Purpose: Periodically process Infiniband-related work.
To reduce its OS jitter, do any of the following:
1. Don't use eHCA Infiniband hardware, instead choosing hardware
that does not require per-CPU kthreads. This will prevent these
kthreads from being created in the first place. (This will
@ -46,26 +53,45 @@ To reduce its OS jitter, do any of the following:
provisioned only on selected CPUs.
Name: irq/%d-%s
Purpose: Handle threaded interrupts.
Name:
irq/%d-%s
Purpose:
Handle threaded interrupts.
To reduce its OS jitter, do the following:
1. Use irq affinity to force the irq threads to execute on
some other CPU.
Name: kcmtpd_ctr_%d
Purpose: Handle Bluetooth work.
Name:
kcmtpd_ctr_%d
Purpose:
Handle Bluetooth work.
To reduce its OS jitter, do one of the following:
1. Don't use Bluetooth, in which case these kthreads won't be
created in the first place.
2. Use irq affinity to force Bluetooth-related interrupts to
occur on some other CPU and furthermore initiate all
Bluetooth activity on some other CPU.
Name: ksoftirqd/%u
Purpose: Execute softirq handlers when threaded or when under heavy load.
Name:
ksoftirqd/%u
Purpose:
Execute softirq handlers when threaded or when under heavy load.
To reduce its OS jitter, each softirq vector must be handled
separately as follows:
TIMER_SOFTIRQ: Do all of the following:
TIMER_SOFTIRQ
-------------
Do all of the following:
1. To the extent possible, keep the CPU out of the kernel when it
is non-idle, for example, by avoiding system calls and by forcing
both kernel threads and interrupts to execute elsewhere.
@ -76,34 +102,59 @@ TIMER_SOFTIRQ: Do all of the following:
first one back online. Once you have onlined the CPUs in question,
do not offline any other CPUs, because doing so could force the
timer back onto one of the CPUs in question.
NET_TX_SOFTIRQ and NET_RX_SOFTIRQ: Do all of the following:
NET_TX_SOFTIRQ and NET_RX_SOFTIRQ
---------------------------------
Do all of the following:
1. Force networking interrupts onto other CPUs.
2. Initiate any network I/O on other CPUs.
3. Once your application has started, prevent CPU-hotplug operations
from being initiated from tasks that might run on the CPU to
be de-jittered. (It is OK to force this CPU offline and then
bring it back online before you start your application.)
BLOCK_SOFTIRQ: Do all of the following:
BLOCK_SOFTIRQ
-------------
Do all of the following:
1. Force block-device interrupts onto some other CPU.
2. Initiate any block I/O on other CPUs.
3. Once your application has started, prevent CPU-hotplug operations
from being initiated from tasks that might run on the CPU to
be de-jittered. (It is OK to force this CPU offline and then
bring it back online before you start your application.)
IRQ_POLL_SOFTIRQ: Do all of the following:
IRQ_POLL_SOFTIRQ
----------------
Do all of the following:
1. Force block-device interrupts onto some other CPU.
2. Initiate any block I/O and block-I/O polling on other CPUs.
3. Once your application has started, prevent CPU-hotplug operations
from being initiated from tasks that might run on the CPU to
be de-jittered. (It is OK to force this CPU offline and then
bring it back online before you start your application.)
TASKLET_SOFTIRQ: Do one or more of the following:
TASKLET_SOFTIRQ
---------------
Do one or more of the following:
1. Avoid use of drivers that use tasklets. (Such drivers will contain
calls to things like tasklet_schedule().)
2. Convert all drivers that you must use from tasklets to workqueues.
3. Force interrupts for drivers using tasklets onto other CPUs,
and also do I/O involving these drivers on other CPUs.
SCHED_SOFTIRQ: Do all of the following:
SCHED_SOFTIRQ
-------------
Do all of the following:
1. Avoid sending scheduler IPIs to the CPU to be de-jittered,
for example, ensure that at most one runnable kthread is present
on that CPU. If a thread that expects to run on the de-jittered
@ -120,7 +171,12 @@ SCHED_SOFTIRQ: Do all of the following:
forcing both kernel threads and interrupts to execute elsewhere.
This further reduces the number of scheduler-clock interrupts
received by the de-jittered CPU.
HRTIMER_SOFTIRQ: Do all of the following:
HRTIMER_SOFTIRQ
---------------
Do all of the following:
1. To the extent possible, keep the CPU out of the kernel when it
is non-idle. For example, avoid system calls and force both
kernel threads and interrupts to execute elsewhere.
@ -131,9 +187,15 @@ HRTIMER_SOFTIRQ: Do all of the following:
back online. Once you have onlined the CPUs in question, do not
offline any other CPUs, because doing so could force the timer
back onto one of the CPUs in question.
RCU_SOFTIRQ: Do at least one of the following:
RCU_SOFTIRQ
-----------
Do at least one of the following:
1. Offload callbacks and keep the CPU in either dyntick-idle or
adaptive-ticks state by doing all of the following:
a. CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL=y and ensure that the CPU to be
de-jittered is marked as an adaptive-ticks CPU using the
"nohz_full=" boot parameter. Bind the rcuo kthreads to
@ -142,8 +204,10 @@ RCU_SOFTIRQ: Do at least one of the following:
when it is non-idle, for example, by avoiding system
calls and by forcing both kernel threads and interrupts
to execute elsewhere.
2. Enable RCU to do its processing remotely via dyntick-idle by
doing all of the following:
a. Build with CONFIG_NO_HZ=y and CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ=y.
b. Ensure that the CPU goes idle frequently, allowing other
CPUs to detect that it has passed through an RCU quiescent
@ -155,15 +219,20 @@ RCU_SOFTIRQ: Do at least one of the following:
calls and by forcing both kernel threads and interrupts
to execute elsewhere.
Name: kworker/%u:%d%s (cpu, id, priority)
Purpose: Execute workqueue requests
Name:
kworker/%u:%d%s (cpu, id, priority)
Purpose:
Execute workqueue requests
To reduce its OS jitter, do any of the following:
1. Run your workload at a real-time priority, which will allow
preempting the kworker daemons.
2. A given workqueue can be made visible in the sysfs filesystem
by passing the WQ_SYSFS to that workqueue's alloc_workqueue().
Such a workqueue can be confined to a given subset of the
CPUs using the /sys/devices/virtual/workqueue/*/cpumask sysfs
CPUs using the ``/sys/devices/virtual/workqueue/*/cpumask`` sysfs
files. The set of WQ_SYSFS workqueues can be displayed using
"ls sys/devices/virtual/workqueue". That said, the workqueues
maintainer would like to caution people against indiscriminately
@ -173,6 +242,7 @@ To reduce its OS jitter, do any of the following:
to remove it, even if its addition was a mistake.
3. Do any of the following needed to avoid jitter that your
application cannot tolerate:
a. Build your kernel with CONFIG_SLUB=y rather than
CONFIG_SLAB=y, thus avoiding the slab allocator's periodic
use of each CPU's workqueues to run its cache_reap()
@ -186,6 +256,7 @@ To reduce its OS jitter, do any of the following:
be able to build your kernel with CONFIG_CPU_FREQ=n to
avoid the CPU-frequency governor periodically running
on each CPU, including cs_dbs_timer() and od_dbs_timer().
WARNING: Please check your CPU specifications to
make sure that this is safe on your particular system.
d. As of v3.18, Christoph Lameter's on-demand vmstat workers
@ -222,9 +293,14 @@ To reduce its OS jitter, do any of the following:
CONFIG_PMAC_RACKMETER=n to disable the CPU-meter,
avoiding OS jitter from rackmeter_do_timer().
Name: rcuc/%u
Purpose: Execute RCU callbacks in CONFIG_RCU_BOOST=y kernels.
Name:
rcuc/%u
Purpose:
Execute RCU callbacks in CONFIG_RCU_BOOST=y kernels.
To reduce its OS jitter, do at least one of the following:
1. Build the kernel with CONFIG_PREEMPT=n. This prevents these
kthreads from being created in the first place, and also obviates
the need for RCU priority boosting. This approach is feasible
@ -244,9 +320,14 @@ To reduce its OS jitter, do at least one of the following:
CPU, again preventing the rcuc/%u kthreads from having any work
to do.
Name: rcuob/%d, rcuop/%d, and rcuos/%d
Purpose: Offload RCU callbacks from the corresponding CPU.
Name:
rcuob/%d, rcuop/%d, and rcuos/%d
Purpose:
Offload RCU callbacks from the corresponding CPU.
To reduce its OS jitter, do at least one of the following:
1. Use affinity, cgroups, or other mechanism to force these kthreads
to execute on some other CPU.
2. Build with CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU=n, which will prevent these
@ -254,9 +335,14 @@ To reduce its OS jitter, do at least one of the following:
note that this will not eliminate OS jitter, but will instead
shift it to RCU_SOFTIRQ.
Name: watchdog/%u
Purpose: Detect software lockups on each CPU.
Name:
watchdog/%u
Purpose:
Detect software lockups on each CPU.
To reduce its OS jitter, do at least one of the following:
1. Build with CONFIG_LOCKUP_DETECTOR=n, which will prevent these
kthreads from being created in the first place.
2. Boot with "nosoftlockup=0", which will also prevent these kthreads

69
Documentation/kobject.txt
View File

@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
=====================================================================
Everything you never wanted to know about kobjects, ksets, and ktypes
=====================================================================
Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
:Author: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
:Last updated: December 19, 2007
Based on an original article by Jon Corbet for lwn.net written October 1,
2003 and located at http://lwn.net/Articles/51437/
Last updated December 19, 2007
Part of the difficulty in understanding the driver model - and the kobject
abstraction upon which it is built - is that there is no obvious starting
place. Dealing with kobjects requires understanding a few different types,
@ -47,6 +47,7 @@ approach will be taken, so we'll go back to kobjects.
Embedding kobjects
==================
It is rare for kernel code to create a standalone kobject, with one major
exception explained below. Instead, kobjects are used to control access to
@ -65,7 +66,7 @@ their own, but are invariably found embedded in the larger objects of
interest.)
So, for example, the UIO code in drivers/uio/uio.c has a structure that
defines the memory region associated with a uio device:
defines the memory region associated with a uio device::
struct uio_map {
struct kobject kobj;
@ -77,7 +78,7 @@ just a matter of using the kobj member. Code that works with kobjects will
often have the opposite problem, however: given a struct kobject pointer,
what is the pointer to the containing structure? You must avoid tricks
(such as assuming that the kobject is at the beginning of the structure)
and, instead, use the container_of() macro, found in <linux/kernel.h>:
and, instead, use the container_of() macro, found in <linux/kernel.h>::
container_of(pointer, type, member)
@ -90,13 +91,13 @@ where:
The return value from container_of() is a pointer to the corresponding
container type. So, for example, a pointer "kp" to a struct kobject
embedded *within* a struct uio_map could be converted to a pointer to the
*containing* uio_map structure with:
*containing* uio_map structure with::
struct uio_map *u_map = container_of(kp, struct uio_map, kobj);
For convenience, programmers often define a simple macro for "back-casting"
kobject pointers to the containing type. Exactly this happens in the
earlier drivers/uio/uio.c, as you can see here:
earlier drivers/uio/uio.c, as you can see here::
struct uio_map {
struct kobject kobj;
@ -106,23 +107,25 @@ earlier drivers/uio/uio.c, as you can see here:
#define to_map(map) container_of(map, struct uio_map, kobj)
where the macro argument "map" is a pointer to the struct kobject in
question. That macro is subsequently invoked with:
question. That macro is subsequently invoked with::
struct uio_map *map = to_map(kobj);
Initialization of kobjects
==========================
Code which creates a kobject must, of course, initialize that object. Some
of the internal fields are setup with a (mandatory) call to kobject_init():
of the internal fields are setup with a (mandatory) call to kobject_init()::
void kobject_init(struct kobject *kobj, struct kobj_type *ktype);
The ktype is required for a kobject to be created properly, as every kobject
must have an associated kobj_type. After calling kobject_init(), to
register the kobject with sysfs, the function kobject_add() must be called:
register the kobject with sysfs, the function kobject_add() must be called::
int kobject_add(struct kobject *kobj, struct kobject *parent, const char *fmt, ...);
int kobject_add(struct kobject *kobj, struct kobject *parent,
const char *fmt, ...);
This sets up the parent of the kobject and the name for the kobject
properly. If the kobject is to be associated with a specific kset,
@ -133,7 +136,7 @@ kset itself.
As the name of the kobject is set when it is added to the kernel, the name
of the kobject should never be manipulated directly. If you must change
the name of the kobject, call kobject_rename():
the name of the kobject, call kobject_rename()::
int kobject_rename(struct kobject *kobj, const char *new_name);
@ -146,12 +149,12 @@ is being removed. If your code needs to call this function, it is
incorrect and needs to be fixed.
To properly access the name of the kobject, use the function
kobject_name():
kobject_name()::
const char *kobject_name(const struct kobject * kobj);
There is a helper function to both initialize and add the kobject to the
kernel at the same time, called surprisingly enough kobject_init_and_add():
kernel at the same time, called surprisingly enough kobject_init_and_add()::
int kobject_init_and_add(struct kobject *kobj, struct kobj_type *ktype,
struct kobject *parent, const char *fmt, ...);
@ -161,10 +164,11 @@ kobject_add() functions described above.
Uevents
=======
After a kobject has been registered with the kobject core, you need to
announce to the world that it has been created. This can be done with a
call to kobject_uevent():
call to kobject_uevent()::
int kobject_uevent(struct kobject *kobj, enum kobject_action action);
@ -180,11 +184,12 @@ hand.
Reference counts
================
One of the key functions of a kobject is to serve as a reference counter
for the object in which it is embedded. As long as references to the object
exist, the object (and the code which supports it) must continue to exist.
The low-level functions for manipulating a kobject's reference counts are:
The low-level functions for manipulating a kobject's reference counts are::
struct kobject *kobject_get(struct kobject *kobj);
void kobject_put(struct kobject *kobj);
@ -209,21 +214,24 @@ file Documentation/kref.txt in the Linux kernel source tree.
Creating "simple" kobjects
==========================
Sometimes all that a developer wants is a way to create a simple directory
in the sysfs hierarchy, and not have to mess with the whole complication of
ksets, show and store functions, and other details. This is the one
exception where a single kobject should be created. To create such an
entry, use the function:
entry, use the function::
struct kobject *kobject_create_and_add(char *name, struct kobject *parent);
This function will create a kobject and place it in sysfs in the location
underneath the specified parent kobject. To create simple attributes
associated with this kobject, use:
associated with this kobject, use::
int sysfs_create_file(struct kobject *kobj, struct attribute *attr);
or
or::
int sysfs_create_group(struct kobject *kobj, struct attribute_group *grp);
Both types of attributes used here, with a kobject that has been created
@ -236,6 +244,7 @@ implementation of a simple kobject and attributes.
ktypes and release methods
==========================
One important thing still missing from the discussion is what happens to a
kobject when its reference count reaches zero. The code which created the
@ -257,7 +266,7 @@ is good practice to always use kobject_put() after kobject_init() to avoid
errors creeping in.
This notification is done through a kobject's release() method. Usually
such a method has a form like:
such a method has a form like::
void my_object_release(struct kobject *kobj)
{
@ -281,7 +290,7 @@ leak in the kobject core, which makes people unhappy.
Interestingly, the release() method is not stored in the kobject itself;
instead, it is associated with the ktype. So let us introduce struct
kobj_type:
kobj_type::
struct kobj_type {
void (*release)(struct kobject *kobj);
@ -306,6 +315,7 @@ automatically created for any kobject that is registered with this ktype.
ksets
=====
A kset is merely a collection of kobjects that want to be associated with
each other. There is no restriction that they be of the same ktype, but be
@ -335,13 +345,16 @@ kobject) in their parent.
As a kset contains a kobject within it, it should always be dynamically
created and never declared statically or on the stack. To create a new
kset use:
kset use::
struct kset *kset_create_and_add(const char *name,
struct kset_uevent_ops *u,
struct kobject *parent);
When you are finished with the kset, call:
When you are finished with the kset, call::
void kset_unregister(struct kset *kset);
to destroy it. This removes the kset from sysfs and decrements its reference
count. When the reference count goes to zero, the kset will be released.
Because other references to the kset may still exist, the release may happen
@ -351,14 +364,14 @@ An example of using a kset can be seen in the
samples/kobject/kset-example.c file in the kernel tree.
If a kset wishes to control the uevent operations of the kobjects
associated with it, it can use the struct kset_uevent_ops to handle it:
associated with it, it can use the struct kset_uevent_ops to handle it::
struct kset_uevent_ops {
struct kset_uevent_ops {
int (*filter)(struct kset *kset, struct kobject *kobj);
const char *(*name)(struct kset *kset, struct kobject *kobj);
int (*uevent)(struct kset *kset, struct kobject *kobj,
struct kobj_uevent_env *env);
};
};
The filter function allows a kset to prevent a uevent from being emitted to
@ -386,6 +399,7 @@ added below the parent kobject.
Kobject removal
===============
After a kobject has been registered with the kobject core successfully, it
must be cleaned up when the code is finished with it. To do that, call
@ -409,6 +423,7 @@ called, and the objects in the former circle release each other.
Example code to copy from
=========================
For a more complete example of using ksets and kobjects properly, see the
example programs samples/kobject/{kobject-example.c,kset-example.c},

469
Documentation/kprobes.txt
View File

@ -1,30 +1,36 @@
Title : Kernel Probes (Kprobes)
Authors : Jim Keniston <jkenisto@us.ibm.com>
: Prasanna S Panchamukhi <prasanna.panchamukhi@gmail.com>
: Masami Hiramatsu <mhiramat@redhat.com>
=======================
Kernel Probes (Kprobes)
=======================
CONTENTS
:Author: Jim Keniston <jkenisto@us.ibm.com>
:Author: Prasanna S Panchamukhi <prasanna.panchamukhi@gmail.com>
:Author: Masami Hiramatsu <mhiramat@redhat.com>
1. Concepts: Kprobes, Jprobes, Return Probes
2. Architectures Supported
3. Configuring Kprobes
4. API Reference
5. Kprobes Features and Limitations
6. Probe Overhead
7. TODO
8. Kprobes Example
9. Jprobes Example
10. Kretprobes Example
Appendix A: The kprobes debugfs interface
Appendix B: The kprobes sysctl interface
.. CONTENTS
1. Concepts: Kprobes, Jprobes, Return Probes
1. Concepts: Kprobes, Jprobes, Return Probes
2. Architectures Supported
3. Configuring Kprobes
4. API Reference
5. Kprobes Features and Limitations
6. Probe Overhead
7. TODO
8. Kprobes Example
9. Jprobes Example
10. Kretprobes Example
Appendix A: The kprobes debugfs interface
Appendix B: The kprobes sysctl interface
Concepts: Kprobes, Jprobes, Return Probes
=========================================
Kprobes enables you to dynamically break into any kernel routine and
collect debugging and performance information non-disruptively. You
can trap at almost any kernel code address(*), specifying a handler
can trap at almost any kernel code address [1]_, specifying a handler
routine to be invoked when the breakpoint is hit.
(*: some parts of the kernel code can not be trapped, see 1.5 Blacklist)
.. [1] some parts of the kernel code can not be trapped, see
:ref:`kprobes_blacklist`)
There are currently three types of probes: kprobes, jprobes, and
kretprobes (also called return probes). A kprobe can be inserted
@ -40,8 +46,8 @@ registration function such as register_kprobe() specifies where
the probe is to be inserted and what handler is to be called when
the probe is hit.
There are also register_/unregister_*probes() functions for batch
registration/unregistration of a group of *probes. These functions
There are also ``register_/unregister_*probes()`` functions for batch
registration/unregistration of a group of ``*probes``. These functions
can speed up unregistration process when you have to unregister
a lot of probes at once.
@ -51,9 +57,10 @@ things that you'll need to know in order to make the best use of
Kprobes -- e.g., the difference between a pre_handler and
a post_handler, and how to use the maxactive and nmissed fields of
a kretprobe. But if you're in a hurry to start using Kprobes, you
can skip ahead to section 2.
can skip ahead to :ref:`kprobes_archs_supported`.
1.1 How Does a Kprobe Work?
How Does a Kprobe Work?
-----------------------
When a kprobe is registered, Kprobes makes a copy of the probed
instruction and replaces the first byte(s) of the probed instruction
@ -75,7 +82,8 @@ After the instruction is single-stepped, Kprobes executes the
"post_handler," if any, that is associated with the kprobe.
Execution then continues with the instruction following the probepoint.
1.2 How Does a Jprobe Work?
How Does a Jprobe Work?
-----------------------
A jprobe is implemented using a kprobe that is placed on a function's
entry point. It employs a simple mirroring principle to allow
@ -113,9 +121,11 @@ more than eight function arguments, an argument of more than sixteen
bytes, or more than 64 bytes of argument data, depending on
architecture).
1.3 Return Probes
Return Probes
-------------
1.3.1 How Does a Return Probe Work?
How Does a Return Probe Work?
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
When you call register_kretprobe(), Kprobes establishes a kprobe at
the entry to the function. When the probed function is called and this
@ -150,7 +160,8 @@ zero when the return probe is registered, and is incremented every
time the probed function is entered but there is no kretprobe_instance
object available for establishing the return probe.
1.3.2 Kretprobe entry-handler
Kretprobe entry-handler
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Kretprobes also provides an optional user-specified handler which runs
on function entry. This handler is specified by setting the entry_handler
@ -174,7 +185,10 @@ In case probed function is entered but there is no kretprobe_instance
object available, then in addition to incrementing the nmissed count,
the user entry_handler invocation is also skipped.
1.4 How Does Jump Optimization Work?
.. _kprobes_jump_optimization:
How Does Jump Optimization Work?
--------------------------------
If your kernel is built with CONFIG_OPTPROBES=y (currently this flag
is automatically set 'y' on x86/x86-64, non-preemptive kernel) and
@ -182,53 +196,60 @@ the "debug.kprobes_optimization" kernel parameter is set to 1 (see
sysctl(8)), Kprobes tries to reduce probe-hit overhead by using a jump
instruction instead of a breakpoint instruction at each probepoint.
1.4.1 Init a Kprobe
Init a Kprobe
^^^^^^^^^^^^^
When a probe is registered, before attempting this optimization,
Kprobes inserts an ordinary, breakpoint-based kprobe at the specified
address. So, even if it's not possible to optimize this particular
probepoint, there'll be a probe there.
1.4.2 Safety Check
Safety Check
^^^^^^^^^^^^
Before optimizing a probe, Kprobes performs the following safety checks:
- Kprobes verifies that the region that will be replaced by the jump
instruction (the "optimized region") lies entirely within one function.
(A jump instruction is multiple bytes, and so may overlay multiple
instructions.)
instruction (the "optimized region") lies entirely within one function.
(A jump instruction is multiple bytes, and so may overlay multiple
instructions.)
- Kprobes analyzes the entire function and verifies that there is no
jump into the optimized region. Specifically:
jump into the optimized region. Specifically:
- the function contains no indirect jump;
- the function contains no instruction that causes an exception (since
the fixup code triggered by the exception could jump back into the
optimized region -- Kprobes checks the exception tables to verify this);
and
the fixup code triggered by the exception could jump back into the
optimized region -- Kprobes checks the exception tables to verify this);
- there is no near jump to the optimized region (other than to the first
byte).
byte).
- For each instruction in the optimized region, Kprobes verifies that
the instruction can be executed out of line.
the instruction can be executed out of line.
1.4.3 Preparing Detour Buffer
Preparing Detour Buffer
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Next, Kprobes prepares a "detour" buffer, which contains the following
instruction sequence:
- code to push the CPU's registers (emulating a breakpoint trap)
- a call to the trampoline code which calls user's probe handlers.
- code to restore registers
- the instructions from the optimized region
- a jump back to the original execution path.
1.4.4 Pre-optimization
Pre-optimization
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
After preparing the detour buffer, Kprobes verifies that none of the
following situations exist:
- The probe has either a break_handler (i.e., it's a jprobe) or a
post_handler.
post_handler.
- Other instructions in the optimized region are probed.
- The probe is disabled.
In any of the above cases, Kprobes won't start optimizing the probe.
Since these are temporary situations, Kprobes tries to start
optimizing it again if the situation is changed.
@ -240,21 +261,23 @@ Kprobes returns control to the original instruction path by setting
the CPU's instruction pointer to the copied code in the detour buffer
-- thus at least avoiding the single-step.
1.4.5 Optimization
Optimization
^^^^^^^^^^^^
The Kprobe-optimizer doesn't insert the jump instruction immediately;
rather, it calls synchronize_sched() for safety first, because it's
possible for a CPU to be interrupted in the middle of executing the
optimized region(*). As you know, synchronize_sched() can ensure
optimized region [3]_. As you know, synchronize_sched() can ensure
that all interruptions that were active when synchronize_sched()
was called are done, but only if CONFIG_PREEMPT=n. So, this version
of kprobe optimization supports only kernels with CONFIG_PREEMPT=n.(**)
of kprobe optimization supports only kernels with CONFIG_PREEMPT=n [4]_.
After that, the Kprobe-optimizer calls stop_machine() to replace
the optimized region with a jump instruction to the detour buffer,
using text_poke_smp().
1.4.6 Unoptimization
Unoptimization
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
When an optimized kprobe is unregistered, disabled, or blocked by
another kprobe, it will be unoptimized. If this happens before
@ -263,15 +286,15 @@ optimized list. If the optimization has been done, the jump is
replaced with the original code (except for an int3 breakpoint in
the first byte) by using text_poke_smp().
(*)Please imagine that the 2nd instruction is interrupted and then
the optimizer replaces the 2nd instruction with the jump *address*
while the interrupt handler is running. When the interrupt
returns to original address, there is no valid instruction,
and it causes an unexpected result.
.. [3] Please imagine that the 2nd instruction is interrupted and then
the optimizer replaces the 2nd instruction with the jump *address*
while the interrupt handler is running. When the interrupt
returns to original address, there is no valid instruction,
and it causes an unexpected result.
(**)This optimization-safety checking may be replaced with the
stop-machine method that ksplice uses for supporting a CONFIG_PREEMPT=y
kernel.
.. [4] This optimization-safety checking may be replaced with the
stop-machine method that ksplice uses for supporting a CONFIG_PREEMPT=y
kernel.
NOTE for geeks:
The jump optimization changes the kprobe's pre_handler behavior.
@ -280,11 +303,17 @@ path by changing regs->ip and returning 1. However, when the probe
is optimized, that modification is ignored. Thus, if you want to
tweak the kernel's execution path, you need to suppress optimization,
using one of the following techniques:
- Specify an empty function for the kprobe's post_handler or break_handler.
or
or
- Execute 'sysctl -w debug.kprobes_optimization=n'
1.5 Blacklist
.. _kprobes_blacklist:
Blacklist
---------
Kprobes can probe most of the kernel except itself. This means
that there are some functions where kprobes cannot probe. Probing
@ -297,7 +326,10 @@ to specify a blacklisted function.
Kprobes checks the given probe address against the blacklist and
rejects registering it, if the given address is in the blacklist.
2. Architectures Supported
.. _kprobes_archs_supported:
Architectures Supported
=======================
Kprobes, jprobes, and return probes are implemented on the following
architectures:
@ -312,7 +344,8 @@ architectures:
- mips
- s390
3. Configuring Kprobes
Configuring Kprobes
===================
When configuring the kernel using make menuconfig/xconfig/oldconfig,
ensure that CONFIG_KPROBES is set to "y". Under "General setup", look
@ -331,7 +364,8 @@ it useful to "Compile the kernel with debug info" (CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO),
so you can use "objdump -d -l vmlinux" to see the source-to-object
code mapping.
4. API Reference
API Reference
=============
The Kprobes API includes a "register" function and an "unregister"
function for each type of probe. The API also includes "register_*probes"
@ -340,10 +374,13 @@ Here are terse, mini-man-page specifications for these functions and
the associated probe handlers that you'll write. See the files in the
samples/kprobes/ sub-directory for examples.
4.1 register_kprobe
register_kprobe
---------------
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int register_kprobe(struct kprobe *kp);
::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int register_kprobe(struct kprobe *kp);
Sets a breakpoint at the address kp->addr. When the breakpoint is
hit, Kprobes calls kp->pre_handler. After the probed instruction
@ -354,61 +391,68 @@ kp->fault_handler. Any or all handlers can be NULL. If kp->flags
is set KPROBE_FLAG_DISABLED, that kp will be registered but disabled,
so, its handlers aren't hit until calling enable_kprobe(kp).
NOTE:
1. With the introduction of the "symbol_name" field to struct kprobe,
the probepoint address resolution will now be taken care of by the kernel.
The following will now work:
.. note::
1. With the introduction of the "symbol_name" field to struct kprobe,
the probepoint address resolution will now be taken care of by the kernel.
The following will now work::
kp.symbol_name = "symbol_name";
(64-bit powerpc intricacies such as function descriptors are handled
transparently)
(64-bit powerpc intricacies such as function descriptors are handled
transparently)
2. Use the "offset" field of struct kprobe if the offset into the symbol
to install a probepoint is known. This field is used to calculate the
probepoint.
2. Use the "offset" field of struct kprobe if the offset into the symbol
to install a probepoint is known. This field is used to calculate the
probepoint.
3. Specify either the kprobe "symbol_name" OR the "addr". If both are
specified, kprobe registration will fail with -EINVAL.
3. Specify either the kprobe "symbol_name" OR the "addr". If both are
specified, kprobe registration will fail with -EINVAL.
4. With CISC architectures (such as i386 and x86_64), the kprobes code
does not validate if the kprobe.addr is at an instruction boundary.
Use "offset" with caution.
4. With CISC architectures (such as i386 and x86_64), the kprobes code
does not validate if the kprobe.addr is at an instruction boundary.
Use "offset" with caution.
register_kprobe() returns 0 on success, or a negative errno otherwise.
User's pre-handler (kp->pre_handler):
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
#include <linux/ptrace.h>
int pre_handler(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs);
User's pre-handler (kp->pre_handler)::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
#include <linux/ptrace.h>
int pre_handler(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs);
Called with p pointing to the kprobe associated with the breakpoint,
and regs pointing to the struct containing the registers saved when
the breakpoint was hit. Return 0 here unless you're a Kprobes geek.
User's post-handler (kp->post_handler):
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
#include <linux/ptrace.h>
void post_handler(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs,
unsigned long flags);
User's post-handler (kp->post_handler)::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
#include <linux/ptrace.h>
void post_handler(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs,
unsigned long flags);
p and regs are as described for the pre_handler. flags always seems
to be zero.
User's fault-handler (kp->fault_handler):
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
#include <linux/ptrace.h>
int fault_handler(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs, int trapnr);
User's fault-handler (kp->fault_handler)::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
#include <linux/ptrace.h>
int fault_handler(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs, int trapnr);
p and regs are as described for the pre_handler. trapnr is the
architecture-specific trap number associated with the fault (e.g.,
on i386, 13 for a general protection fault or 14 for a page fault).
Returns 1 if it successfully handled the exception.
4.2 register_jprobe
register_jprobe
---------------
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int register_jprobe(struct jprobe *jp)
::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int register_jprobe(struct jprobe *jp)
Sets a breakpoint at the address jp->kp.addr, which must be the address
of the first instruction of a function. When the breakpoint is hit,
@ -423,10 +467,13 @@ declaration must match.
register_jprobe() returns 0 on success, or a negative errno otherwise.
4.3 register_kretprobe
register_kretprobe
------------------
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int register_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int register_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
Establishes a return probe for the function whose address is
rp->kp.addr. When that function returns, Kprobes calls rp->handler.
@ -436,14 +483,17 @@ register_kretprobe(); see "How Does a Return Probe Work?" for details.
register_kretprobe() returns 0 on success, or a negative errno
otherwise.
User's return-probe handler (rp->handler):
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
#include <linux/ptrace.h>
int kretprobe_handler(struct kretprobe_instance *ri, struct pt_regs *regs);
User's return-probe handler (rp->handler)::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
#include <linux/ptrace.h>
int kretprobe_handler(struct kretprobe_instance *ri,
struct pt_regs *regs);
regs is as described for kprobe.pre_handler. ri points to the
kretprobe_instance object, of which the following fields may be
of interest:
- ret_addr: the return address
- rp: points to the corresponding kretprobe object
- task: points to the corresponding task struct
@ -456,74 +506,94 @@ the architecture's ABI.
The handler's return value is currently ignored.
4.4 unregister_*probe
unregister_*probe
------------------
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
void unregister_kprobe(struct kprobe *kp);
void unregister_jprobe(struct jprobe *jp);
void unregister_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
void unregister_kprobe(struct kprobe *kp);
void unregister_jprobe(struct jprobe *jp);
void unregister_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
Removes the specified probe. The unregister function can be called
at any time after the probe has been registered.
NOTE:
If the functions find an incorrect probe (ex. an unregistered probe),
they clear the addr field of the probe.
.. note::
4.5 register_*probes
If the functions find an incorrect probe (ex. an unregistered probe),
they clear the addr field of the probe.
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int register_kprobes(struct kprobe **kps, int num);
int register_kretprobes(struct kretprobe **rps, int num);
int register_jprobes(struct jprobe **jps, int num);
register_*probes
----------------
::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int register_kprobes(struct kprobe **kps, int num);
int register_kretprobes(struct kretprobe **rps, int num);
int register_jprobes(struct jprobe **jps, int num);
Registers each of the num probes in the specified array. If any
error occurs during registration, all probes in the array, up to
the bad probe, are safely unregistered before the register_*probes
function returns.
- kps/rps/jps: an array of pointers to *probe data structures
- kps/rps/jps: an array of pointers to ``*probe`` data structures
- num: the number of the array entries.
NOTE:
You have to allocate(or define) an array of pointers and set all
of the array entries before using these functions.
.. note::
4.6 unregister_*probes
You have to allocate(or define) an array of pointers and set all
of the array entries before using these functions.
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
void unregister_kprobes(struct kprobe **kps, int num);
void unregister_kretprobes(struct kretprobe **rps, int num);
void unregister_jprobes(struct jprobe **jps, int num);
unregister_*probes
------------------
::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
void unregister_kprobes(struct kprobe **kps, int num);
void unregister_kretprobes(struct kretprobe **rps, int num);
void unregister_jprobes(struct jprobe **jps, int num);
Removes each of the num probes in the specified array at once.
NOTE:
If the functions find some incorrect probes (ex. unregistered
probes) in the specified array, they clear the addr field of those
incorrect probes. However, other probes in the array are
unregistered correctly.
.. note::
4.7 disable_*probe
If the functions find some incorrect probes (ex. unregistered
probes) in the specified array, they clear the addr field of those
incorrect probes. However, other probes in the array are
unregistered correctly.
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int disable_kprobe(struct kprobe *kp);
int disable_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
int disable_jprobe(struct jprobe *jp);
disable_*probe
--------------
Temporarily disables the specified *probe. You can enable it again by using
::
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int disable_kprobe(struct kprobe *kp);
int disable_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
int disable_jprobe(struct jprobe *jp);
Temporarily disables the specified ``*probe``. You can enable it again by using
enable_*probe(). You must specify the probe which has been registered.
4.8 enable_*probe
enable_*probe
-------------
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int enable_kprobe(struct kprobe *kp);
int enable_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
int enable_jprobe(struct jprobe *jp);
::
Enables *probe which has been disabled by disable_*probe(). You must specify
#include <linux/kprobes.h>
int enable_kprobe(struct kprobe *kp);
int enable_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
int enable_jprobe(struct jprobe *jp);
Enables ``*probe`` which has been disabled by disable_*probe(). You must specify
the probe which has been registered.
5. Kprobes Features and Limitations
Kprobes Features and Limitations
================================
Kprobes allows multiple probes at the same address. Currently,
however, there cannot be multiple jprobes on the same function at
@ -538,7 +608,7 @@ are discussed in this section.
The register_*probe functions will return -EINVAL if you attempt
to install a probe in the code that implements Kprobes (mostly
kernel/kprobes.c and arch/*/kernel/kprobes.c, but also functions such
kernel/kprobes.c and ``arch/*/kernel/kprobes.c``, but also functions such
as do_page_fault and notifier_call_chain).
If you install a probe in an inline-able function, Kprobes makes
@ -602,19 +672,21 @@ explain it, we introduce some terminology. Imagine a 3-instruction
sequence consisting of a two 2-byte instructions and one 3-byte
instruction.
IA
|
[-2][-1][0][1][2][3][4][5][6][7]
[ins1][ins2][ ins3 ]
[<- DCR ->]
[<- JTPR ->]
::
ins1: 1st Instruction
ins2: 2nd Instruction
ins3: 3rd Instruction
IA: Insertion Address
JTPR: Jump Target Prohibition Region
DCR: Detoured Code Region
IA
|
[-2][-1][0][1][2][3][4][5][6][7]
[ins1][ins2][ ins3 ]
[<- DCR ->]
[<- JTPR ->]
ins1: 1st Instruction
ins2: 2nd Instruction
ins3: 3rd Instruction
IA: Insertion Address
JTPR: Jump Target Prohibition Region
DCR: Detoured Code Region
The instructions in DCR are copied to the out-of-line buffer
of the kprobe, because the bytes in DCR are replaced by
@ -628,7 +700,8 @@ d) DCR must not straddle the border between functions.
Anyway, these limitations are checked by the in-kernel instruction
decoder, so you don't need to worry about that.
6. Probe Overhead
Probe Overhead
==============
On a typical CPU in use in 2005, a kprobe hit takes 0.5 to 1.0
microseconds to process. Specifically, a benchmark that hits the same
@ -638,70 +711,80 @@ return-probe hit typically takes 50-75% longer than a kprobe hit.
When you have a return probe set on a function, adding a kprobe at
the entry to that function adds essentially no overhead.
Here are sample overhead figures (in usec) for different architectures.
k = kprobe; j = jprobe; r = return probe; kr = kprobe + return probe
on same function; jr = jprobe + return probe on same function
Here are sample overhead figures (in usec) for different architectures::
i386: Intel Pentium M, 1495 MHz, 2957.31 bogomips
k = 0.57 usec; j = 1.00; r = 0.92; kr = 0.99; jr = 1.40
k = kprobe; j = jprobe; r = return probe; kr = kprobe + return probe
on same function; jr = jprobe + return probe on same function::
x86_64: AMD Opteron 246, 1994 MHz, 3971.48 bogomips
k = 0.49 usec; j = 0.76; r = 0.80; kr = 0.82; jr = 1.07
i386: Intel Pentium M, 1495 MHz, 2957.31 bogomips
k = 0.57 usec; j = 1.00; r = 0.92; kr = 0.99; jr = 1.40
ppc64: POWER5 (gr), 1656 MHz (SMT disabled, 1 virtual CPU per physical CPU)
k = 0.77 usec; j = 1.31; r = 1.26; kr = 1.45; jr = 1.99
x86_64: AMD Opteron 246, 1994 MHz, 3971.48 bogomips
k = 0.49 usec; j = 0.76; r = 0.80; kr = 0.82; jr = 1.07
6.1 Optimized Probe Overhead
ppc64: POWER5 (gr), 1656 MHz (SMT disabled, 1 virtual CPU per physical CPU)
k = 0.77 usec; j = 1.31; r = 1.26; kr = 1.45; jr = 1.99
Optimized Probe Overhead
------------------------
Typically, an optimized kprobe hit takes 0.07 to 0.1 microseconds to
process. Here are sample overhead figures (in usec) for x86 architectures.
k = unoptimized kprobe, b = boosted (single-step skipped), o = optimized kprobe,
r = unoptimized kretprobe, rb = boosted kretprobe, ro = optimized kretprobe.
process. Here are sample overhead figures (in usec) for x86 architectures::
i386: Intel(R) Xeon(R) E5410, 2.33GHz, 4656.90 bogomips
k = 0.80 usec; b = 0.33; o = 0.05; r = 1.10; rb = 0.61; ro = 0.33
k = unoptimized kprobe, b = boosted (single-step skipped), o = optimized kprobe,
r = unoptimized kretprobe, rb = boosted kretprobe, ro = optimized kretprobe.
x86-64: Intel(R) Xeon(R) E5410, 2.33GHz, 4656.90 bogomips
k = 0.99 usec; b = 0.43; o = 0.06; r = 1.24; rb = 0.68; ro = 0.30
i386: Intel(R) Xeon(R) E5410, 2.33GHz, 4656.90 bogomips
k = 0.80 usec; b = 0.33; o = 0.05; r = 1.10; rb = 0.61; ro = 0.33
7. TODO
x86-64: Intel(R) Xeon(R) E5410, 2.33GHz, 4656.90 bogomips
k = 0.99 usec; b = 0.43; o = 0.06; r = 1.24; rb = 0.68; ro = 0.30
TODO
====
a. SystemTap (http://sourceware.org/systemtap): Provides a simplified
programming interface for probe-based instrumentation. Try it out.
programming interface for probe-based instrumentation. Try it out.
b. Kernel return probes for sparc64.
c. Support for other architectures.
d. User-space probes.
e. Watchpoint probes (which fire on data references).
8. Kprobes Example
Kprobes Example
===============
See samples/kprobes/kprobe_example.c
9. Jprobes Example
Jprobes Example
===============
See samples/kprobes/jprobe_example.c
10. Kretprobes Example
Kretprobes Example
==================
See samples/kprobes/kretprobe_example.c
For additional information on Kprobes, refer to the following URLs:
http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/library/l-kprobes.html?ca=dgr-lnxw42Kprobe
http://www.redhat.com/magazine/005mar05/features/kprobes/
http://www-users.cs.umn.edu/~boutcher/kprobes/
http://www.linuxsymposium.org/2006/linuxsymposium_procv2.pdf (pages 101-115)
- http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/library/l-kprobes.html?ca=dgr-lnxw42Kprobe
- http://www.redhat.com/magazine/005mar05/features/kprobes/
- http://www-users.cs.umn.edu/~boutcher/kprobes/
- http://www.linuxsymposium.org/2006/linuxsymposium_procv2.pdf (pages 101-115)
Appendix A: The kprobes debugfs interface
The kprobes debugfs interface
=============================
With recent kernels (> 2.6.20) the list of registered kprobes is visible
under the /sys/kernel/debug/kprobes/ directory (assuming debugfs is mounted at //sys/kernel/debug).
/sys/kernel/debug/kprobes/list: Lists all registered probes on the system
/sys/kernel/debug/kprobes/list: Lists all registered probes on the system::
c015d71a k vfs_read+0x0
c011a316 j do_fork+0x0
c03dedc5 r tcp_v4_rcv+0x0
c015d71a k vfs_read+0x0
c011a316 j do_fork+0x0
c03dedc5 r tcp_v4_rcv+0x0
The first column provides the kernel address where the probe is inserted.
The second column identifies the type of probe (k - kprobe, r - kretprobe
@ -725,17 +808,19 @@ change each probe's disabling state. This means that disabled kprobes (marked
[DISABLED]) will be not enabled if you turn ON all kprobes by this knob.
Appendix B: The kprobes sysctl interface
The kprobes sysctl interface
============================
/proc/sys/debug/kprobes-optimization: Turn kprobes optimization ON/OFF.
When CONFIG_OPTPROBES=y, this sysctl interface appears and it provides
a knob to globally and forcibly turn jump optimization (see section
1.4) ON or OFF. By default, jump optimization is allowed (ON).
If you echo "0" to this file or set "debug.kprobes_optimization" to
0 via sysctl, all optimized probes will be unoptimized, and any new
probes registered after that will not be optimized. Note that this
knob *changes* the optimized state. This means that optimized probes
(marked [OPTIMIZED]) will be unoptimized ([OPTIMIZED] tag will be
:ref:`kprobes_jump_optimization`) ON or OFF. By default, jump optimization
is allowed (ON). If you echo "0" to this file or set
"debug.kprobes_optimization" to 0 via sysctl, all optimized probes will be
unoptimized, and any new probes registered after that will not be optimized.
Note that this knob *changes* the optimized state. This means that optimized
probes (marked [OPTIMIZED]) will be unoptimized ([OPTIMIZED] tag will be
removed). If the knob is turned on, they will be optimized again.

285
Documentation/kref.txt
View File

@ -1,24 +1,42 @@
===================================================
Adding reference counters (krefs) to kernel objects
===================================================
:Author: Corey Minyard <minyard@acm.org>
:Author: Thomas Hellstrom <thellstrom@vmware.com>
A lot of this was lifted from Greg Kroah-Hartman's 2004 OLS paper and
presentation on krefs, which can be found at:
- http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2004_kref_paper/Reprint-Kroah-Hartman-OLS2004.pdf
- http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2004_kref_talk/
Introduction
============
krefs allow you to add reference counters to your objects. If you
have objects that are used in multiple places and passed around, and
you don't have refcounts, your code is almost certainly broken. If
you want refcounts, krefs are the way to go.
To use a kref, add one to your data structures like:
To use a kref, add one to your data structures like::
struct my_data
{
struct my_data
{
.
.
struct kref refcount;
.
.
};
};
The kref can occur anywhere within the data structure.
Initialization
==============
You must initialize the kref after you allocate it. To do this, call
kref_init as so:
kref_init as so::
struct my_data *data;
@ -29,18 +47,25 @@ kref_init as so:
This sets the refcount in the kref to 1.
Kref rules
==========
Once you have an initialized kref, you must follow the following
rules:
1) If you make a non-temporary copy of a pointer, especially if
it can be passed to another thread of execution, you must
increment the refcount with kref_get() before passing it off:
increment the refcount with kref_get() before passing it off::
kref_get(&data->refcount);
If you already have a valid pointer to a kref-ed structure (the
refcount cannot go to zero) you may do this without a lock.
2) When you are done with a pointer, you must call kref_put():
2) When you are done with a pointer, you must call kref_put()::
kref_put(&data->refcount, data_release);
If this is the last reference to the pointer, the release
routine will be called. If the code never tries to get
a valid pointer to a kref-ed structure without already
@ -53,25 +78,25 @@ rules:
structure must remain valid during the kref_get().
For example, if you allocate some data and then pass it to another
thread to process:
thread to process::
void data_release(struct kref *ref)
{
void data_release(struct kref *ref)
{
struct my_data *data = container_of(ref, struct my_data, refcount);
kfree(data);
}
}
void more_data_handling(void *cb_data)
{
void more_data_handling(void *cb_data)
{
struct my_data *data = cb_data;
.
. do stuff with data here
.
kref_put(&data->refcount, data_release);
}
}
int my_data_handler(void)
{
int my_data_handler(void)
{
int rv = 0;
struct my_data *data;
struct task_struct *task;
@ -91,10 +116,10 @@ int my_data_handler(void)
.
. do stuff with data here
.
out:
out:
kref_put(&data->refcount, data_release);
return rv;
}
}
This way, it doesn't matter what order the two threads handle the
data, the kref_put() handles knowing when the data is not referenced
@ -104,7 +129,7 @@ put needs no lock because nothing tries to get the data without
already holding a pointer.
Note that the "before" in rule 1 is very important. You should never
do something like:
do something like::
task = kthread_run(more_data_handling, data, "more_data_handling");
if (task == ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM)) {
@ -124,14 +149,14 @@ bad style. Don't do it.
There are some situations where you can optimize the gets and puts.
For instance, if you are done with an object and enqueuing it for
something else or passing it off to something else, there is no reason
to do a get then a put:
to do a get then a put::
/* Silly extra get and put */
kref_get(&obj->ref);
enqueue(obj);
kref_put(&obj->ref, obj_cleanup);
Just do the enqueue. A comment about this is always welcome:
Just do the enqueue. A comment about this is always welcome::
enqueue(obj);
/* We are done with obj, so we pass our refcount off
@ -142,109 +167,99 @@ instance, you have a list of items that are each kref-ed, and you wish
to get the first one. You can't just pull the first item off the list
and kref_get() it. That violates rule 3 because you are not already
holding a valid pointer. You must add a mutex (or some other lock).
For instance:
For instance::
static DEFINE_MUTEX(mutex);
static LIST_HEAD(q);
struct my_data
{
struct kref refcount;
struct list_head link;
};
static DEFINE_MUTEX(mutex);
static LIST_HEAD(q);
struct my_data
{
struct kref refcount;
struct list_head link;
};
static struct my_data *get_entry()
{
struct my_data *entry = NULL;
mutex_lock(&mutex);
if (!list_empty(&q)) {
entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link);
kref_get(&entry->refcount);
static struct my_data *get_entry()
{
struct my_data *entry = NULL;
mutex_lock(&mutex);
if (!list_empty(&q)) {
entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link);
kref_get(&entry->refcount);
}
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
return entry;
}
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
return entry;
}
static void release_entry(struct kref *ref)
{
struct my_data *entry = container_of(ref, struct my_data, refcount);
static void release_entry(struct kref *ref)
{
struct my_data *entry = container_of(ref, struct my_data, refcount);
list_del(&entry->link);
kfree(entry);
}
list_del(&entry->link);
kfree(entry);
}
static void put_entry(struct my_data *entry)
{
mutex_lock(&mutex);
kref_put(&entry->refcount, release_entry);
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
}
static void put_entry(struct my_data *entry)
{
mutex_lock(&mutex);
kref_put(&entry->refcount, release_entry);
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
}
The kref_put() return value is useful if you do not want to hold the
lock during the whole release operation. Say you didn't want to call
kfree() with the lock held in the example above (since it is kind of
pointless to do so). You could use kref_put() as follows:
pointless to do so). You could use kref_put() as follows::
static void release_entry(struct kref *ref)
{
/* All work is done after the return from kref_put(). */
}
static void release_entry(struct kref *ref)
{
/* All work is done after the return from kref_put(). */
}
static void put_entry(struct my_data *entry)
{
mutex_lock(&mutex);
if (kref_put(&entry->refcount, release_entry)) {
list_del(&entry->link);
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
kfree(entry);
} else
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
}
static void put_entry(struct my_data *entry)
{
mutex_lock(&mutex);
if (kref_put(&entry->refcount, release_entry)) {
list_del(&entry->link);
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
kfree(entry);
} else
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
}
This is really more useful if you have to call other routines as part
of the free operations that could take a long time or might claim the
same lock. Note that doing everything in the release routine is still
preferred as it is a little neater.
Corey Minyard <minyard@acm.org>
A lot of this was lifted from Greg Kroah-Hartman's 2004 OLS paper and
presentation on krefs, which can be found at:
http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2004_kref_paper/Reprint-Kroah-Hartman-OLS2004.pdf
and:
http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2004_kref_talk/
The above example could also be optimized using kref_get_unless_zero() in
the following way:
the following way::
static struct my_data *get_entry()
{
struct my_data *entry = NULL;
mutex_lock(&mutex);
if (!list_empty(&q)) {
entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link);
if (!kref_get_unless_zero(&entry->refcount))
entry = NULL;
static struct my_data *get_entry()
{
struct my_data *entry = NULL;
mutex_lock(&mutex);
if (!list_empty(&q)) {
entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link);
if (!kref_get_unless_zero(&entry->refcount))
entry = NULL;
}
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
return entry;
}
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
return entry;
}
static void release_entry(struct kref *ref)
{
struct my_data *entry = container_of(ref, struct my_data, refcount);
static void release_entry(struct kref *ref)
{
struct my_data *entry = container_of(ref, struct my_data, refcount);
mutex_lock(&mutex);
list_del(&entry->link);
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
kfree(entry);
}
mutex_lock(&mutex);
list_del(&entry->link);
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
kfree(entry);
}
static void put_entry(struct my_data *entry)
{
kref_put(&entry->refcount, release_entry);
}
static void put_entry(struct my_data *entry)
{
kref_put(&entry->refcount, release_entry);
}
Which is useful to remove the mutex lock around kref_put() in put_entry(), but
it's important that kref_get_unless_zero is enclosed in the same critical
@ -254,51 +269,51 @@ Note that it is illegal to use kref_get_unless_zero without checking its
return value. If you are sure (by already having a valid pointer) that
kref_get_unless_zero() will return true, then use kref_get() instead.
Krefs and RCU
=============
The function kref_get_unless_zero also makes it possible to use rcu
locking for lookups in the above example:
locking for lookups in the above example::
struct my_data
{
struct rcu_head rhead;
.
struct kref refcount;
.
.
};
struct my_data
{
struct rcu_head rhead;
.
struct kref refcount;
.
.
};
static struct my_data *get_entry_rcu()
{
struct my_data *entry = NULL;
rcu_read_lock();
if (!list_empty(&q)) {
entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link);
if (!kref_get_unless_zero(&entry->refcount))
entry = NULL;
static struct my_data *get_entry_rcu()
{
struct my_data *entry = NULL;
rcu_read_lock();
if (!list_empty(&q)) {
entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link);
if (!kref_get_unless_zero(&entry->refcount))
entry = NULL;
}
rcu_read_unlock();
return entry;
}
rcu_read_unlock();
return entry;
}
static void release_entry_rcu(struct kref *ref)
{
struct my_data *entry = container_of(ref, struct my_data, refcount);
static void release_entry_rcu(struct kref *ref)
{
struct my_data *entry = container_of(ref, struct my_data, refcount);
mutex_lock(&mutex);
list_del_rcu(&entry->link);
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
kfree_rcu(entry, rhead);
}
mutex_lock(&mutex);
list_del_rcu(&entry->link);
mutex_unlock(&mutex);
kfree_rcu(entry, rhead);
}
static void put_entry(struct my_data *entry)
{
kref_put(&entry->refcount, release_entry_rcu);
}
static void put_entry(struct my_data *entry)
{
kref_put(&entry->refcount, release_entry_rcu);
}
But note that the struct kref member needs to remain in valid memory for a
rcu grace period after release_entry_rcu was called. That can be accomplished
by using kfree_rcu(entry, rhead) as done above, or by calling synchronize_rcu()
before using kfree, but note that synchronize_rcu() may sleep for a
substantial amount of time.
Thomas Hellstrom <thellstrom@vmware.com>

54
Documentation/ldm.txt
View File

@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
==========================================
LDM - Logical Disk Manager (Dynamic Disks)
==========================================
LDM - Logical Disk Manager (Dynamic Disks)
------------------------------------------
Originally Written by FlatCap - Richard Russon <ldm@flatcap.org>.
Last Updated by Anton Altaparmakov on 30 March 2007 for Windows Vista.
:Author: Originally Written by FlatCap - Richard Russon <ldm@flatcap.org>.
:Last Updated: Anton Altaparmakov on 30 March 2007 for Windows Vista.
Overview
--------
@ -37,24 +37,36 @@ Example
-------
Below we have a 50MiB disk, divided into seven partitions.
N.B. The missing 1MiB at the end of the disk is where the LDM database is
stored.
Device | Offset Bytes Sectors MiB | Size Bytes Sectors MiB
-------+----------------------------+---------------------------
hda | 0 0 0 | 52428800 102400 50
hda1 | 51380224 100352 49 | 1048576 2048 1
hda2 | 16384 32 0 | 6979584 13632 6
hda3 | 6995968 13664 6 | 10485760 20480 10
hda4 | 17481728 34144 16 | 4194304 8192 4
hda5 | 21676032 42336 20 | 5242880 10240 5
hda6 | 26918912 52576 25 | 10485760 20480 10
hda7 | 37404672 73056 35 | 13959168 27264 13
.. note::
The missing 1MiB at the end of the disk is where the LDM database is
stored.
+-------++--------------+---------+-----++--------------+---------+----+
|Device || Offset Bytes | Sectors | MiB || Size Bytes | Sectors | MiB|
+=======++==============+=========+=====++==============+=========+====+
|hda || 0 | 0 | 0 || 52428800 | 102400 | 50|
+-------++--------------+---------+-----++--------------+---------+----+
|hda1 || 51380224 | 100352 | 49 || 1048576 | 2048 | 1|
+-------++--------------+---------+-----++--------------+---------+----+
|hda2 || 16384 | 32 | 0 || 6979584 | 13632 | 6|
+-------++--------------+---------+-----++--------------+---------+----+
|hda3 || 6995968 | 13664 | 6 || 10485760 | 20480 | 10|
+-------++--------------+---------+-----++--------------+---------+----+
|hda4 || 17481728 | 34144 | 16 || 4194304 | 8192 | 4|
+-------++--------------+---------+-----++--------------+---------+----+
|hda5 || 21676032 | 42336 | 20 || 5242880 | 10240 | 5|
+-------++--------------+---------+-----++--------------+---------+----+
|hda6 || 26918912 | 52576 | 25 || 10485760 | 20480 | 10|
+-------++--------------+---------+-----++--------------+---------+----+
|hda7 || 37404672 | 73056 | 35 || 13959168 | 27264 | 13|
+-------++--------------+---------+-----++--------------+---------+----+
The LDM Database may not store the partitions in the order that they appear on
disk, but the driver will sort them.
When Linux boots, you will see something like:
When Linux boots, you will see something like::
hda: 102400 sectors w/32KiB Cache, CHS=50/64/32
hda: [LDM] hda1 hda2 hda3 hda4 hda5 hda6 hda7
@ -65,13 +77,13 @@ Compiling LDM Support
To enable LDM, choose the following two options:
"Advanced partition selection" CONFIG_PARTITION_ADVANCED
"Windows Logical Disk Manager (Dynamic Disk) support" CONFIG_LDM_PARTITION
- "Advanced partition selection" CONFIG_PARTITION_ADVANCED
- "Windows Logical Disk Manager (Dynamic Disk) support" CONFIG_LDM_PARTITION
If you believe the driver isn't working as it should, you can enable the extra
debugging code. This will produce a LOT of output. The option is:
"Windows LDM extra logging" CONFIG_LDM_DEBUG
- "Windows LDM extra logging" CONFIG_LDM_DEBUG
N.B. The partition code cannot be compiled as a module.

3
Documentation/lockup-watchdogs.txt
View File

@ -30,7 +30,8 @@ timeout is set through the confusingly named "kernel.panic" sysctl),
to cause the system to reboot automatically after a specified amount
of time.
=== Implementation ===
Implementation
==============
The soft and hard lockup detectors are built on top of the hrtimer and
perf subsystems, respectively. A direct consequence of this is that,

27
Documentation/lzo.txt
View File

@ -1,8 +1,9 @@
===========================================================
LZO stream format as understood by Linux's LZO decompressor
===========================================================
Introduction
============
This is not a specification. No specification seems to be publicly available
for the LZO stream format. This document describes what input format the LZO
@ -14,12 +15,13 @@ Introduction
for future bug reports.
Description
===========
The stream is composed of a series of instructions, operands, and data. The
instructions consist in a few bits representing an opcode, and bits forming
the operands for the instruction, whose size and position depend on the
opcode and on the number of literals copied by previous instruction. The
operands are used to indicate :
operands are used to indicate:
- a distance when copying data from the dictionary (past output buffer)
- a length (number of bytes to copy from dictionary)
@ -38,7 +40,7 @@ Description
of bits in the operand. If the number of bits isn't enough to represent the
length, up to 255 may be added in increments by consuming more bytes with a
rate of at most 255 per extra byte (thus the compression ratio cannot exceed
around 255:1). The variable length encoding using #bits is always the same :
around 255:1). The variable length encoding using #bits is always the same::
length = byte & ((1 << #bits) - 1)
if (!length) {
@ -67,15 +69,19 @@ Description
instruction may encode this distance (0001HLLL), it takes one LE16 operand
for the distance, thus requiring 3 bytes.
IMPORTANT NOTE : in the code some length checks are missing because certain
instructions are called under the assumption that a certain number of bytes
follow because it has already been guaranteed before parsing the instructions.
They just have to "refill" this credit if they consume extra bytes. This is
an implementation design choice independent on the algorithm or encoding.
.. important::
In the code some length checks are missing because certain instructions
are called under the assumption that a certain number of bytes follow
because it has already been guaranteed before parsing the instructions.
They just have to "refill" this credit if they consume extra bytes. This
is an implementation design choice independent on the algorithm or
encoding.
Byte sequences
==============
First byte encoding :
First byte encoding::
0..17 : follow regular instruction encoding, see below. It is worth
noting that codes 16 and 17 will represent a block copy from
@ -91,7 +97,7 @@ Byte sequences
state = 4 [ don't copy extra literals ]
skip byte
Instruction encoding :
Instruction encoding::
0 0 0 0 X X X X (0..15)
Depends on the number of literals copied by the last instruction.
@ -156,6 +162,7 @@ Byte sequences
distance = (H << 3) + D + 1
Authors
=======
This document was written by Willy Tarreau <w@1wt.eu> on 2014/07/19 during an
analysis of the decompression code available in Linux 3.16-rc5. The code is

165
Documentation/mailbox.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
The Common Mailbox Framework
Jassi Brar <jaswinder.singh@linaro.org>
============================
The Common Mailbox Framework
============================
This document aims to help developers write client and controller
:Author: Jassi Brar <jaswinder.singh@linaro.org>
This document aims to help developers write client and controller
drivers for the API. But before we start, let us note that the
client (especially) and controller drivers are likely going to be
very platform specific because the remote firmware is likely to be
@ -13,14 +16,17 @@ similar copies of code written for each platform. Having said that,
nothing prevents the remote f/w to also be Linux based and use the
same api there. However none of that helps us locally because we only
ever deal at client's protocol level.
Some of the choices made during implementation are the result of this
Some of the choices made during implementation are the result of this
peculiarity of this "common" framework.
Part 1 - Controller Driver (See include/linux/mailbox_controller.h)
Controller Driver (See include/linux/mailbox_controller.h)
==========================================================
Allocate mbox_controller and the array of mbox_chan.
Allocate mbox_controller and the array of mbox_chan.
Populate mbox_chan_ops, except peek_data() all are mandatory.
The controller driver might know a message has been consumed
by the remote by getting an IRQ or polling some hardware flag
@ -30,91 +36,94 @@ the controller driver should set via 'txdone_irq' or 'txdone_poll'
or neither.
Part 2 - Client Driver (See include/linux/mailbox_client.h)
Client Driver (See include/linux/mailbox_client.h)
==================================================
The client might want to operate in blocking mode (synchronously
The client might want to operate in blocking mode (synchronously
send a message through before returning) or non-blocking/async mode (submit
a message and a callback function to the API and return immediately).
::
struct demo_client {
struct mbox_client cl;
struct mbox_chan *mbox;
struct completion c;
bool async;
/* ... */
};
struct demo_client {
struct mbox_client cl;
struct mbox_chan *mbox;
struct completion c;
bool async;
/* ... */
};
/*
* This is the handler for data received from remote. The behaviour is purely
* dependent upon the protocol. This is just an example.
*/
static void message_from_remote(struct mbox_client *cl, void *mssg)
{
struct demo_client *dc = container_of(cl, struct demo_client, cl);
if (dc->async) {
if (is_an_ack(mssg)) {
/* An ACK to our last sample sent */
return; /* Or do something else here */
} else { /* A new message from remote */
queue_req(mssg);
/*
* This is the handler for data received from remote. The behaviour is purely
* dependent upon the protocol. This is just an example.
*/
static void message_from_remote(struct mbox_client *cl, void *mssg)
{
struct demo_client *dc = container_of(cl, struct demo_client, cl);
if (dc->async) {
if (is_an_ack(mssg)) {
/* An ACK to our last sample sent */
return; /* Or do something else here */
} else { /* A new message from remote */
queue_req(mssg);
}
} else {
/* Remote f/w sends only ACK packets on this channel */
return;
}
} else {
/* Remote f/w sends only ACK packets on this channel */
return;
}
}
static void sample_sent(struct mbox_client *cl, void *mssg, int r)
{
struct demo_client *dc = container_of(cl, struct demo_client, cl);
complete(&dc->c);
}
static void sample_sent(struct mbox_client *cl, void *mssg, int r)
{
struct demo_client *dc = container_of(cl, struct demo_client, cl);
complete(&dc->c);
}
static void client_demo(struct platform_device *pdev)
{
struct demo_client *dc_sync, *dc_async;
/* The controller already knows async_pkt and sync_pkt */
struct async_pkt ap;
struct sync_pkt sp;
static void client_demo(struct platform_device *pdev)
{
struct demo_client *dc_sync, *dc_async;
/* The controller already knows async_pkt and sync_pkt */
struct async_pkt ap;
struct sync_pkt sp;
dc_sync = kzalloc(sizeof(*dc_sync), GFP_KERNEL);
dc_async = kzalloc(sizeof(*dc_async), GFP_KERNEL);
dc_sync = kzalloc(sizeof(*dc_sync), GFP_KERNEL);
dc_async = kzalloc(sizeof(*dc_async), GFP_KERNEL);
/* Populate non-blocking mode client */
dc_async->cl.dev = &pdev->dev;
dc_async->cl.rx_callback = message_from_remote;
dc_async->cl.tx_done = sample_sent;
dc_async->cl.tx_block = false;
dc_async->cl.tx_tout = 0; /* doesn't matter here */
dc_async->cl.knows_txdone = false; /* depending upon protocol */
dc_async->async = true;
init_completion(&dc_async->c);
/* Populate non-blocking mode client */
dc_async->cl.dev = &pdev->dev;
dc_async->cl.rx_callback = message_from_remote;
dc_async->cl.tx_done = sample_sent;
dc_async->cl.tx_block = false;
dc_async->cl.tx_tout = 0; /* doesn't matter here */
dc_async->cl.knows_txdone = false; /* depending upon protocol */
dc_async->async = true;
init_completion(&dc_async->c);
/* Populate blocking mode client */
dc_sync->cl.dev = &pdev->dev;
dc_sync->cl.rx_callback = message_from_remote;
dc_sync->cl.tx_done = NULL; /* operate in blocking mode */
dc_sync->cl.tx_block = true;
dc_sync->cl.tx_tout = 500; /* by half a second */
dc_sync->cl.knows_txdone = false; /* depending upon protocol */
dc_sync->async = false;
/* Populate blocking mode client */
dc_sync->cl.dev = &pdev->dev;
dc_sync->cl.rx_callback = message_from_remote;
dc_sync->cl.tx_done = NULL; /* operate in blocking mode */
dc_sync->cl.tx_block = true;
dc_sync->cl.tx_tout = 500; /* by half a second */
dc_sync->cl.knows_txdone = false; /* depending upon protocol */
dc_sync->async = false;
/* ASync mailbox is listed second in 'mboxes' property */
dc_async->mbox = mbox_request_channel(&dc_async->cl, 1);
/* Populate data packet */
/* ap.xxx = 123; etc */
/* Send async message to remote */
mbox_send_message(dc_async->mbox, &ap);
/* ASync mailbox is listed second in 'mboxes' property */
dc_async->mbox = mbox_request_channel(&dc_async->cl, 1);
/* Populate data packet */
/* ap.xxx = 123; etc */
/* Send async message to remote */
mbox_send_message(dc_async->mbox, &ap);
/* Sync mailbox is listed first in 'mboxes' property */
dc_sync->mbox = mbox_request_channel(&dc_sync->cl, 0);
/* Populate data packet */
/* sp.abc = 123; etc */
/* Send message to remote in blocking mode */
mbox_send_message(dc_sync->mbox, &sp);
/* At this point 'sp' has been sent */
/* Sync mailbox is listed first in 'mboxes' property */
dc_sync->mbox = mbox_request_channel(&dc_sync->cl, 0);
/* Populate data packet */
/* sp.abc = 123; etc */
/* Send message to remote in blocking mode */
mbox_send_message(dc_sync->mbox, &sp);
/* At this point 'sp' has been sent */
/* Now wait for async chan to be done */
wait_for_completion(&dc_async->c);
}
/* Now wait for async chan to be done */
wait_for_completion(&dc_async->c);
}

6
Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
View File

@ -1876,8 +1876,8 @@ There are some more advanced barrier functions:
This makes sure that the death mark on the object is perceived to be set
*before* the reference counter is decremented.
See Documentation/atomic_ops.txt for more information. See the "Atomic
operations" subsection for information on where to use these.
See Documentation/core-api/atomic_ops.rst for more information. See the
"Atomic operations" subsection for information on where to use these.
(*) lockless_dereference();
@ -2584,7 +2584,7 @@ situations because on some CPUs the atomic instructions used imply full memory
barriers, and so barrier instructions are superfluous in conjunction with them,
and in such cases the special barrier primitives will be no-ops.
See Documentation/atomic_ops.txt for more information.
See Documentation/core-api/atomic_ops.rst for more information.
ACCESSING DEVICES

349
Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt
View File

@ -2,43 +2,48 @@
Memory Hotplug
==============
Created: Jul 28 2007
Add description of notifier of memory hotplug Oct 11 2007
:Created: Jul 28 2007
:Updated: Add description of notifier of memory hotplug: Oct 11 2007
This document is about memory hotplug including how-to-use and current status.
Because Memory Hotplug is still under development, contents of this text will
be changed often.
1. Introduction
1.1 purpose of memory hotplug
1.2. Phases of memory hotplug
1.3. Unit of Memory online/offline operation
2. Kernel Configuration
3. sysfs files for memory hotplug
4. Physical memory hot-add phase
4.1 Hardware(Firmware) Support
4.2 Notify memory hot-add event by hand
5. Logical Memory hot-add phase
5.1. State of memory
5.2. How to online memory
6. Logical memory remove
6.1 Memory offline and ZONE_MOVABLE
6.2. How to offline memory
7. Physical memory remove
8. Memory hotplug event notifier
9. Future Work List
.. CONTENTS
Note(1): x86_64's has special implementation for memory hotplug.
This text does not describe it.
Note(2): This text assumes that sysfs is mounted at /sys.
1. Introduction
1.1 purpose of memory hotplug
1.2. Phases of memory hotplug
1.3. Unit of Memory online/offline operation
2. Kernel Configuration
3. sysfs files for memory hotplug
4. Physical memory hot-add phase
4.1 Hardware(Firmware) Support
4.2 Notify memory hot-add event by hand
5. Logical Memory hot-add phase
5.1. State of memory
5.2. How to online memory
6. Logical memory remove
6.1 Memory offline and ZONE_MOVABLE
6.2. How to offline memory
7. Physical memory remove
8. Memory hotplug event notifier
9. Future Work List
---------------
1. Introduction
---------------
.. note::
(1) x86_64's has special implementation for memory hotplug.
This text does not describe it.
(2) This text assumes that sysfs is mounted at /sys.
Introduction
============
purpose of memory hotplug
-------------------------
1.1 purpose of memory hotplug
------------
Memory Hotplug allows users to increase/decrease the amount of memory.
Generally, there are two purposes.
@ -53,9 +58,11 @@ hardware which supports memory power management.
Linux memory hotplug is designed for both purpose.
1.2. Phases of memory hotplug
---------------
There are 2 phases in Memory Hotplug.
Phases of memory hotplug
------------------------
There are 2 phases in Memory Hotplug:
1) Physical Memory Hotplug phase
2) Logical Memory Hotplug phase.
@ -70,7 +77,7 @@ management tables, and makes sysfs files for new memory's operation.
If firmware supports notification of connection of new memory to OS,
this phase is triggered automatically. ACPI can notify this event. If not,
"probe" operation by system administration is used instead.
(see Section 4.).
(see :ref:`memory_hotplug_physical_mem`).
Logical Memory Hotplug phase is to change memory state into
available/unavailable for users. Amount of memory from user's view is
@ -83,11 +90,12 @@ Logical Memory Hotplug phase is triggered by write of sysfs file by system
administrator. For the hot-add case, it must be executed after Physical Hotplug
phase by hand.
(However, if you writes udev's hotplug scripts for memory hotplug, these
phases can be execute in seamless way.)
phases can be execute in seamless way.)
1.3. Unit of Memory online/offline operation
------------
Unit of Memory online/offline operation
---------------------------------------
Memory hotplug uses SPARSEMEM memory model which allows memory to be divided
into chunks of the same size. These chunks are called "sections". The size of
a memory section is architecture dependent. For example, power uses 16MiB, ia64
@ -97,46 +105,50 @@ Memory sections are combined into chunks referred to as "memory blocks". The
size of a memory block is architecture dependent and represents the logical
unit upon which memory online/offline operations are to be performed. The
default size of a memory block is the same as memory section size unless an
architecture specifies otherwise. (see Section 3.)
architecture specifies otherwise. (see :ref:`memory_hotplug_sysfs_files`.)
To determine the size (in bytes) of a memory block please read this file:
/sys/devices/system/memory/block_size_bytes
-----------------------
2. Kernel Configuration
-----------------------
Kernel Configuration
====================
To use memory hotplug feature, kernel must be compiled with following
config options.
- For all memory hotplug
Memory model -> Sparse Memory (CONFIG_SPARSEMEM)
Allow for memory hot-add (CONFIG_MEMORY_HOTPLUG)
- For all memory hotplug:
- Memory model -> Sparse Memory (CONFIG_SPARSEMEM)
- Allow for memory hot-add (CONFIG_MEMORY_HOTPLUG)
- To enable memory removal, the following are also necessary
Allow for memory hot remove (CONFIG_MEMORY_HOTREMOVE)
Page Migration (CONFIG_MIGRATION)
- To enable memory removal, the following are also necessary:
- Allow for memory hot remove (CONFIG_MEMORY_HOTREMOVE)
- Page Migration (CONFIG_MIGRATION)
- For ACPI memory hotplug, the following are also necessary
Memory hotplug (under ACPI Support menu) (CONFIG_ACPI_HOTPLUG_MEMORY)
This option can be kernel module.
- For ACPI memory hotplug, the following are also necessary:
- Memory hotplug (under ACPI Support menu) (CONFIG_ACPI_HOTPLUG_MEMORY)
- This option can be kernel module.
- As a related configuration, if your box has a feature of NUMA-node hotplug
via ACPI, then this option is necessary too.
ACPI0004,PNP0A05 and PNP0A06 Container Driver (under ACPI Support menu)
(CONFIG_ACPI_CONTAINER).
This option can be kernel module too.
- ACPI0004,PNP0A05 and PNP0A06 Container Driver (under ACPI Support menu)
(CONFIG_ACPI_CONTAINER).
This option can be kernel module too.
--------------------------------
3 sysfs files for memory hotplug
--------------------------------
.. _memory_hotplug_sysfs_files:
sysfs files for memory hotplug
==============================
All memory blocks have their device information in sysfs. Each memory block
is described under /sys/devices/system/memory as
is described under /sys/devices/system/memory as:
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX
(XXX is the memory block id.)
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX
(XXX is the memory block id.)
For the memory block covered by the sysfs directory. It is expected that all
memory sections in this range are present and no memory holes exist in the
@ -145,43 +157,53 @@ the existence of one should not affect the hotplug capabilities of the memory
block.
For example, assume 1GiB memory block size. A device for a memory starting at
0x100000000 is /sys/device/system/memory/memory4
(0x100000000 / 1Gib = 4)
0x100000000 is /sys/device/system/memory/memory4::
(0x100000000 / 1Gib = 4)
This device covers address range [0x100000000 ... 0x140000000)
Under each memory block, you can see 5 files:
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_index
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_device
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/removable
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/valid_zones
- /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_index
- /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_device
- /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
- /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/removable
- /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/valid_zones
=================== ============================================================
``phys_index`` read-only and contains memory block id, same as XXX.
``state`` read-write
- at read: contains online/offline state of memory.
- at write: user can specify "online_kernel",
'phys_index' : read-only and contains memory block id, same as XXX.
'state' : read-write
at read: contains online/offline state of memory.
at write: user can specify "online_kernel",
"online_movable", "online", "offline" command
which will be performed on all sections in the block.
'phys_device' : read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory
``phys_device`` read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory
device. This is not well implemented now.
'removable' : read-only: contains an integer value indicating
``removable`` read-only: contains an integer value indicating
whether the memory block is removable or not
removable. A value of 1 indicates that the memory
block is removable and a value of 0 indicates that
it is not removable. A memory block is removable only if
every section in the block is removable.
'valid_zones' : read-only: designed to show which zones this memory block
``valid_zones`` read-only: designed to show which zones this memory block
can be onlined to.
The first column shows it's default zone.
The first column shows it`s default zone.
"memory6/valid_zones: Normal Movable" shows this memoryblock
can be onlined to ZONE_NORMAL by default and to ZONE_MOVABLE
by online_movable.
"memory7/valid_zones: Movable Normal" shows this memoryblock
can be onlined to ZONE_MOVABLE by default and to ZONE_NORMAL
by online_kernel.
=================== ============================================================
.. note::
NOTE:
These directories/files appear after physical memory hotplug phase.
If CONFIG_NUMA is enabled the memoryXXX/ directories can also be accessed
@ -193,13 +215,14 @@ For example:
A backlink will also be created:
/sys/devices/system/memory/memory9/node0 -> ../../node/node0
.. _memory_hotplug_physical_mem:
--------------------------------
4. Physical memory hot-add phase
--------------------------------
Physical memory hot-add phase
=============================
Hardware(Firmware) Support
--------------------------
4.1 Hardware(Firmware) Support
------------
On x86_64/ia64 platform, memory hotplug by ACPI is supported.
In general, the firmware (ACPI) which supports memory hotplug defines
@ -209,7 +232,8 @@ script. This will be done automatically.
But scripts for memory hotplug are not contained in generic udev package(now).
You may have to write it by yourself or online/offline memory by hand.
Please see "How to online memory", "How to offline memory" in this text.
Please see :ref:`memory_hotplug_how_to_online_memory` and
:ref:`memory_hotplug_how_to_offline_memory`.
If firmware supports NUMA-node hotplug, and defines an object _HID "ACPI0004",
"PNP0A05", or "PNP0A06", notification is asserted to it, and ACPI handler
@ -217,8 +241,9 @@ calls hotplug code for all of objects which are defined in it.
If memory device is found, memory hotplug code will be called.
4.2 Notify memory hot-add event by hand
------------
Notify memory hot-add event by hand
-----------------------------------
On some architectures, the firmware may not notify the kernel of a memory
hotplug event. Therefore, the memory "probe" interface is supported to
explicitly notify the kernel. This interface depends on
@ -229,45 +254,48 @@ notification.
Probe interface is located at
/sys/devices/system/memory/probe
You can tell the physical address of new memory to the kernel by
You can tell the physical address of new memory to the kernel by::
% echo start_address_of_new_memory > /sys/devices/system/memory/probe
% echo start_address_of_new_memory > /sys/devices/system/memory/probe
Then, [start_address_of_new_memory, start_address_of_new_memory +
memory_block_size] memory range is hot-added. In this case, hotplug script is
not called (in current implementation). You'll have to online memory by
yourself. Please see "How to online memory" in this text.
yourself. Please see :ref:`memory_hotplug_how_to_online_memory`.
------------------------------
5. Logical Memory hot-add phase
------------------------------
Logical Memory hot-add phase
============================
5.1. State of memory
------------
To see (online/offline) state of a memory block, read 'state' file.
State of memory
---------------
% cat /sys/device/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
To see (online/offline) state of a memory block, read 'state' file::
% cat /sys/device/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
If the memory block is online, you'll read "online".
If the memory block is offline, you'll read "offline".
- If the memory block is online, you'll read "online".
- If the memory block is offline, you'll read "offline".
5.2. How to online memory
------------
.. _memory_hotplug_how_to_online_memory:
How to online memory
--------------------
When the memory is hot-added, the kernel decides whether or not to "online"
it according to the policy which can be read from "auto_online_blocks" file:
it according to the policy which can be read from "auto_online_blocks" file::
% cat /sys/devices/system/memory/auto_online_blocks
% cat /sys/devices/system/memory/auto_online_blocks
The default depends on the CONFIG_MEMORY_HOTPLUG_DEFAULT_ONLINE kernel config
option. If it is disabled the default is "offline" which means the newly added
memory is not in a ready-to-use state and you have to "online" the newly added
memory blocks manually. Automatic onlining can be requested by writing "online"
to "auto_online_blocks" file:
to "auto_online_blocks" file::
% echo online > /sys/devices/system/memory/auto_online_blocks
% echo online > /sys/devices/system/memory/auto_online_blocks
This sets a global policy and impacts all memory blocks that will subsequently
be hotplugged. Currently offline blocks keep their state. It is possible, under
@ -277,24 +305,26 @@ online. User space tools can check their "state" files
If the automatic onlining wasn't requested, failed, or some memory block was
offlined it is possible to change the individual block's state by writing to the
"state" file:
"state" file::
% echo online > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
% echo online > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
This onlining will not change the ZONE type of the target memory block,
If the memory block doesn't belong to any zone an appropriate kernel zone
(usually ZONE_NORMAL) will be used unless movable_node kernel command line
option is specified when ZONE_MOVABLE will be used.
You can explicitly request to associate it with ZONE_MOVABLE by
You can explicitly request to associate it with ZONE_MOVABLE by::
% echo online_movable > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
(NOTE: current limit: this memory block must be adjacent to ZONE_MOVABLE)
% echo online_movable > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
Or you can explicitly request a kernel zone (usually ZONE_NORMAL) by:
.. note:: current limit: this memory block must be adjacent to ZONE_MOVABLE
% echo online_kernel > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
(NOTE: current limit: this memory block must be adjacent to ZONE_NORMAL)
Or you can explicitly request a kernel zone (usually ZONE_NORMAL) by::
% echo online_kernel > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
.. note:: current limit: this memory block must be adjacent to ZONE_NORMAL
An explicit zone onlining can fail (e.g. when the range is already within
and existing and incompatible zone already).
@ -306,12 +336,12 @@ This may be changed in future.
------------------------
6. Logical memory remove
------------------------
Logical memory remove
=====================
Memory offline and ZONE_MOVABLE
-------------------------------
6.1 Memory offline and ZONE_MOVABLE
------------
Memory offlining is more complicated than memory online. Because memory offline
has to make the whole memory block be unused, memory offline can fail if
the memory block includes memory which cannot be freed.
@ -336,24 +366,27 @@ Assume the system has "TOTAL" amount of memory at boot time, this boot option
creates ZONE_MOVABLE as following.
1) When kernelcore=YYYY boot option is used,
Size of memory not for movable pages (not for offline) is YYYY.
Size of memory for movable pages (for offline) is TOTAL-YYYY.
Size of memory not for movable pages (not for offline) is YYYY.
Size of memory for movable pages (for offline) is TOTAL-YYYY.
2) When movablecore=ZZZZ boot option is used,
Size of memory not for movable pages (not for offline) is TOTAL - ZZZZ.
Size of memory for movable pages (for offline) is ZZZZ.
Size of memory not for movable pages (not for offline) is TOTAL - ZZZZ.
Size of memory for movable pages (for offline) is ZZZZ.
.. note::
Note: Unfortunately, there is no information to show which memory block belongs
to ZONE_MOVABLE. This is TBD.
Unfortunately, there is no information to show which memory block belongs
to ZONE_MOVABLE. This is TBD.
.. _memory_hotplug_how_to_offline_memory:
How to offline memory
---------------------
6.2. How to offline memory
------------
You can offline a memory block by using the same sysfs interface that was used
in memory onlining.
in memory onlining::
% echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
% echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
If offline succeeds, the state of the memory block is changed to be "offline".
If it fails, some error core (like -EBUSY) will be returned by the kernel.
@ -367,22 +400,22 @@ able to offline it (or not). (For example, a page is referred to by some kernel
internal call and released soon.)
Consideration:
Memory hotplug's design direction is to make the possibility of memory offlining
higher and to guarantee unplugging memory under any situation. But it needs
more work. Returning -EBUSY under some situation may be good because the user
can decide to retry more or not by himself. Currently, memory offlining code
does some amount of retry with 120 seconds timeout.
Memory hotplug's design direction is to make the possibility of memory
offlining higher and to guarantee unplugging memory under any situation. But
it needs more work. Returning -EBUSY under some situation may be good because
the user can decide to retry more or not by himself. Currently, memory
offlining code does some amount of retry with 120 seconds timeout.
Physical memory remove
======================
-------------------------
7. Physical memory remove
-------------------------
Need more implementation yet....
- Notification completion of remove works by OS to firmware.
- Guard from remove if not yet.
--------------------------------
8. Memory hotplug event notifier
--------------------------------
Memory hotplug event notifier
=============================
Hotplugging events are sent to a notification queue.
There are six types of notification defined in include/linux/memory.h:
@ -412,14 +445,14 @@ MEM_CANCEL_OFFLINE
MEM_OFFLINE
Generated after offlining memory is complete.
A callback routine can be registered by calling
A callback routine can be registered by calling::
hotplug_memory_notifier(callback_func, priority)
Callback functions with higher values of priority are called before callback
functions with lower values.
A callback function must have the following prototype:
A callback function must have the following prototype::
int callback_func(
struct notifier_block *self, unsigned long action, void *arg);
@ -427,27 +460,28 @@ A callback function must have the following prototype:
The first argument of the callback function (self) is a pointer to the block
of the notifier chain that points to the callback function itself.
The second argument (action) is one of the event types described above.
The third argument (arg) passes a pointer of struct memory_notify.
The third argument (arg) passes a pointer of struct memory_notify::
struct memory_notify {
unsigned long start_pfn;
unsigned long nr_pages;
int status_change_nid_normal;
int status_change_nid_high;
int status_change_nid;
}
struct memory_notify {
unsigned long start_pfn;
unsigned long nr_pages;
int status_change_nid_normal;
int status_change_nid_high;
int status_change_nid;
}
start_pfn is start_pfn of online/offline memory.
nr_pages is # of pages of online/offline memory.
status_change_nid_normal is set node id when N_NORMAL_MEMORY of nodemask
is (will be) set/clear, if this is -1, then nodemask status is not changed.
status_change_nid_high is set node id when N_HIGH_MEMORY of nodemask
is (will be) set/clear, if this is -1, then nodemask status is not changed.
status_change_nid is set node id when N_MEMORY of nodemask is (will be)
set/clear. It means a new(memoryless) node gets new memory by online and a
node loses all memory. If this is -1, then nodemask status is not changed.
If status_changed_nid* >= 0, callback should create/discard structures for the
node if necessary.
- start_pfn is start_pfn of online/offline memory.
- nr_pages is # of pages of online/offline memory.
- status_change_nid_normal is set node id when N_NORMAL_MEMORY of nodemask
is (will be) set/clear, if this is -1, then nodemask status is not changed.
- status_change_nid_high is set node id when N_HIGH_MEMORY of nodemask
is (will be) set/clear, if this is -1, then nodemask status is not changed.
- status_change_nid is set node id when N_MEMORY of nodemask is (will be)
set/clear. It means a new(memoryless) node gets new memory by online and a
node loses all memory. If this is -1, then nodemask status is not changed.
If status_changed_nid* >= 0, callback should create/discard structures for the
node if necessary.
The callback routine shall return one of the values
NOTIFY_DONE, NOTIFY_OK, NOTIFY_BAD, NOTIFY_STOP
@ -461,9 +495,9 @@ further processing of the notification queue.
NOTIFY_STOP stops further processing of the notification queue.
--------------
9. Future Work
--------------
Future Work
===========
- allowing memory hot-add to ZONE_MOVABLE. maybe we need some switch like
sysctl or new control file.
- showing memory block and physical device relationship.
@ -471,4 +505,3 @@ NOTIFY_STOP stops further processing of the notification queue.
- support HugeTLB page migration and offlining.
- memmap removing at memory offline.
- physical remove memory.

298
Documentation/men-chameleon-bus.txt
View File

@ -1,163 +1,175 @@
MEN Chameleon Bus
=================
Table of Contents
=================
1 Introduction
1.1 Scope of this Document
1.2 Limitations of the current implementation
2 Architecture
2.1 MEN Chameleon Bus
2.2 Carrier Devices
2.3 Parser
3 Resource handling
3.1 Memory Resources
3.2 IRQs
4 Writing an MCB driver
4.1 The driver structure
4.2 Probing and attaching
4.3 Initializing the driver
MEN Chameleon Bus
=================
.. Table of Contents
=================
1 Introduction
1.1 Scope of this Document
1.2 Limitations of the current implementation
2 Architecture
2.1 MEN Chameleon Bus
2.2 Carrier Devices
2.3 Parser
3 Resource handling
3.1 Memory Resources
3.2 IRQs
4 Writing an MCB driver
4.1 The driver structure
4.2 Probing and attaching
4.3 Initializing the driver
1 Introduction
===============
This document describes the architecture and implementation of the MEN
Chameleon Bus (called MCB throughout this document).
Introduction
============
1.1 Scope of this Document
---------------------------
This document is intended to be a short overview of the current
implementation and does by no means describe the complete possibilities of MCB
based devices.
This document describes the architecture and implementation of the MEN
Chameleon Bus (called MCB throughout this document).
1.2 Limitations of the current implementation
----------------------------------------------
The current implementation is limited to PCI and PCIe based carrier devices
that only use a single memory resource and share the PCI legacy IRQ. Not
implemented are:
- Multi-resource MCB devices like the VME Controller or M-Module carrier.
- MCB devices that need another MCB device, like SRAM for a DMA Controller's
buffer descriptors or a video controller's video memory.
- A per-carrier IRQ domain for carrier devices that have one (or more) IRQs
per MCB device like PCIe based carriers with MSI or MSI-X support.
2 Architecture
===============
MCB is divided into 3 functional blocks:
- The MEN Chameleon Bus itself,
- drivers for MCB Carrier Devices and
- the parser for the Chameleon table.
2.1 MEN Chameleon Bus
Scope of this Document
----------------------
The MEN Chameleon Bus is an artificial bus system that attaches to a so
called Chameleon FPGA device found on some hardware produced my MEN Mikro
Elektronik GmbH. These devices are multi-function devices implemented in a
single FPGA and usually attached via some sort of PCI or PCIe link. Each
FPGA contains a header section describing the content of the FPGA. The
header lists the device id, PCI BAR, offset from the beginning of the PCI
BAR, size in the FPGA, interrupt number and some other properties currently
not handled by the MCB implementation.
2.2 Carrier Devices
This document is intended to be a short overview of the current
implementation and does by no means describe the complete possibilities of MCB
based devices.
Limitations of the current implementation
-----------------------------------------
The current implementation is limited to PCI and PCIe based carrier devices
that only use a single memory resource and share the PCI legacy IRQ. Not
implemented are:
- Multi-resource MCB devices like the VME Controller or M-Module carrier.
- MCB devices that need another MCB device, like SRAM for a DMA Controller's
buffer descriptors or a video controller's video memory.
- A per-carrier IRQ domain for carrier devices that have one (or more) IRQs
per MCB device like PCIe based carriers with MSI or MSI-X support.
Architecture
============
MCB is divided into 3 functional blocks:
- The MEN Chameleon Bus itself,
- drivers for MCB Carrier Devices and
- the parser for the Chameleon table.
MEN Chameleon Bus
-----------------
The MEN Chameleon Bus is an artificial bus system that attaches to a so
called Chameleon FPGA device found on some hardware produced my MEN Mikro
Elektronik GmbH. These devices are multi-function devices implemented in a
single FPGA and usually attached via some sort of PCI or PCIe link. Each
FPGA contains a header section describing the content of the FPGA. The
header lists the device id, PCI BAR, offset from the beginning of the PCI
BAR, size in the FPGA, interrupt number and some other properties currently
not handled by the MCB implementation.
Carrier Devices
---------------
A carrier device is just an abstraction for the real world physical bus the
Chameleon FPGA is attached to. Some IP Core drivers may need to interact with
properties of the carrier device (like querying the IRQ number of a PCI
device). To provide abstraction from the real hardware bus, an MCB carrier
device provides callback methods to translate the driver's MCB function calls
to hardware related function calls. For example a carrier device may
implement the get_irq() method which can be translated into a hardware bus
query for the IRQ number the device should use.
Parser
------
The parser reads the first 512 bytes of a Chameleon device and parses the
Chameleon table. Currently the parser only supports the Chameleon v2 variant
of the Chameleon table but can easily be adopted to support an older or
possible future variant. While parsing the table's entries new MCB devices
are allocated and their resources are assigned according to the resource
assignment in the Chameleon table. After resource assignment is finished, the
MCB devices are registered at the MCB and thus at the driver core of the
Linux kernel.
Resource handling
=================
The current implementation assigns exactly one memory and one IRQ resource
per MCB device. But this is likely going to change in the future.
Memory Resources
----------------
Each MCB device has exactly one memory resource, which can be requested from
the MCB bus. This memory resource is the physical address of the MCB device
inside the carrier and is intended to be passed to ioremap() and friends. It
is already requested from the kernel by calling request_mem_region().
IRQs
----
Each MCB device has exactly one IRQ resource, which can be requested from the
MCB bus. If a carrier device driver implements the ->get_irq() callback
method, the IRQ number assigned by the carrier device will be returned,
otherwise the IRQ number inside the Chameleon table will be returned. This
number is suitable to be passed to request_irq().
Writing an MCB driver
=====================
The driver structure
--------------------
A carrier device is just an abstraction for the real world physical bus the
Chameleon FPGA is attached to. Some IP Core drivers may need to interact with
properties of the carrier device (like querying the IRQ number of a PCI
device). To provide abstraction from the real hardware bus, an MCB carrier
device provides callback methods to translate the driver's MCB function calls
to hardware related function calls. For example a carrier device may
implement the get_irq() method which can be translated into a hardware bus
query for the IRQ number the device should use.
2.3 Parser
-----------
The parser reads the first 512 bytes of a Chameleon device and parses the
Chameleon table. Currently the parser only supports the Chameleon v2 variant
of the Chameleon table but can easily be adopted to support an older or
possible future variant. While parsing the table's entries new MCB devices
are allocated and their resources are assigned according to the resource
assignment in the Chameleon table. After resource assignment is finished, the
MCB devices are registered at the MCB and thus at the driver core of the
Linux kernel.
Each MCB driver has a structure to identify the device driver as well as
device ids which identify the IP Core inside the FPGA. The driver structure
also contains callback methods which get executed on driver probe and
removal from the system::
3 Resource handling
====================
The current implementation assigns exactly one memory and one IRQ resource
per MCB device. But this is likely going to change in the future.
static const struct mcb_device_id foo_ids[] = {
{ .device = 0x123 },
{ }
};
MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(mcb, foo_ids);
3.1 Memory Resources
static struct mcb_driver foo_driver = {
driver = {
.name = "foo-bar",
.owner = THIS_MODULE,
},
.probe = foo_probe,
.remove = foo_remove,
.id_table = foo_ids,
};
Probing and attaching
---------------------
Each MCB device has exactly one memory resource, which can be requested from
the MCB bus. This memory resource is the physical address of the MCB device
inside the carrier and is intended to be passed to ioremap() and friends. It
is already requested from the kernel by calling request_mem_region().
3.2 IRQs
---------
Each MCB device has exactly one IRQ resource, which can be requested from the
MCB bus. If a carrier device driver implements the ->get_irq() callback
method, the IRQ number assigned by the carrier device will be returned,
otherwise the IRQ number inside the Chameleon table will be returned. This
number is suitable to be passed to request_irq().
When a driver is loaded and the MCB devices it services are found, the MCB
core will call the driver's probe callback method. When the driver is removed
from the system, the MCB core will call the driver's remove callback method::
4 Writing an MCB driver
=======================
static init foo_probe(struct mcb_device *mdev, const struct mcb_device_id *id);
static void foo_remove(struct mcb_device *mdev);
4.1 The driver structure
-------------------------
Each MCB driver has a structure to identify the device driver as well as
device ids which identify the IP Core inside the FPGA. The driver structure
also contains callback methods which get executed on driver probe and
removal from the system.
Initializing the driver
-----------------------
When the kernel is booted or your foo driver module is inserted, you have to
perform driver initialization. Usually it is enough to register your driver
module at the MCB core::
static const struct mcb_device_id foo_ids[] = {
{ .device = 0x123 },
{ }
};
MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(mcb, foo_ids);
static int __init foo_init(void)
{
return mcb_register_driver(&foo_driver);
}
module_init(foo_init);
static struct mcb_driver foo_driver = {
driver = {
.name = "foo-bar",
.owner = THIS_MODULE,
},
.probe = foo_probe,
.remove = foo_remove,
.id_table = foo_ids,
};
static void __exit foo_exit(void)
{
mcb_unregister_driver(&foo_driver);
}
module_exit(foo_exit);
4.2 Probing and attaching
--------------------------
When a driver is loaded and the MCB devices it services are found, the MCB
core will call the driver's probe callback method. When the driver is removed
from the system, the MCB core will call the driver's remove callback method.
The module_mcb_driver() macro can be used to reduce the above code::
static init foo_probe(struct mcb_device *mdev, const struct mcb_device_id *id);
static void foo_remove(struct mcb_device *mdev);
4.3 Initializing the driver
----------------------------
When the kernel is booted or your foo driver module is inserted, you have to
perform driver initialization. Usually it is enough to register your driver
module at the MCB core.
static int __init foo_init(void)
{
return mcb_register_driver(&foo_driver);
}
module_init(foo_init);
static void __exit foo_exit(void)
{
mcb_unregister_driver(&foo_driver);
}
module_exit(foo_exit);
The module_mcb_driver() macro can be used to reduce the above code.
module_mcb_driver(foo_driver);
module_mcb_driver(foo_driver);

68
Documentation/nommu-mmap.txt
View File

@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
=============================
NO-MMU MEMORY MAPPING SUPPORT
=============================
=============================
No-MMU memory mapping support
=============================
The kernel has limited support for memory mapping under no-MMU conditions, such
as are used in uClinux environments. From the userspace point of view, memory
@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ the CLONE_VM flag.
The behaviour is similar between the MMU and no-MMU cases, but not identical;
and it's also much more restricted in the latter case:
(*) Anonymous mapping, MAP_PRIVATE
(#) Anonymous mapping, MAP_PRIVATE
In the MMU case: VM regions backed by arbitrary pages; copy-on-write
across fork.
@ -24,14 +24,14 @@ and it's also much more restricted in the latter case:
In the no-MMU case: VM regions backed by arbitrary contiguous runs of
pages.
(*) Anonymous mapping, MAP_SHARED
(#) Anonymous mapping, MAP_SHARED
These behave very much like private mappings, except that they're
shared across fork() or clone() without CLONE_VM in the MMU case. Since
the no-MMU case doesn't support these, behaviour is identical to
MAP_PRIVATE there.
(*) File, MAP_PRIVATE, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC, !PROT_WRITE
(#) File, MAP_PRIVATE, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC, !PROT_WRITE
In the MMU case: VM regions backed by pages read from file; changes to
the underlying file are reflected in the mapping; copied across fork.
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ and it's also much more restricted in the latter case:
are visible in other processes (no MMU protection), but should not
happen.
(*) File, MAP_PRIVATE, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC, PROT_WRITE
(#) File, MAP_PRIVATE, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC, PROT_WRITE
In the MMU case: like the non-PROT_WRITE case, except that the pages in
question get copied before the write actually happens. From that point
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ and it's also much more restricted in the latter case:
In the no-MMU case: works much like the non-PROT_WRITE case, except
that a copy is always taken and never shared.
(*) Regular file / blockdev, MAP_SHARED, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC / PROT_WRITE
(#) Regular file / blockdev, MAP_SHARED, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC / PROT_WRITE
In the MMU case: VM regions backed by pages read from file; changes to
pages written back to file; writes to file reflected into pages backing
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ and it's also much more restricted in the latter case:
In the no-MMU case: not supported.
(*) Memory backed regular file, MAP_SHARED, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC / PROT_WRITE
(#) Memory backed regular file, MAP_SHARED, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC / PROT_WRITE
In the MMU case: As for ordinary regular files.
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ and it's also much more restricted in the latter case:
as for the MMU case. If the filesystem does not provide any such
support, then the mapping request will be denied.
(*) Memory backed blockdev, MAP_SHARED, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC / PROT_WRITE
(#) Memory backed blockdev, MAP_SHARED, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC / PROT_WRITE
In the MMU case: As for ordinary regular files.
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ and it's also much more restricted in the latter case:
truncate being called. The ramdisk driver could do this if it allocated
all its memory as a contiguous array upfront.
(*) Memory backed chardev, MAP_SHARED, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC / PROT_WRITE
(#) Memory backed chardev, MAP_SHARED, PROT_READ / PROT_EXEC / PROT_WRITE
In the MMU case: As for ordinary regular files.
@ -105,21 +105,20 @@ and it's also much more restricted in the latter case:
provide any such support, then the mapping request will be denied.
============================
FURTHER NOTES ON NO-MMU MMAP
Further notes on no-MMU MMAP
============================
(*) A request for a private mapping of a file may return a buffer that is not
(#) A request for a private mapping of a file may return a buffer that is not
page-aligned. This is because XIP may take place, and the data may not be
paged aligned in the backing store.
(*) A request for an anonymous mapping will always be page aligned. If
(#) A request for an anonymous mapping will always be page aligned. If
possible the size of the request should be a power of two otherwise some
of the space may be wasted as the kernel must allocate a power-of-2
granule but will only discard the excess if appropriately configured as
this has an effect on fragmentation.
(*) The memory allocated by a request for an anonymous mapping will normally
(#) The memory allocated by a request for an anonymous mapping will normally
be cleared by the kernel before being returned in accordance with the
Linux man pages (ver 2.22 or later).
@ -145,24 +144,23 @@ FURTHER NOTES ON NO-MMU MMAP
uClibc uses this to speed up malloc(), and the ELF-FDPIC binfmt uses this
to allocate the brk and stack region.
(*) A list of all the private copy and anonymous mappings on the system is
(#) A list of all the private copy and anonymous mappings on the system is
visible through /proc/maps in no-MMU mode.
(*) A list of all the mappings in use by a process is visible through
(#) A list of all the mappings in use by a process is visible through
/proc/<pid>/maps in no-MMU mode.
(*) Supplying MAP_FIXED or a requesting a particular mapping address will
(#) Supplying MAP_FIXED or a requesting a particular mapping address will
result in an error.
(*) Files mapped privately usually have to have a read method provided by the
(#) Files mapped privately usually have to have a read method provided by the
driver or filesystem so that the contents can be read into the memory
allocated if mmap() chooses not to map the backing device directly. An
error will result if they don't. This is most likely to be encountered
with character device files, pipes, fifos and sockets.
==========================
INTERPROCESS SHARED MEMORY
Interprocess shared memory
==========================
Both SYSV IPC SHM shared memory and POSIX shared memory is supported in NOMMU
@ -170,8 +168,7 @@ mode. The former through the usual mechanism, the latter through files created
on ramfs or tmpfs mounts.
=======
FUTEXES
Futexes
=======
Futexes are supported in NOMMU mode if the arch supports them. An error will
@ -180,12 +177,11 @@ mappings made by a process or if the mapping in which the address lies does not
support futexes (such as an I/O chardev mapping).
=============
NO-MMU MREMAP
No-MMU mremap
=============
The mremap() function is partially supported. It may change the size of a
mapping, and may move it[*] if MREMAP_MAYMOVE is specified and if the new size
mapping, and may move it [#]_ if MREMAP_MAYMOVE is specified and if the new size
of the mapping exceeds the size of the slab object currently occupied by the
memory to which the mapping refers, or if a smaller slab object could be used.
@ -200,11 +196,10 @@ a previously mapped object. It may not be used to create holes in existing
mappings, move parts of existing mappings or resize parts of mappings. It must
act on a complete mapping.
[*] Not currently supported.
.. [#] Not currently supported.
============================================
PROVIDING SHAREABLE CHARACTER DEVICE SUPPORT
Providing shareable character device support
============================================
To provide shareable character device support, a driver must provide a
@ -235,7 +230,7 @@ direct the call to the device-specific driver. Under such circumstances, the
mapping request will be rejected if NOMMU_MAP_COPY is not specified, and a
copy mapped otherwise.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
.. important::
Some types of device may present a different appearance to anyone
looking at them in certain modes. Flash chips can be like this; for
@ -249,8 +244,7 @@ IMPORTANT NOTE:
circumstances!
==============================================
PROVIDING SHAREABLE MEMORY-BACKED FILE SUPPORT
Providing shareable memory-backed file support
==============================================
Provision of shared mappings on memory backed files is similar to the provision
@ -267,8 +261,7 @@ Memory backed devices are indicated by the mapping's backing device info having
the memory_backed flag set.
========================================
PROVIDING SHAREABLE BLOCK DEVICE SUPPORT
Providing shareable block device support
========================================
Provision of shared mappings on block device files is exactly the same as for
@ -276,8 +269,7 @@ character devices. If there isn't a real device underneath, then the driver
should allocate sufficient contiguous memory to honour any supported mapping.
=================================
ADJUSTING PAGE TRIMMING BEHAVIOUR
Adjusting page trimming behaviour
=================================
NOMMU mmap automatically rounds up to the nearest power-of-2 number of pages
@ -288,4 +280,4 @@ allocator. In order to retain finer-grained control over fragmentation, this
behaviour can either be disabled completely, or bumped up to a higher page
watermark where trimming begins.
Page trimming behaviour is configurable via the sysctl `vm.nr_trim_pages'.
Page trimming behaviour is configurable via the sysctl ``vm.nr_trim_pages``.

155
Documentation/ntb.txt
View File

@ -1,16 +1,21 @@
# NTB Drivers
===========
NTB Drivers
===========
NTB (Non-Transparent Bridge) is a type of PCI-Express bridge chip that connects
the separate memory systems of two computers to the same PCI-Express fabric.
Existing NTB hardware supports a common feature set, including scratchpad
registers, doorbell registers, and memory translation windows. Scratchpad
registers are read-and-writable registers that are accessible from either side
of the device, so that peers can exchange a small amount of information at a
fixed address. Doorbell registers provide a way for peers to send interrupt
events. Memory windows allow translated read and write access to the peer
memory.
the separate memory systems of two or more computers to the same PCI-Express
fabric. Existing NTB hardware supports a common feature set: doorbell
registers and memory translation windows, as well as non common features like
scratchpad and message registers. Scratchpad registers are read-and-writable
registers that are accessible from either side of the device, so that peers can
exchange a small amount of information at a fixed address. Message registers can
be utilized for the same purpose. Additionally they are provided with with
special status bits to make sure the information isn't rewritten by another
peer. Doorbell registers provide a way for peers to send interrupt events.
Memory windows allow translated read and write access to the peer memory.
## NTB Core Driver (ntb)
NTB Core Driver (ntb)
=====================
The NTB core driver defines an api wrapping the common feature set, and allows
clients interested in NTB features to discover NTB the devices supported by
@ -18,7 +23,8 @@ hardware drivers. The term "client" is used here to mean an upper layer
component making use of the NTB api. The term "driver," or "hardware driver,"
is used here to mean a driver for a specific vendor and model of NTB hardware.
## NTB Client Drivers
NTB Client Drivers
==================
NTB client drivers should register with the NTB core driver. After
registering, the client probe and remove functions will be called appropriately
@ -26,7 +32,90 @@ as ntb hardware, or hardware drivers, are inserted and removed. The
registration uses the Linux Device framework, so it should feel familiar to
anyone who has written a pci driver.
### NTB Transport Client (ntb\_transport) and NTB Netdev (ntb\_netdev)
NTB Typical client driver implementation
----------------------------------------
Primary purpose of NTB is to share some peace of memory between at least two
systems. So the NTB device features like Scratchpad/Message registers are
mainly used to perform the proper memory window initialization. Typically
there are two types of memory window interfaces supported by the NTB API:
inbound translation configured on the local ntb port and outbound translation
configured by the peer, on the peer ntb port. The first type is
depicted on the next figure
Inbound translation:
Memory: Local NTB Port: Peer NTB Port: Peer MMIO:
____________
| dma-mapped |-ntb_mw_set_trans(addr) |
| memory | _v____________ | ______________
| (addr) |<======| MW xlat addr |<====| MW base addr |<== memory-mapped IO
|------------| |--------------| | |--------------|
So typical scenario of the first type memory window initialization looks:
1) allocate a memory region, 2) put translated address to NTB config,
3) somehow notify a peer device of performed initialization, 4) peer device
maps corresponding outbound memory window so to have access to the shared
memory region.
The second type of interface, that implies the shared windows being
initialized by a peer device, is depicted on the figure:
Outbound translation:
Memory: Local NTB Port: Peer NTB Port: Peer MMIO:
____________ ______________
| dma-mapped | | | MW base addr |<== memory-mapped IO
| memory | | |--------------|
| (addr) |<===================| MW xlat addr |<-ntb_peer_mw_set_trans(addr)
|------------| | |--------------|
Typical scenario of the second type interface initialization would be:
1) allocate a memory region, 2) somehow deliver a translated address to a peer
device, 3) peer puts the translated address to NTB config, 4) peer device maps
outbound memory window so to have access to the shared memory region.
As one can see the described scenarios can be combined in one portable
algorithm.
Local device:
1) Allocate memory for a shared window
2) Initialize memory window by translated address of the allocated region
(it may fail if local memory window initialization is unsupported)
3) Send the translated address and memory window index to a peer device
Peer device:
1) Initialize memory window with retrieved address of the allocated
by another device memory region (it may fail if peer memory window
initialization is unsupported)
2) Map outbound memory window
In accordance with this scenario, the NTB Memory Window API can be used as
follows:
Local device:
1) ntb_mw_count(pidx) - retrieve number of memory ranges, which can
be allocated for memory windows between local device and peer device
of port with specified index.
2) ntb_get_align(pidx, midx) - retrieve parameters restricting the
shared memory region alignment and size. Then memory can be properly
allocated.
3) Allocate physically contiguous memory region in compliance with
restrictions retrieved in 2).
4) ntb_mw_set_trans(pidx, midx) - try to set translation address of
the memory window with specified index for the defined peer device
(it may fail if local translated address setting is not supported)
5) Send translated base address (usually together with memory window
number) to the peer device using, for instance, scratchpad or message
registers.
Peer device:
1) ntb_peer_mw_set_trans(pidx, midx) - try to set received from other
device (related to pidx) translated address for specified memory
window. It may fail if retrieved address, for instance, exceeds
maximum possible address or isn't properly aligned.
2) ntb_peer_mw_get_addr(widx) - retrieve MMIO address to map the memory
window so to have an access to the shared memory.
Also it is worth to note, that method ntb_mw_count(pidx) should return the
same value as ntb_peer_mw_count() on the peer with port index - pidx.
NTB Transport Client (ntb\_transport) and NTB Netdev (ntb\_netdev)
------------------------------------------------------------------
The primary client for NTB is the Transport client, used in tandem with NTB
Netdev. These drivers function together to create a logical link to the peer,
@ -37,7 +126,8 @@ Transport queue pair. Network data is copied between socket buffers and the
Transport queue pair buffer. The Transport client may be used for other things
besides Netdev, however no other applications have yet been written.
### NTB Ping Pong Test Client (ntb\_pingpong)
NTB Ping Pong Test Client (ntb\_pingpong)
-----------------------------------------
The Ping Pong test client serves as a demonstration to exercise the doorbell
and scratchpad registers of NTB hardware, and as an example simple NTB client.
@ -64,7 +154,8 @@ Module Parameters:
* dyndbg - It is suggested to specify dyndbg=+p when loading this module, and
then to observe debugging output on the console.
### NTB Tool Test Client (ntb\_tool)
NTB Tool Test Client (ntb\_tool)
--------------------------------
The Tool test client serves for debugging, primarily, ntb hardware and drivers.
The Tool provides access through debugfs for reading, setting, and clearing the
@ -74,48 +165,60 @@ The Tool does not currently have any module parameters.
Debugfs Files:
* *debugfs*/ntb\_tool/*hw*/ - A directory in debugfs will be created for each
* *debugfs*/ntb\_tool/*hw*/
A directory in debugfs will be created for each
NTB device probed by the tool. This directory is shortened to *hw*
below.
* *hw*/db - This file is used to read, set, and clear the local doorbell. Not
* *hw*/db
This file is used to read, set, and clear the local doorbell. Not
all operations may be supported by all hardware. To read the doorbell,
read the file. To set the doorbell, write `s` followed by the bits to
set (eg: `echo 's 0x0101' > db`). To clear the doorbell, write `c`
followed by the bits to clear.
* *hw*/mask - This file is used to read, set, and clear the local doorbell mask.
* *hw*/mask
This file is used to read, set, and clear the local doorbell mask.
See *db* for details.
* *hw*/peer\_db - This file is used to read, set, and clear the peer doorbell.
* *hw*/peer\_db
This file is used to read, set, and clear the peer doorbell.
See *db* for details.
* *hw*/peer\_mask - This file is used to read, set, and clear the peer doorbell
* *hw*/peer\_mask
This file is used to read, set, and clear the peer doorbell
mask. See *db* for details.
* *hw*/spad - This file is used to read and write local scratchpads. To read
* *hw*/spad
This file is used to read and write local scratchpads. To read
the values of all scratchpads, read the file. To write values, write a
series of pairs of scratchpad number and value
(eg: `echo '4 0x123 7 0xabc' > spad`
# to set scratchpads `4` and `7` to `0x123` and `0xabc`, respectively).
* *hw*/peer\_spad - This file is used to read and write peer scratchpads. See
* *hw*/peer\_spad
This file is used to read and write peer scratchpads. See
*spad* for details.
## NTB Hardware Drivers
NTB Hardware Drivers
====================
NTB hardware drivers should register devices with the NTB core driver. After
registering, clients probe and remove functions will be called.
### NTB Intel Hardware Driver (ntb\_hw\_intel)
NTB Intel Hardware Driver (ntb\_hw\_intel)
------------------------------------------
The Intel hardware driver supports NTB on Xeon and Atom CPUs.
Module Parameters:
* b2b\_mw\_idx - If the peer ntb is to be accessed via a memory window, then use
* b2b\_mw\_idx
If the peer ntb is to be accessed via a memory window, then use
this memory window to access the peer ntb. A value of zero or positive
starts from the first mw idx, and a negative value starts from the last
mw idx. Both sides MUST set the same value here! The default value is
`-1`.
* b2b\_mw\_share - If the peer ntb is to be accessed via a memory window, and if
* b2b\_mw\_share
If the peer ntb is to be accessed via a memory window, and if
the memory window is large enough, still allow the client to use the
second half of the memory window for address translation to the peer.
* xeon\_b2b\_usd\_bar2\_addr64 - If using B2B topology on Xeon hardware, use
* xeon\_b2b\_usd\_bar2\_addr64
If using B2B topology on Xeon hardware, use
this 64 bit address on the bus between the NTB devices for the window
at BAR2, on the upstream side of the link.
* xeon\_b2b\_usd\_bar4\_addr64 - See *xeon\_b2b\_bar2\_addr64*.

5
Documentation/numastat.txt
View File

@ -1,10 +1,12 @@
===============================
Numa policy hit/miss statistics
===============================
/sys/devices/system/node/node*/numastat
All units are pages. Hugepages have separate counters.
=============== ============================================================
numa_hit A process wanted to allocate memory from this node,
and succeeded.
@ -20,6 +22,7 @@ other_node A process ran on this node and got memory from another node.
interleave_hit Interleaving wanted to allocate from this node
and succeeded.
=============== ============================================================
For easier reading you can use the numastat utility from the numactl package
(http://oss.sgi.com/projects/libnuma/). Note that it only works

27
Documentation/padata.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
=======================================
The padata parallel execution mechanism
Last updated for 2.6.36
=======================================
:Last updated: for 2.6.36
Padata is a mechanism by which the kernel can farm work out to be done in
parallel on multiple CPUs while retaining the ordering of tasks. It was
@ -9,7 +12,7 @@ those packets. The crypto developers made a point of writing padata in a
sufficiently general fashion that it could be put to other uses as well.
The first step in using padata is to set up a padata_instance structure for
overall control of how tasks are to be run:
overall control of how tasks are to be run::
#include <linux/padata.h>
@ -24,7 +27,7 @@ The workqueue wq is where the work will actually be done; it should be
a multithreaded queue, naturally.
To allocate a padata instance with the cpu_possible_mask for both
cpumasks this helper function can be used:
cpumasks this helper function can be used::
struct padata_instance *padata_alloc_possible(struct workqueue_struct *wq);
@ -36,7 +39,7 @@ it is legal to supply a cpumask to padata that contains offline CPUs.
Once an offline CPU in the user supplied cpumask comes online, padata
is going to use it.
There are functions for enabling and disabling the instance:
There are functions for enabling and disabling the instance::
int padata_start(struct padata_instance *pinst);
void padata_stop(struct padata_instance *pinst);
@ -48,7 +51,7 @@ padata cpumask contains no active CPU (flag not set).
padata_stop clears the flag and blocks until the padata instance
is unused.
The list of CPUs to be used can be adjusted with these functions:
The list of CPUs to be used can be adjusted with these functions::
int padata_set_cpumasks(struct padata_instance *pinst,
cpumask_var_t pcpumask,
@ -71,12 +74,12 @@ padata_add_cpu/padata_remove_cpu are used. cpu specifies the CPU to add or
remove and mask is one of PADATA_CPU_SERIAL, PADATA_CPU_PARALLEL.
If a user is interested in padata cpumask changes, he can register to
the padata cpumask change notifier:
the padata cpumask change notifier::
int padata_register_cpumask_notifier(struct padata_instance *pinst,
struct notifier_block *nblock);
To unregister from that notifier:
To unregister from that notifier::
int padata_unregister_cpumask_notifier(struct padata_instance *pinst,
struct notifier_block *nblock);
@ -84,7 +87,7 @@ To unregister from that notifier:
The padata cpumask change notifier notifies about changes of the usable
cpumasks, i.e. the subset of active CPUs in the user supplied cpumask.
Padata calls the notifier chain with:
Padata calls the notifier chain with::
blocking_notifier_call_chain(&pinst->cpumask_change_notifier,
notification_mask,
@ -95,7 +98,7 @@ is one of PADATA_CPU_SERIAL, PADATA_CPU_PARALLEL and cpumask is a pointer
to a struct padata_cpumask that contains the new cpumask information.
Actually submitting work to the padata instance requires the creation of a
padata_priv structure:
padata_priv structure::
struct padata_priv {
/* Other stuff here... */
@ -110,7 +113,7 @@ parallel() and serial() functions should be provided. Those functions will
be called in the process of getting the work done as we will see
momentarily.
The submission of work is done with:
The submission of work is done with::
int padata_do_parallel(struct padata_instance *pinst,
struct padata_priv *padata, int cb_cpu);
@ -138,7 +141,7 @@ need not be completed during this call, but, if parallel() leaves work
outstanding, it should be prepared to be called again with a new job before
the previous one completes. When a task does complete, parallel() (or
whatever function actually finishes the job) should inform padata of the
fact with a call to:
fact with a call to::
void padata_do_serial(struct padata_priv *padata);
@ -151,7 +154,7 @@ pains to ensure that tasks are completed in the order in which they were
submitted.
The one remaining function in the padata API should be called to clean up
when a padata instance is no longer needed:
when a padata instance is no longer needed::
void padata_free(struct padata_instance *pinst);

1315
Documentation/parport-lowlevel.txt
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

3
Documentation/percpu-rw-semaphore.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
====================
Percpu rw semaphores
--------------------
====================
Percpu rw semaphores is a new read-write semaphore design that is
optimized for locking for reading.

106
Documentation/phy.txt
View File

@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
PHY SUBSYSTEM
Kishon Vijay Abraham I <kishon@ti.com>
=============
PHY subsystem
=============
:Author: Kishon Vijay Abraham I <kishon@ti.com>
This document explains the Generic PHY Framework along with the APIs provided,
and how-to-use.
1. Introduction
Introduction
============
*PHY* is the abbreviation for physical layer. It is used to connect a device
to the physical medium e.g., the USB controller has a PHY to provide functions
@ -21,7 +25,8 @@ better code maintainability.
This framework will be of use only to devices that use external PHY (PHY
functionality is not embedded within the controller).
2. Registering/Unregistering the PHY provider
Registering/Unregistering the PHY provider
==========================================
PHY provider refers to an entity that implements one or more PHY instances.
For the simple case where the PHY provider implements only a single instance of
@ -30,11 +35,14 @@ of_phy_simple_xlate. If the PHY provider implements multiple instances, it
should provide its own implementation of of_xlate. of_xlate is used only for
dt boot case.
#define of_phy_provider_register(dev, xlate) \
__of_phy_provider_register((dev), NULL, THIS_MODULE, (xlate))
::
#define devm_of_phy_provider_register(dev, xlate) \
__devm_of_phy_provider_register((dev), NULL, THIS_MODULE, (xlate))
#define of_phy_provider_register(dev, xlate) \
__of_phy_provider_register((dev), NULL, THIS_MODULE, (xlate))
#define devm_of_phy_provider_register(dev, xlate) \
__devm_of_phy_provider_register((dev), NULL, THIS_MODULE,
(xlate))
of_phy_provider_register and devm_of_phy_provider_register macros can be used to
register the phy_provider and it takes device and of_xlate as
@ -47,28 +55,35 @@ nodes within extra levels for context and extensibility, in which case the low
level of_phy_provider_register_full() and devm_of_phy_provider_register_full()
macros can be used to override the node containing the children.
#define of_phy_provider_register_full(dev, children, xlate) \
__of_phy_provider_register(dev, children, THIS_MODULE, xlate)
::
#define devm_of_phy_provider_register_full(dev, children, xlate) \
__devm_of_phy_provider_register_full(dev, children, THIS_MODULE, xlate)
#define of_phy_provider_register_full(dev, children, xlate) \
__of_phy_provider_register(dev, children, THIS_MODULE, xlate)
void devm_of_phy_provider_unregister(struct device *dev,
struct phy_provider *phy_provider);
void of_phy_provider_unregister(struct phy_provider *phy_provider);
#define devm_of_phy_provider_register_full(dev, children, xlate) \
__devm_of_phy_provider_register_full(dev, children,
THIS_MODULE, xlate)
void devm_of_phy_provider_unregister(struct device *dev,
struct phy_provider *phy_provider);
void of_phy_provider_unregister(struct phy_provider *phy_provider);
devm_of_phy_provider_unregister and of_phy_provider_unregister can be used to
unregister the PHY.
3. Creating the PHY
Creating the PHY
================
The PHY driver should create the PHY in order for other peripheral controllers
to make use of it. The PHY framework provides 2 APIs to create the PHY.
struct phy *phy_create(struct device *dev, struct device_node *node,
const struct phy_ops *ops);
struct phy *devm_phy_create(struct device *dev, struct device_node *node,
const struct phy_ops *ops);
::
struct phy *phy_create(struct device *dev, struct device_node *node,
const struct phy_ops *ops);
struct phy *devm_phy_create(struct device *dev,
struct device_node *node,
const struct phy_ops *ops);
The PHY drivers can use one of the above 2 APIs to create the PHY by passing
the device pointer and phy ops.
@ -84,12 +99,16 @@ phy_ops to get back the private data.
Before the controller can make use of the PHY, it has to get a reference to
it. This framework provides the following APIs to get a reference to the PHY.
struct phy *phy_get(struct device *dev, const char *string);
struct phy *phy_optional_get(struct device *dev, const char *string);
struct phy *devm_phy_get(struct device *dev, const char *string);
struct phy *devm_phy_optional_get(struct device *dev, const char *string);
struct phy *devm_of_phy_get_by_index(struct device *dev, struct device_node *np,
int index);
::
struct phy *phy_get(struct device *dev, const char *string);
struct phy *phy_optional_get(struct device *dev, const char *string);
struct phy *devm_phy_get(struct device *dev, const char *string);
struct phy *devm_phy_optional_get(struct device *dev,
const char *string);
struct phy *devm_of_phy_get_by_index(struct device *dev,
struct device_node *np,
int index);
phy_get, phy_optional_get, devm_phy_get and devm_phy_optional_get can
be used to get the PHY. In the case of dt boot, the string arguments
@ -111,30 +130,35 @@ the phy_init() and phy_exit() calls, and phy_power_on() and
phy_power_off() calls are all NOP when applied to a NULL phy. The NULL
phy is useful in devices for handling optional phy devices.
5. Releasing a reference to the PHY
Releasing a reference to the PHY
================================
When the controller no longer needs the PHY, it has to release the reference
to the PHY it has obtained using the APIs mentioned in the above section. The
PHY framework provides 2 APIs to release a reference to the PHY.
void phy_put(struct phy *phy);
void devm_phy_put(struct device *dev, struct phy *phy);
::
void phy_put(struct phy *phy);
void devm_phy_put(struct device *dev, struct phy *phy);
Both these APIs are used to release a reference to the PHY and devm_phy_put
destroys the devres associated with this PHY.
6. Destroying the PHY
Destroying the PHY
==================
When the driver that created the PHY is unloaded, it should destroy the PHY it
created using one of the following 2 APIs.
created using one of the following 2 APIs::
void phy_destroy(struct phy *phy);
void devm_phy_destroy(struct device *dev, struct phy *phy);
void phy_destroy(struct phy *phy);
void devm_phy_destroy(struct device *dev, struct phy *phy);
Both these APIs destroy the PHY and devm_phy_destroy destroys the devres
associated with this PHY.
7. PM Runtime
PM Runtime
==========
This subsystem is pm runtime enabled. So while creating the PHY,
pm_runtime_enable of the phy device created by this subsystem is called and
@ -150,7 +174,8 @@ There are exported APIs like phy_pm_runtime_get, phy_pm_runtime_get_sync,
phy_pm_runtime_put, phy_pm_runtime_put_sync, phy_pm_runtime_allow and
phy_pm_runtime_forbid for performing PM operations.
8. PHY Mappings
PHY Mappings
============
In order to get reference to a PHY without help from DeviceTree, the framework
offers lookups which can be compared to clkdev that allow clk structures to be
@ -158,12 +183,15 @@ bound to devices. A lookup can be made be made during runtime when a handle to
the struct phy already exists.
The framework offers the following API for registering and unregistering the
lookups.
lookups::
int phy_create_lookup(struct phy *phy, const char *con_id, const char *dev_id);
void phy_remove_lookup(struct phy *phy, const char *con_id, const char *dev_id);
int phy_create_lookup(struct phy *phy, const char *con_id,
const char *dev_id);
void phy_remove_lookup(struct phy *phy, const char *con_id,
const char *dev_id);
9. DeviceTree Binding
DeviceTree Binding
==================
The documentation for PHY dt binding can be found @
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-bindings.txt

15
Documentation/pi-futex.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
======================
Lightweight PI-futexes
----------------------
======================
We are calling them lightweight for 3 reasons:
@ -25,8 +26,8 @@ determinism and well-bound latencies. Even in the worst-case, PI will
improve the statistical distribution of locking related application
delays.
The longer reply:
-----------------
The longer reply
----------------
Firstly, sharing locks between multiple tasks is a common programming
technique that often cannot be replaced with lockless algorithms. As we
@ -71,8 +72,8 @@ deterministic execution of the high-prio task: any medium-priority task
could preempt the low-prio task while it holds the shared lock and
executes the critical section, and could delay it indefinitely.
Implementation:
---------------
Implementation
--------------
As mentioned before, the userspace fastpath of PI-enabled pthread
mutexes involves no kernel work at all - they behave quite similarly to
@ -83,8 +84,8 @@ entering the kernel.
To handle the slowpath, we have added two new futex ops:
FUTEX_LOCK_PI
FUTEX_UNLOCK_PI
- FUTEX_LOCK_PI
- FUTEX_UNLOCK_PI
If the lock-acquire fastpath fails, [i.e. an atomic transition from 0 to
TID fails], then FUTEX_LOCK_PI is called. The kernel does all the

313
Documentation/pnp.txt
View File

@ -1,98 +1,118 @@
=================================
Linux Plug and Play Documentation
by Adam Belay <ambx1@neo.rr.com>
last updated: Oct. 16, 2002
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=================================
:Author: Adam Belay <ambx1@neo.rr.com>
:Last updated: Oct. 16, 2002
Overview
--------
Plug and Play provides a means of detecting and setting resources for legacy or
Plug and Play provides a means of detecting and setting resources for legacy or
otherwise unconfigurable devices. The Linux Plug and Play Layer provides these
services to compatible drivers.
The User Interface
------------------
The Linux Plug and Play user interface provides a means to activate PnP devices
The Linux Plug and Play user interface provides a means to activate PnP devices
for legacy and user level drivers that do not support Linux Plug and Play. The
user interface is integrated into sysfs.
In addition to the standard sysfs file the following are created in each
device's directory:
id - displays a list of support EISA IDs
options - displays possible resource configurations
resources - displays currently allocated resources and allows resource changes
- id - displays a list of support EISA IDs
- options - displays possible resource configurations
- resources - displays currently allocated resources and allows resource changes
-activating a device
activating a device
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
#echo "auto" > resources
::
# echo "auto" > resources
this will invoke the automatic resource config system to activate the device
-manually activating a device
manually activating a device
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
#echo "manual <depnum> <mode>" > resources
<depnum> - the configuration number
<mode> - static or dynamic
static = for next boot
dynamic = now
::
-disabling a device
# echo "manual <depnum> <mode>" > resources
#echo "disable" > resources
<depnum> - the configuration number
<mode> - static or dynamic
static = for next boot
dynamic = now
disabling a device
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
::
# echo "disable" > resources
EXAMPLE:
Suppose you need to activate the floppy disk controller.
1.) change to the proper directory, in my case it is
/driver/bus/pnp/devices/00:0f
# cd /driver/bus/pnp/devices/00:0f
# cat name
PC standard floppy disk controller
2.) check if the device is already active
# cat resources
DISABLED
1. change to the proper directory, in my case it is
/driver/bus/pnp/devices/00:0f::
- Notice the string "DISABLED". This means the device is not active.
# cd /driver/bus/pnp/devices/00:0f
# cat name
PC standard floppy disk controller
3.) check the device's possible configurations (optional)
# cat options
Dependent: 01 - Priority acceptable
port 0x3f0-0x3f0, align 0x7, size 0x6, 16-bit address decoding
port 0x3f7-0x3f7, align 0x0, size 0x1, 16-bit address decoding
irq 6
dma 2 8-bit compatible
Dependent: 02 - Priority acceptable
port 0x370-0x370, align 0x7, size 0x6, 16-bit address decoding
port 0x377-0x377, align 0x0, size 0x1, 16-bit address decoding
irq 6
dma 2 8-bit compatible
2. check if the device is already active::
4.) now activate the device
# echo "auto" > resources
# cat resources
DISABLED
5.) finally check if the device is active
# cat resources
io 0x3f0-0x3f5
io 0x3f7-0x3f7
irq 6
dma 2
- Notice the string "DISABLED". This means the device is not active.
also there are a series of kernel parameters:
pnp_reserve_irq=irq1[,irq2] ....
pnp_reserve_dma=dma1[,dma2] ....
pnp_reserve_io=io1,size1[,io2,size2] ....
pnp_reserve_mem=mem1,size1[,mem2,size2] ....
3. check the device's possible configurations (optional)::
# cat options
Dependent: 01 - Priority acceptable
port 0x3f0-0x3f0, align 0x7, size 0x6, 16-bit address decoding
port 0x3f7-0x3f7, align 0x0, size 0x1, 16-bit address decoding
irq 6
dma 2 8-bit compatible
Dependent: 02 - Priority acceptable
port 0x370-0x370, align 0x7, size 0x6, 16-bit address decoding
port 0x377-0x377, align 0x0, size 0x1, 16-bit address decoding
irq 6
dma 2 8-bit compatible
4. now activate the device::
# echo "auto" > resources
5. finally check if the device is active::
# cat resources
io 0x3f0-0x3f5
io 0x3f7-0x3f7
irq 6
dma 2
also there are a series of kernel parameters::
pnp_reserve_irq=irq1[,irq2] ....
pnp_reserve_dma=dma1[,dma2] ....
pnp_reserve_io=io1,size1[,io2,size2] ....
pnp_reserve_mem=mem1,size1[,mem2,size2] ....
The Unified Plug and Play Layer
-------------------------------
All Plug and Play drivers, protocols, and services meet at a central location
All Plug and Play drivers, protocols, and services meet at a central location
called the Plug and Play Layer. This layer is responsible for the exchange of
information between PnP drivers and PnP protocols. Thus it automatically
forwards commands to the proper protocol. This makes writing PnP drivers
@ -101,64 +121,73 @@ significantly easier.
The following functions are available from the Plug and Play Layer:
pnp_get_protocol
- increments the number of uses by one
increments the number of uses by one
pnp_put_protocol
- deincrements the number of uses by one
deincrements the number of uses by one
pnp_register_protocol
- use this to register a new PnP protocol
use this to register a new PnP protocol
pnp_unregister_protocol
- use this function to remove a PnP protocol from the Plug and Play Layer
use this function to remove a PnP protocol from the Plug and Play Layer
pnp_register_driver
- adds a PnP driver to the Plug and Play Layer
- this includes driver model integration
- returns zero for success or a negative error number for failure; count
adds a PnP driver to the Plug and Play Layer
this includes driver model integration
returns zero for success or a negative error number for failure; count
calls to the .add() method if you need to know how many devices bind to
the driver
pnp_unregister_driver
- removes a PnP driver from the Plug and Play Layer
removes a PnP driver from the Plug and Play Layer
Plug and Play Protocols
-----------------------
This section contains information for PnP protocol developers.
This section contains information for PnP protocol developers.
The following Protocols are currently available in the computing world:
- PNPBIOS: used for system devices such as serial and parallel ports.
- ISAPNP: provides PnP support for the ISA bus
- ACPI: among its many uses, ACPI provides information about system level
devices.
- PNPBIOS:
used for system devices such as serial and parallel ports.
- ISAPNP:
provides PnP support for the ISA bus
- ACPI:
among its many uses, ACPI provides information about system level
devices.
It is meant to replace the PNPBIOS. It is not currently supported by Linux
Plug and Play but it is planned to be in the near future.
Requirements for a Linux PnP protocol:
1.) the protocol must use EISA IDs
2.) the protocol must inform the PnP Layer of a device's current configuration
1. the protocol must use EISA IDs
2. the protocol must inform the PnP Layer of a device's current configuration
- the ability to set resources is optional but preferred.
The following are PnP protocol related functions:
pnp_add_device
- use this function to add a PnP device to the PnP layer
- only call this function when all wanted values are set in the pnp_dev
structure
use this function to add a PnP device to the PnP layer
only call this function when all wanted values are set in the pnp_dev
structure
pnp_init_device
- call this to initialize the PnP structure
call this to initialize the PnP structure
pnp_remove_device
- call this to remove a device from the Plug and Play Layer.
- it will fail if the device is still in use.
- automatically will free mem used by the device and related structures
call this to remove a device from the Plug and Play Layer.
it will fail if the device is still in use.
automatically will free mem used by the device and related structures
pnp_add_id
- adds an EISA ID to the list of supported IDs for the specified device
adds an EISA ID to the list of supported IDs for the specified device
For more information consult the source of a protocol such as
/drivers/pnp/pnpbios/core.c.
@ -167,85 +196,97 @@ For more information consult the source of a protocol such as
Linux Plug and Play Drivers
---------------------------
This section contains information for Linux PnP driver developers.
This section contains information for Linux PnP driver developers.
The New Way
...........
1.) first make a list of supported EISA IDS
ex:
static const struct pnp_id pnp_dev_table[] = {
/* Standard LPT Printer Port */
{.id = "PNP0400", .driver_data = 0},
/* ECP Printer Port */
{.id = "PNP0401", .driver_data = 0},
{.id = ""}
};
^^^^^^^^^^^
1. first make a list of supported EISA IDS
ex::
static const struct pnp_id pnp_dev_table[] = {
/* Standard LPT Printer Port */
{.id = "PNP0400", .driver_data = 0},
/* ECP Printer Port */
{.id = "PNP0401", .driver_data = 0},
{.id = ""}
};
Please note that the character 'X' can be used as a wild card in the function
portion (last four characters).
ex::
Please note that the character 'X' can be used as a wild card in the function
portion (last four characters).
ex:
/* Unknown PnP modems */
{ "PNPCXXX", UNKNOWN_DEV },
Supported PnP card IDs can optionally be defined.
ex:
static const struct pnp_id pnp_card_table[] = {
{ "ANYDEVS", 0 },
{ "", 0 }
};
Supported PnP card IDs can optionally be defined.
ex::
2.) Optionally define probe and remove functions. It may make sense not to
define these functions if the driver already has a reliable method of detecting
the resources, such as the parport_pc driver.
ex:
static int
serial_pnp_probe(struct pnp_dev * dev, const struct pnp_id *card_id, const
struct pnp_id *dev_id)
{
. . .
static const struct pnp_id pnp_card_table[] = {
{ "ANYDEVS", 0 },
{ "", 0 }
};
ex:
static void serial_pnp_remove(struct pnp_dev * dev)
{
. . .
2. Optionally define probe and remove functions. It may make sense not to
define these functions if the driver already has a reliable method of detecting
the resources, such as the parport_pc driver.
consult /drivers/serial/8250_pnp.c for more information.
ex::
3.) create a driver structure
ex:
static int
serial_pnp_probe(struct pnp_dev * dev, const struct pnp_id *card_id, const
struct pnp_id *dev_id)
{
. . .
static struct pnp_driver serial_pnp_driver = {
.name = "serial",
.card_id_table = pnp_card_table,
.id_table = pnp_dev_table,
.probe = serial_pnp_probe,
.remove = serial_pnp_remove,
};
ex::
* name and id_table cannot be NULL.
static void serial_pnp_remove(struct pnp_dev * dev)
{
. . .
4.) register the driver
ex:
consult /drivers/serial/8250_pnp.c for more information.
static int __init serial8250_pnp_init(void)
{
return pnp_register_driver(&serial_pnp_driver);
}
3. create a driver structure
ex::
static struct pnp_driver serial_pnp_driver = {
.name = "serial",
.card_id_table = pnp_card_table,
.id_table = pnp_dev_table,
.probe = serial_pnp_probe,
.remove = serial_pnp_remove,
};
* name and id_table cannot be NULL.
4. register the driver
ex::
static int __init serial8250_pnp_init(void)
{
return pnp_register_driver(&serial_pnp_driver);
}
The Old Way
...........
^^^^^^^^^^^
A series of compatibility functions have been created to make it easy to convert
ISAPNP drivers. They should serve as a temporary solution only.
They are as follows:
They are as follows::
struct pnp_card *pnp_find_card(unsigned short vendor,
unsigned short device,
struct pnp_card *from)
struct pnp_card *pnp_find_card(unsigned short vendor,
unsigned short device,
struct pnp_card *from)
struct pnp_dev *pnp_find_dev(struct pnp_card *card,
unsigned short vendor,
unsigned short function,
struct pnp_dev *from)
struct pnp_dev *pnp_find_dev(struct pnp_card *card,
unsigned short vendor,
unsigned short function,
struct pnp_dev *from)

40
Documentation/preempt-locking.txt
View File

@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
Proper Locking Under a Preemptible Kernel:
Keeping Kernel Code Preempt-Safe
Robert Love <rml@tech9.net>
Last Updated: 28 Aug 2002
===========================================================================
Proper Locking Under a Preemptible Kernel: Keeping Kernel Code Preempt-Safe
===========================================================================
:Author: Robert Love <rml@tech9.net>
:Last Updated: 28 Aug 2002
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
============
A preemptible kernel creates new locking issues. The issues are the same as
@ -17,9 +20,10 @@ requires protecting these situations.
RULE #1: Per-CPU data structures need explicit protection
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Two similar problems arise. An example code snippet:
Two similar problems arise. An example code snippet::
struct this_needs_locking tux[NR_CPUS];
tux[smp_processor_id()] = some_value;
@ -35,6 +39,7 @@ You can also use put_cpu() and get_cpu(), which will disable preemption.
RULE #2: CPU state must be protected.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Under preemption, the state of the CPU must be protected. This is arch-
@ -52,6 +57,7 @@ However, fpu__restore() must be called with preemption disabled.
RULE #3: Lock acquire and release must be performed by same task
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
A lock acquired in one task must be released by the same task. This
@ -61,17 +67,20 @@ like this, acquire and release the task in the same code path and
have the caller wait on an event by the other task.
SOLUTION
Solution
========
Data protection under preemption is achieved by disabling preemption for the
duration of the critical region.
preempt_enable() decrement the preempt counter
preempt_disable() increment the preempt counter
preempt_enable_no_resched() decrement, but do not immediately preempt
preempt_check_resched() if needed, reschedule
preempt_count() return the preempt counter
::
preempt_enable() decrement the preempt counter
preempt_disable() increment the preempt counter
preempt_enable_no_resched() decrement, but do not immediately preempt
preempt_check_resched() if needed, reschedule
preempt_count() return the preempt counter
The functions are nestable. In other words, you can call preempt_disable
n-times in a code path, and preemption will not be reenabled until the n-th
@ -89,7 +98,7 @@ So use this implicit preemption-disabling property only if you know that the
affected codepath does not do any of this. Best policy is to use this only for
small, atomic code that you wrote and which calls no complex functions.
Example:
Example::
cpucache_t *cc; /* this is per-CPU */
preempt_disable();
@ -102,7 +111,7 @@ Example:
return 0;
Notice how the preemption statements must encompass every reference of the
critical variables. Another example:
critical variables. Another example::
int buf[NR_CPUS];
set_cpu_val(buf);
@ -114,7 +123,8 @@ This code is not preempt-safe, but see how easily we can fix it by simply
moving the spin_lock up two lines.
PREVENTING PREEMPTION USING INTERRUPT DISABLING
Preventing preemption using interrupt disabling
===============================================
It is possible to prevent a preemption event using local_irq_disable and

384
Documentation/printk-formats.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,18 @@
If variable is of Type, use printk format specifier:
---------------------------------------------------------
=========================================
How to get printk format specifiers right
=========================================
:Author: Randy Dunlap <rdunlap@infradead.org>
:Author: Andrew Murray <amurray@mpc-data.co.uk>
Integer types
=============
::
If variable is of Type, use printk format specifier:
------------------------------------------------------------
int %d or %x
unsigned int %u or %x
long %ld or %lx
@ -13,25 +26,29 @@ If variable is of Type, use printk format specifier:
s64 %lld or %llx
u64 %llu or %llx
If <type> is dependent on a config option for its size (e.g., sector_t,
blkcnt_t) or is architecture-dependent for its size (e.g., tcflag_t), use a
format specifier of its largest possible type and explicitly cast to it.
Example:
If <type> is dependent on a config option for its size (e.g., ``sector_t``,
``blkcnt_t``) or is architecture-dependent for its size (e.g., ``tcflag_t``),
use a format specifier of its largest possible type and explicitly cast to it.
Example::
printk("test: sector number/total blocks: %llu/%llu\n",
(unsigned long long)sector, (unsigned long long)blockcount);
Reminder: sizeof() result is of type size_t.
Reminder: ``sizeof()`` result is of type ``size_t``.
The kernel's printf does not support %n. For obvious reasons, floating
point formats (%e, %f, %g, %a) are also not recognized. Use of any
The kernel's printf does not support ``%n``. For obvious reasons, floating
point formats (``%e, %f, %g, %a``) are also not recognized. Use of any
unsupported specifier or length qualifier results in a WARN and early
return from vsnprintf.
Raw pointer value SHOULD be printed with %p. The kernel supports
the following extended format specifiers for pointer types:
Symbols/Function Pointers:
Symbols/Function Pointers
=========================
::
%pF versatile_init+0x0/0x110
%pf versatile_init
@ -41,99 +58,122 @@ Symbols/Function Pointers:
%ps versatile_init
%pB prev_fn_of_versatile_init+0x88/0x88
For printing symbols and function pointers. The 'S' and 's' specifiers
result in the symbol name with ('S') or without ('s') offsets. Where
this is used on a kernel without KALLSYMS - the symbol address is
printed instead.
For printing symbols and function pointers. The ``S`` and ``s`` specifiers
result in the symbol name with (``S``) or without (``s``) offsets. Where
this is used on a kernel without KALLSYMS - the symbol address is
printed instead.
The 'B' specifier results in the symbol name with offsets and should be
used when printing stack backtraces. The specifier takes into
consideration the effect of compiler optimisations which may occur
when tail-call's are used and marked with the noreturn GCC attribute.
The ``B`` specifier results in the symbol name with offsets and should be
used when printing stack backtraces. The specifier takes into
consideration the effect of compiler optimisations which may occur
when tail-call``s are used and marked with the noreturn GCC attribute.
On ia64, ppc64 and parisc64 architectures function pointers are
actually function descriptors which must first be resolved. The 'F' and
'f' specifiers perform this resolution and then provide the same
functionality as the 'S' and 's' specifiers.
On ia64, ppc64 and parisc64 architectures function pointers are
actually function descriptors which must first be resolved. The ``F`` and
``f`` specifiers perform this resolution and then provide the same
functionality as the ``S`` and ``s`` specifiers.
Kernel Pointers:
Kernel Pointers
===============
::
%pK 0x01234567 or 0x0123456789abcdef
For printing kernel pointers which should be hidden from unprivileged
users. The behaviour of %pK depends on the kptr_restrict sysctl - see
Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt for more details.
For printing kernel pointers which should be hidden from unprivileged
users. The behaviour of ``%pK`` depends on the ``kptr_restrict sysctl`` - see
Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt for more details.
Struct Resources:
Struct Resources
================
::
%pr [mem 0x60000000-0x6fffffff flags 0x2200] or
[mem 0x0000000060000000-0x000000006fffffff flags 0x2200]
%pR [mem 0x60000000-0x6fffffff pref] or
[mem 0x0000000060000000-0x000000006fffffff pref]
For printing struct resources. The 'R' and 'r' specifiers result in a
printed resource with ('R') or without ('r') a decoded flags member.
Passed by reference.
For printing struct resources. The ``R`` and ``r`` specifiers result in a
printed resource with (``R``) or without (``r``) a decoded flags member.
Passed by reference.
Physical addresses types phys_addr_t:
Physical addresses types ``phys_addr_t``
========================================
::
%pa[p] 0x01234567 or 0x0123456789abcdef
For printing a phys_addr_t type (and its derivatives, such as
resource_size_t) which can vary based on build options, regardless of
the width of the CPU data path. Passed by reference.
For printing a ``phys_addr_t`` type (and its derivatives, such as
``resource_size_t``) which can vary based on build options, regardless of
the width of the CPU data path. Passed by reference.
DMA addresses types dma_addr_t:
DMA addresses types ``dma_addr_t``
==================================
::
%pad 0x01234567 or 0x0123456789abcdef
For printing a dma_addr_t type which can vary based on build options,
regardless of the width of the CPU data path. Passed by reference.
For printing a ``dma_addr_t`` type which can vary based on build options,
regardless of the width of the CPU data path. Passed by reference.
Raw buffer as an escaped string:
Raw buffer as an escaped string
===============================
::
%*pE[achnops]
For printing raw buffer as an escaped string. For the following buffer
For printing raw buffer as an escaped string. For the following buffer::
1b 62 20 5c 43 07 22 90 0d 5d
few examples show how the conversion would be done (the result string
without surrounding quotes):
few examples show how the conversion would be done (the result string
without surrounding quotes)::
%*pE "\eb \C\a"\220\r]"
%*pEhp "\x1bb \C\x07"\x90\x0d]"
%*pEa "\e\142\040\\\103\a\042\220\r\135"
The conversion rules are applied according to an optional combination
of flags (see string_escape_mem() kernel documentation for the
details):
a - ESCAPE_ANY
c - ESCAPE_SPECIAL
h - ESCAPE_HEX
n - ESCAPE_NULL
o - ESCAPE_OCTAL
p - ESCAPE_NP
s - ESCAPE_SPACE
By default ESCAPE_ANY_NP is used.
The conversion rules are applied according to an optional combination
of flags (see :c:func:`string_escape_mem` kernel documentation for the
details):
ESCAPE_ANY_NP is the sane choice for many cases, in particularly for
printing SSIDs.
- ``a`` - ESCAPE_ANY
- ``c`` - ESCAPE_SPECIAL
- ``h`` - ESCAPE_HEX
- ``n`` - ESCAPE_NULL
- ``o`` - ESCAPE_OCTAL
- ``p`` - ESCAPE_NP
- ``s`` - ESCAPE_SPACE
If field width is omitted the 1 byte only will be escaped.
By default ESCAPE_ANY_NP is used.
Raw buffer as a hex string:
ESCAPE_ANY_NP is the sane choice for many cases, in particularly for
printing SSIDs.
If field width is omitted the 1 byte only will be escaped.
Raw buffer as a hex string
==========================
::
%*ph 00 01 02 ... 3f
%*phC 00:01:02: ... :3f
%*phD 00-01-02- ... -3f
%*phN 000102 ... 3f
For printing a small buffers (up to 64 bytes long) as a hex string with
certain separator. For the larger buffers consider to use
print_hex_dump().
For printing a small buffers (up to 64 bytes long) as a hex string with
certain separator. For the larger buffers consider to use
:c:func:`print_hex_dump`.
MAC/FDDI addresses:
MAC/FDDI addresses
==================
::
%pM 00:01:02:03:04:05
%pMR 05:04:03:02:01:00
@ -141,53 +181,62 @@ MAC/FDDI addresses:
%pm 000102030405
%pmR 050403020100
For printing 6-byte MAC/FDDI addresses in hex notation. The 'M' and 'm'
specifiers result in a printed address with ('M') or without ('m') byte
separators. The default byte separator is the colon (':').
For printing 6-byte MAC/FDDI addresses in hex notation. The ``M`` and ``m``
specifiers result in a printed address with (``M``) or without (``m``) byte
separators. The default byte separator is the colon (``:``).
Where FDDI addresses are concerned the 'F' specifier can be used after
the 'M' specifier to use dash ('-') separators instead of the default
separator.
Where FDDI addresses are concerned the ``F`` specifier can be used after
the ``M`` specifier to use dash (``-``) separators instead of the default
separator.
For Bluetooth addresses the 'R' specifier shall be used after the 'M'
specifier to use reversed byte order suitable for visual interpretation
of Bluetooth addresses which are in the little endian order.
For Bluetooth addresses the ``R`` specifier shall be used after the ``M``
specifier to use reversed byte order suitable for visual interpretation
of Bluetooth addresses which are in the little endian order.
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
IPv4 addresses:
IPv4 addresses
==============
::
%pI4 1.2.3.4
%pi4 001.002.003.004
%p[Ii]4[hnbl]
For printing IPv4 dot-separated decimal addresses. The 'I4' and 'i4'
specifiers result in a printed address with ('i4') or without ('I4')
leading zeros.
For printing IPv4 dot-separated decimal addresses. The ``I4`` and ``i4``
specifiers result in a printed address with (``i4``) or without (``I4``)
leading zeros.
The additional 'h', 'n', 'b', and 'l' specifiers are used to specify
host, network, big or little endian order addresses respectively. Where
no specifier is provided the default network/big endian order is used.
The additional ``h``, ``n``, ``b``, and ``l`` specifiers are used to specify
host, network, big or little endian order addresses respectively. Where
no specifier is provided the default network/big endian order is used.
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
IPv6 addresses:
IPv6 addresses
==============
::
%pI6 0001:0002:0003:0004:0005:0006:0007:0008
%pi6 00010002000300040005000600070008
%pI6c 1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8
For printing IPv6 network-order 16-bit hex addresses. The 'I6' and 'i6'
specifiers result in a printed address with ('I6') or without ('i6')
colon-separators. Leading zeros are always used.
For printing IPv6 network-order 16-bit hex addresses. The ``I6`` and ``i6``
specifiers result in a printed address with (``I6``) or without (``i6``)
colon-separators. Leading zeros are always used.
The additional 'c' specifier can be used with the 'I' specifier to
print a compressed IPv6 address as described by
http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5952
The additional ``c`` specifier can be used with the ``I`` specifier to
print a compressed IPv6 address as described by
http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5952
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
IPv4/IPv6 addresses (generic, with port, flowinfo, scope):
IPv4/IPv6 addresses (generic, with port, flowinfo, scope)
=========================================================
::
%pIS 1.2.3.4 or 0001:0002:0003:0004:0005:0006:0007:0008
%piS 001.002.003.004 or 00010002000300040005000600070008
@ -195,87 +244,103 @@ IPv4/IPv6 addresses (generic, with port, flowinfo, scope):
%pISpc 1.2.3.4:12345 or [1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8]:12345
%p[Ii]S[pfschnbl]
For printing an IP address without the need to distinguish whether it's
of type AF_INET or AF_INET6, a pointer to a valid 'struct sockaddr',
specified through 'IS' or 'iS', can be passed to this format specifier.
For printing an IP address without the need to distinguish whether it``s
of type AF_INET or AF_INET6, a pointer to a valid ``struct sockaddr``,
specified through ``IS`` or ``iS``, can be passed to this format specifier.
The additional 'p', 'f', and 's' specifiers are used to specify port
(IPv4, IPv6), flowinfo (IPv6) and scope (IPv6). Ports have a ':' prefix,
flowinfo a '/' and scope a '%', each followed by the actual value.
The additional ``p``, ``f``, and ``s`` specifiers are used to specify port
(IPv4, IPv6), flowinfo (IPv6) and scope (IPv6). Ports have a ``:`` prefix,
flowinfo a ``/`` and scope a ``%``, each followed by the actual value.
In case of an IPv6 address the compressed IPv6 address as described by
http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5952 is being used if the additional
specifier 'c' is given. The IPv6 address is surrounded by '[', ']' in
case of additional specifiers 'p', 'f' or 's' as suggested by
https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-6man-text-addr-representation-07
In case of an IPv6 address the compressed IPv6 address as described by
http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5952 is being used if the additional
specifier ``c`` is given. The IPv6 address is surrounded by ``[``, ``]`` in
case of additional specifiers ``p``, ``f`` or ``s`` as suggested by
https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-6man-text-addr-representation-07
In case of IPv4 addresses, the additional 'h', 'n', 'b', and 'l'
specifiers can be used as well and are ignored in case of an IPv6
address.
In case of IPv4 addresses, the additional ``h``, ``n``, ``b``, and ``l``
specifiers can be used as well and are ignored in case of an IPv6
address.
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
Further examples:
Further examples::
%pISfc 1.2.3.4 or [1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8]/123456789
%pISsc 1.2.3.4 or [1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8]%1234567890
%pISpfc 1.2.3.4:12345 or [1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8]:12345/123456789
UUID/GUID addresses:
UUID/GUID addresses
===================
::
%pUb 00010203-0405-0607-0809-0a0b0c0d0e0f
%pUB 00010203-0405-0607-0809-0A0B0C0D0E0F
%pUl 03020100-0504-0706-0809-0a0b0c0e0e0f
%pUL 03020100-0504-0706-0809-0A0B0C0E0E0F
For printing 16-byte UUID/GUIDs addresses. The additional 'l', 'L',
'b' and 'B' specifiers are used to specify a little endian order in
lower ('l') or upper case ('L') hex characters - and big endian order
in lower ('b') or upper case ('B') hex characters.
For printing 16-byte UUID/GUIDs addresses. The additional 'l', 'L',
'b' and 'B' specifiers are used to specify a little endian order in
lower ('l') or upper case ('L') hex characters - and big endian order
in lower ('b') or upper case ('B') hex characters.
Where no additional specifiers are used the default big endian
order with lower case hex characters will be printed.
Where no additional specifiers are used the default big endian
order with lower case hex characters will be printed.
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
dentry names:
dentry names
============
::
%pd{,2,3,4}
%pD{,2,3,4}
For printing dentry name; if we race with d_move(), the name might be
a mix of old and new ones, but it won't oops. %pd dentry is a safer
equivalent of %s dentry->d_name.name we used to use, %pd<n> prints
n last components. %pD does the same thing for struct file.
For printing dentry name; if we race with :c:func:`d_move`, the name might be
a mix of old and new ones, but it won't oops. ``%pd`` dentry is a safer
equivalent of ``%s`` ``dentry->d_name.name`` we used to use, ``%pd<n>`` prints
``n`` last components. ``%pD`` does the same thing for struct file.
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
block_device names:
block_device names
==================
::
%pg sda, sda1 or loop0p1
For printing name of block_device pointers.
For printing name of block_device pointers.
struct va_format:
struct va_format
================
::
%pV
For printing struct va_format structures. These contain a format string
and va_list as follows:
For printing struct va_format structures. These contain a format string
and va_list as follows::
struct va_format {
const char *fmt;
va_list *va;
};
Implements a "recursive vsnprintf".
Implements a "recursive vsnprintf".
Do not use this feature without some mechanism to verify the
correctness of the format string and va_list arguments.
Do not use this feature without some mechanism to verify the
correctness of the format string and va_list arguments.
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
kobjects
========
::
kobjects:
%pO
Base specifier for kobject based structs. Must be followed with
@ -311,61 +376,70 @@ kobjects:
Passed by reference.
struct clk:
struct clk
==========
::
%pC pll1
%pCn pll1
%pCr 1560000000
For printing struct clk structures. '%pC' and '%pCn' print the name
(Common Clock Framework) or address (legacy clock framework) of the
structure; '%pCr' prints the current clock rate.
For printing struct clk structures. ``%pC`` and ``%pCn`` print the name
(Common Clock Framework) or address (legacy clock framework) of the
structure; ``%pCr`` prints the current clock rate.
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
bitmap and its derivatives such as cpumask and nodemask:
bitmap and its derivatives such as cpumask and nodemask
=======================================================
::
%*pb 0779
%*pbl 0,3-6,8-10
For printing bitmap and its derivatives such as cpumask and nodemask,
%*pb output the bitmap with field width as the number of bits and %*pbl
output the bitmap as range list with field width as the number of bits.
For printing bitmap and its derivatives such as cpumask and nodemask,
``%*pb`` output the bitmap with field width as the number of bits and ``%*pbl``
output the bitmap as range list with field width as the number of bits.
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
Flags bitfields such as page flags, gfp_flags:
Flags bitfields such as page flags, gfp_flags
=============================================
::
%pGp referenced|uptodate|lru|active|private
%pGg GFP_USER|GFP_DMA32|GFP_NOWARN
%pGv read|exec|mayread|maywrite|mayexec|denywrite
For printing flags bitfields as a collection of symbolic constants that
would construct the value. The type of flags is given by the third
character. Currently supported are [p]age flags, [v]ma_flags (both
expect unsigned long *) and [g]fp_flags (expects gfp_t *). The flag
names and print order depends on the particular type.
For printing flags bitfields as a collection of symbolic constants that
would construct the value. The type of flags is given by the third
character. Currently supported are [p]age flags, [v]ma_flags (both
expect ``unsigned long *``) and [g]fp_flags (expects ``gfp_t *``). The flag
names and print order depends on the particular type.
Note that this format should not be used directly in TP_printk() part
of a tracepoint. Instead, use the show_*_flags() functions from
<trace/events/mmflags.h>.
Note that this format should not be used directly in :c:func:`TP_printk()` part
of a tracepoint. Instead, use the ``show_*_flags()`` functions from
<trace/events/mmflags.h>.
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
Network device features:
Network device features
=======================
::
%pNF 0x000000000000c000
For printing netdev_features_t.
For printing netdev_features_t.
Passed by reference.
Passed by reference.
If you add other %p extensions, please extend lib/test_printf.c with
If you add other ``%p`` extensions, please extend lib/test_printf.c with
one or more test cases, if at all feasible.
Thank you for your cooperation and attention.
By Randy Dunlap <rdunlap@infradead.org> and
Andrew Murray <amurray@mpc-data.co.uk>

46
Documentation/pwm.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
======================================
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) interface
======================================
This provides an overview about the Linux PWM interface
@ -16,7 +18,7 @@ Users of the legacy PWM API use unique IDs to refer to PWM devices.
Instead of referring to a PWM device via its unique ID, board setup code
should instead register a static mapping that can be used to match PWM
consumers to providers, as given in the following example:
consumers to providers, as given in the following example::
static struct pwm_lookup board_pwm_lookup[] = {
PWM_LOOKUP("tegra-pwm", 0, "pwm-backlight", NULL,
@ -40,9 +42,9 @@ New users should use the pwm_get() function and pass to it the consumer
device or a consumer name. pwm_put() is used to free the PWM device. Managed
variants of these functions, devm_pwm_get() and devm_pwm_put(), also exist.
After being requested, a PWM has to be configured using:
After being requested, a PWM has to be configured using::
int pwm_apply_state(struct pwm_device *pwm, struct pwm_state *state);
int pwm_apply_state(struct pwm_device *pwm, struct pwm_state *state);
This API controls both the PWM period/duty_cycle config and the
enable/disable state.
@ -72,11 +74,14 @@ interface is provided to use the PWMs from userspace. It is exposed at
pwmchipN, where N is the base of the PWM chip. Inside the directory you
will find:
npwm - The number of PWM channels this chip supports (read-only).
npwm
The number of PWM channels this chip supports (read-only).
export - Exports a PWM channel for use with sysfs (write-only).
export
Exports a PWM channel for use with sysfs (write-only).
unexport - Unexports a PWM channel from sysfs (write-only).
unexport
Unexports a PWM channel from sysfs (write-only).
The PWM channels are numbered using a per-chip index from 0 to npwm-1.
@ -84,21 +89,26 @@ When a PWM channel is exported a pwmX directory will be created in the
pwmchipN directory it is associated with, where X is the number of the
channel that was exported. The following properties will then be available:
period - The total period of the PWM signal (read/write).
Value is in nanoseconds and is the sum of the active and inactive
time of the PWM.
period
The total period of the PWM signal (read/write).
Value is in nanoseconds and is the sum of the active and inactive
time of the PWM.
duty_cycle - The active time of the PWM signal (read/write).
Value is in nanoseconds and must be less than the period.
duty_cycle
The active time of the PWM signal (read/write).
Value is in nanoseconds and must be less than the period.
polarity - Changes the polarity of the PWM signal (read/write).
Writes to this property only work if the PWM chip supports changing
the polarity. The polarity can only be changed if the PWM is not
enabled. Value is the string "normal" or "inversed".
polarity
Changes the polarity of the PWM signal (read/write).
Writes to this property only work if the PWM chip supports changing
the polarity. The polarity can only be changed if the PWM is not
enabled. Value is the string "normal" or "inversed".
enable - Enable/disable the PWM signal (read/write).
0 - disabled
1 - enabled
enable
Enable/disable the PWM signal (read/write).
- 0 - disabled
- 1 - enabled
Implementing a PWM driver
-------------------------

88
Documentation/rbtree.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
=================================
Red-black Trees (rbtree) in Linux
January 18, 2007
Rob Landley <rob@landley.net>
=============================
=================================
:Date: January 18, 2007
:Author: Rob Landley <rob@landley.net>
What are red-black trees, and what are they for?
------------------------------------------------
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ user of the rbtree code.
Creating a new rbtree
---------------------
Data nodes in an rbtree tree are structures containing a struct rb_node member:
Data nodes in an rbtree tree are structures containing a struct rb_node member::
struct mytype {
struct rb_node node;
@ -78,7 +81,7 @@ Searching for a value in an rbtree
Writing a search function for your tree is fairly straightforward: start at the
root, compare each value, and follow the left or right branch as necessary.
Example:
Example::
struct mytype *my_search(struct rb_root *root, char *string)
{
@ -110,7 +113,7 @@ The search for insertion differs from the previous search by finding the
location of the pointer on which to graft the new node. The new node also
needs a link to its parent node for rebalancing purposes.
Example:
Example::
int my_insert(struct rb_root *root, struct mytype *data)
{
@ -140,11 +143,11 @@ Example:
Removing or replacing existing data in an rbtree
------------------------------------------------
To remove an existing node from a tree, call:
To remove an existing node from a tree, call::
void rb_erase(struct rb_node *victim, struct rb_root *tree);
Example:
Example::
struct mytype *data = mysearch(&mytree, "walrus");
@ -153,7 +156,7 @@ Example:
myfree(data);
}
To replace an existing node in a tree with a new one with the same key, call:
To replace an existing node in a tree with a new one with the same key, call::
void rb_replace_node(struct rb_node *old, struct rb_node *new,
struct rb_root *tree);
@ -166,7 +169,7 @@ Iterating through the elements stored in an rbtree (in sort order)
Four functions are provided for iterating through an rbtree's contents in
sorted order. These work on arbitrary trees, and should not need to be
modified or wrapped (except for locking purposes):
modified or wrapped (except for locking purposes)::
struct rb_node *rb_first(struct rb_root *tree);
struct rb_node *rb_last(struct rb_root *tree);
@ -184,7 +187,7 @@ which the containing data structure may be accessed with the container_of()
macro, and individual members may be accessed directly via
rb_entry(node, type, member).
Example:
Example::
struct rb_node *node;
for (node = rb_first(&mytree); node; node = rb_next(node))
@ -241,7 +244,8 @@ user should have a single rb_erase_augmented() call site in order to limit
compiled code size.
Sample usage:
Sample usage
^^^^^^^^^^^^
Interval tree is an example of augmented rb tree. Reference -
"Introduction to Algorithms" by Cormen, Leiserson, Rivest and Stein.
@ -259,12 +263,12 @@ This "extra information" stored in each node is the maximum hi
information can be maintained at each node just be looking at the node
and its immediate children. And this will be used in O(log n) lookup
for lowest match (lowest start address among all possible matches)
with something like:
with something like::
struct interval_tree_node *
interval_tree_first_match(struct rb_root *root,
unsigned long start, unsigned long last)
{
struct interval_tree_node *
interval_tree_first_match(struct rb_root *root,
unsigned long start, unsigned long last)
{
struct interval_tree_node *node;
if (!root->rb_node)
@ -301,13 +305,13 @@ interval_tree_first_match(struct rb_root *root,
}
return NULL; /* No match */
}
}
}
Insertion/removal are defined using the following augmented callbacks:
Insertion/removal are defined using the following augmented callbacks::
static inline unsigned long
compute_subtree_last(struct interval_tree_node *node)
{
static inline unsigned long
compute_subtree_last(struct interval_tree_node *node)
{
unsigned long max = node->last, subtree_last;
if (node->rb.rb_left) {
subtree_last = rb_entry(node->rb.rb_left,
@ -322,10 +326,10 @@ compute_subtree_last(struct interval_tree_node *node)
max = subtree_last;
}
return max;
}
}
static void augment_propagate(struct rb_node *rb, struct rb_node *stop)
{
static void augment_propagate(struct rb_node *rb, struct rb_node *stop)
{
while (rb != stop) {
struct interval_tree_node *node =
rb_entry(rb, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
@ -335,20 +339,20 @@ static void augment_propagate(struct rb_node *rb, struct rb_node *stop)
node->__subtree_last = subtree_last;
rb = rb_parent(&node->rb);
}
}
}
static void augment_copy(struct rb_node *rb_old, struct rb_node *rb_new)
{
static void augment_copy(struct rb_node *rb_old, struct rb_node *rb_new)
{
struct interval_tree_node *old =
rb_entry(rb_old, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
struct interval_tree_node *new =
rb_entry(rb_new, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
new->__subtree_last = old->__subtree_last;
}
}
static void augment_rotate(struct rb_node *rb_old, struct rb_node *rb_new)
{
static void augment_rotate(struct rb_node *rb_old, struct rb_node *rb_new)
{
struct interval_tree_node *old =
rb_entry(rb_old, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
struct interval_tree_node *new =
@ -356,15 +360,15 @@ static void augment_rotate(struct rb_node *rb_old, struct rb_node *rb_new)
new->__subtree_last = old->__subtree_last;
old->__subtree_last = compute_subtree_last(old);
}
}
static const struct rb_augment_callbacks augment_callbacks = {
static const struct rb_augment_callbacks augment_callbacks = {
augment_propagate, augment_copy, augment_rotate
};
};
void interval_tree_insert(struct interval_tree_node *node,
struct rb_root *root)
{
void interval_tree_insert(struct interval_tree_node *node,
struct rb_root *root)
{
struct rb_node **link = &root->rb_node, *rb_parent = NULL;
unsigned long start = node->start, last = node->last;
struct interval_tree_node *parent;
@ -383,10 +387,10 @@ void interval_tree_insert(struct interval_tree_node *node,
node->__subtree_last = last;
rb_link_node(&node->rb, rb_parent, link);
rb_insert_augmented(&node->rb, root, &augment_callbacks);
}
}
void interval_tree_remove(struct interval_tree_node *node,
struct rb_root *root)
{
void interval_tree_remove(struct interval_tree_node *node,
struct rb_root *root)
{
rb_erase_augmented(&node->rb, root, &augment_callbacks);
}
}

316
Documentation/remoteproc.txt
View File

@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
==========================
Remote Processor Framework
==========================
1. Introduction
Introduction
============
Modern SoCs typically have heterogeneous remote processor devices in asymmetric
multiprocessing (AMP) configurations, which may be running different instances
@ -26,44 +29,62 @@ remoteproc will add those devices. This makes it possible to reuse the
existing virtio drivers with remote processor backends at a minimal development
cost.
2. User API
User API
========
::
int rproc_boot(struct rproc *rproc)
- Boot a remote processor (i.e. load its firmware, power it on, ...).
If the remote processor is already powered on, this function immediately
returns (successfully).
Returns 0 on success, and an appropriate error value otherwise.
Note: to use this function you should already have a valid rproc
handle. There are several ways to achieve that cleanly (devres, pdata,
the way remoteproc_rpmsg.c does this, or, if this becomes prevalent, we
might also consider using dev_archdata for this).
Boot a remote processor (i.e. load its firmware, power it on, ...).
If the remote processor is already powered on, this function immediately
returns (successfully).
Returns 0 on success, and an appropriate error value otherwise.
Note: to use this function you should already have a valid rproc
handle. There are several ways to achieve that cleanly (devres, pdata,
the way remoteproc_rpmsg.c does this, or, if this becomes prevalent, we
might also consider using dev_archdata for this).
::
void rproc_shutdown(struct rproc *rproc)
- Power off a remote processor (previously booted with rproc_boot()).
In case @rproc is still being used by an additional user(s), then
this function will just decrement the power refcount and exit,
without really powering off the device.
Every call to rproc_boot() must (eventually) be accompanied by a call
to rproc_shutdown(). Calling rproc_shutdown() redundantly is a bug.
Notes:
- we're not decrementing the rproc's refcount, only the power refcount.
which means that the @rproc handle stays valid even after
rproc_shutdown() returns, and users can still use it with a subsequent
rproc_boot(), if needed.
Power off a remote processor (previously booted with rproc_boot()).
In case @rproc is still being used by an additional user(s), then
this function will just decrement the power refcount and exit,
without really powering off the device.
Every call to rproc_boot() must (eventually) be accompanied by a call
to rproc_shutdown(). Calling rproc_shutdown() redundantly is a bug.
.. note::
we're not decrementing the rproc's refcount, only the power refcount.
which means that the @rproc handle stays valid even after
rproc_shutdown() returns, and users can still use it with a subsequent
rproc_boot(), if needed.
::
struct rproc *rproc_get_by_phandle(phandle phandle)
- Find an rproc handle using a device tree phandle. Returns the rproc
handle on success, and NULL on failure. This function increments
the remote processor's refcount, so always use rproc_put() to
decrement it back once rproc isn't needed anymore.
3. Typical usage
Find an rproc handle using a device tree phandle. Returns the rproc
handle on success, and NULL on failure. This function increments
the remote processor's refcount, so always use rproc_put() to
decrement it back once rproc isn't needed anymore.
#include <linux/remoteproc.h>
Typical usage
=============
/* in case we were given a valid 'rproc' handle */
int dummy_rproc_example(struct rproc *my_rproc)
{
::
#include <linux/remoteproc.h>
/* in case we were given a valid 'rproc' handle */
int dummy_rproc_example(struct rproc *my_rproc)
{
int ret;
/* let's power on and boot our remote processor */
@ -80,84 +101,111 @@ int dummy_rproc_example(struct rproc *my_rproc)
/* let's shut it down now */
rproc_shutdown(my_rproc);
}
}
4. API for implementors
API for implementors
====================
::
struct rproc *rproc_alloc(struct device *dev, const char *name,
const struct rproc_ops *ops,
const char *firmware, int len)
- Allocate a new remote processor handle, but don't register
it yet. Required parameters are the underlying device, the
name of this remote processor, platform-specific ops handlers,
the name of the firmware to boot this rproc with, and the
length of private data needed by the allocating rproc driver (in bytes).
This function should be used by rproc implementations during
initialization of the remote processor.
After creating an rproc handle using this function, and when ready,
implementations should then call rproc_add() to complete
the registration of the remote processor.
On success, the new rproc is returned, and on failure, NULL.
Allocate a new remote processor handle, but don't register
it yet. Required parameters are the underlying device, the
name of this remote processor, platform-specific ops handlers,
the name of the firmware to boot this rproc with, and the
length of private data needed by the allocating rproc driver (in bytes).
Note: _never_ directly deallocate @rproc, even if it was not registered
yet. Instead, when you need to unroll rproc_alloc(), use rproc_free().
This function should be used by rproc implementations during
initialization of the remote processor.
After creating an rproc handle using this function, and when ready,
implementations should then call rproc_add() to complete
the registration of the remote processor.
On success, the new rproc is returned, and on failure, NULL.
.. note::
**never** directly deallocate @rproc, even if it was not registered
yet. Instead, when you need to unroll rproc_alloc(), use rproc_free().
::
void rproc_free(struct rproc *rproc)
- Free an rproc handle that was allocated by rproc_alloc.
This function essentially unrolls rproc_alloc(), by decrementing the
rproc's refcount. It doesn't directly free rproc; that would happen
only if there are no other references to rproc and its refcount now
dropped to zero.
Free an rproc handle that was allocated by rproc_alloc.
This function essentially unrolls rproc_alloc(), by decrementing the
rproc's refcount. It doesn't directly free rproc; that would happen
only if there are no other references to rproc and its refcount now
dropped to zero.
::
int rproc_add(struct rproc *rproc)
- Register @rproc with the remoteproc framework, after it has been
allocated with rproc_alloc().
This is called by the platform-specific rproc implementation, whenever
a new remote processor device is probed.
Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise.
Note: this function initiates an asynchronous firmware loading
context, which will look for virtio devices supported by the rproc's
firmware.
If found, those virtio devices will be created and added, so as a result
of registering this remote processor, additional virtio drivers might get
probed.
Register @rproc with the remoteproc framework, after it has been
allocated with rproc_alloc().
This is called by the platform-specific rproc implementation, whenever
a new remote processor device is probed.
Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise.
Note: this function initiates an asynchronous firmware loading
context, which will look for virtio devices supported by the rproc's
firmware.
If found, those virtio devices will be created and added, so as a result
of registering this remote processor, additional virtio drivers might get
probed.
::
int rproc_del(struct rproc *rproc)
- Unroll rproc_add().
This function should be called when the platform specific rproc
implementation decides to remove the rproc device. it should
_only_ be called if a previous invocation of rproc_add()
has completed successfully.
After rproc_del() returns, @rproc is still valid, and its
last refcount should be decremented by calling rproc_free().
Unroll rproc_add().
Returns 0 on success and -EINVAL if @rproc isn't valid.
This function should be called when the platform specific rproc
implementation decides to remove the rproc device. it should
_only_ be called if a previous invocation of rproc_add()
has completed successfully.
After rproc_del() returns, @rproc is still valid, and its
last refcount should be decremented by calling rproc_free().
Returns 0 on success and -EINVAL if @rproc isn't valid.
::
void rproc_report_crash(struct rproc *rproc, enum rproc_crash_type type)
- Report a crash in a remoteproc
This function must be called every time a crash is detected by the
platform specific rproc implementation. This should not be called from a
non-remoteproc driver. This function can be called from atomic/interrupt
context.
5. Implementation callbacks
Report a crash in a remoteproc
This function must be called every time a crash is detected by the
platform specific rproc implementation. This should not be called from a
non-remoteproc driver. This function can be called from atomic/interrupt
context.
Implementation callbacks
========================
These callbacks should be provided by platform-specific remoteproc
drivers:
drivers::
/**
* struct rproc_ops - platform-specific device handlers
* @start: power on the device and boot it
* @stop: power off the device
* @kick: kick a virtqueue (virtqueue id given as a parameter)
*/
struct rproc_ops {
/**
* struct rproc_ops - platform-specific device handlers
* @start: power on the device and boot it
* @stop: power off the device
* @kick: kick a virtqueue (virtqueue id given as a parameter)
*/
struct rproc_ops {
int (*start)(struct rproc *rproc);
int (*stop)(struct rproc *rproc);
void (*kick)(struct rproc *rproc, int vqid);
};
};
Every remoteproc implementation should at least provide the ->start and ->stop
handlers. If rpmsg/virtio functionality is also desired, then the ->kick handler
@ -179,7 +227,8 @@ the exact virtqueue index to look in is optional: it is easy (and not
too expensive) to go through the existing virtqueues and look for new buffers
in the used rings.
6. Binary Firmware Structure
Binary Firmware Structure
=========================
At this point remoteproc only supports ELF32 firmware binaries. However,
it is quite expected that other platforms/devices which we'd want to
@ -207,43 +256,43 @@ resource entries that publish the existence of supported features
or configurations by the remote processor, such as trace buffers and
supported virtio devices (and their configurations).
The resource table begins with this header:
The resource table begins with this header::
/**
* struct resource_table - firmware resource table header
* @ver: version number
* @num: number of resource entries
* @reserved: reserved (must be zero)
* @offset: array of offsets pointing at the various resource entries
*
* The header of the resource table, as expressed by this structure,
* contains a version number (should we need to change this format in the
* future), the number of available resource entries, and their offsets
* in the table.
*/
struct resource_table {
/**
* struct resource_table - firmware resource table header
* @ver: version number
* @num: number of resource entries
* @reserved: reserved (must be zero)
* @offset: array of offsets pointing at the various resource entries
*
* The header of the resource table, as expressed by this structure,
* contains a version number (should we need to change this format in the
* future), the number of available resource entries, and their offsets
* in the table.
*/
struct resource_table {
u32 ver;
u32 num;
u32 reserved[2];
u32 offset[0];
} __packed;
} __packed;
Immediately following this header are the resource entries themselves,
each of which begins with the following resource entry header:
each of which begins with the following resource entry header::
/**
* struct fw_rsc_hdr - firmware resource entry header
* @type: resource type
* @data: resource data
*
* Every resource entry begins with a 'struct fw_rsc_hdr' header providing
* its @type. The content of the entry itself will immediately follow
* this header, and it should be parsed according to the resource type.
*/
struct fw_rsc_hdr {
/**
* struct fw_rsc_hdr - firmware resource entry header
* @type: resource type
* @data: resource data
*
* Every resource entry begins with a 'struct fw_rsc_hdr' header providing
* its @type. The content of the entry itself will immediately follow
* this header, and it should be parsed according to the resource type.
*/
struct fw_rsc_hdr {
u32 type;
u8 data[0];
} __packed;
} __packed;
Some resources entries are mere announcements, where the host is informed
of specific remoteproc configuration. Other entries require the host to
@ -252,32 +301,32 @@ is expected, where the firmware requests a resource, and once allocated,
the host should provide back its details (e.g. address of an allocated
memory region).
Here are the various resource types that are currently supported:
Here are the various resource types that are currently supported::
/**
* enum fw_resource_type - types of resource entries
*
* @RSC_CARVEOUT: request for allocation of a physically contiguous
* memory region.
* @RSC_DEVMEM: request to iommu_map a memory-based peripheral.
* @RSC_TRACE: announces the availability of a trace buffer into which
* the remote processor will be writing logs.
* @RSC_VDEV: declare support for a virtio device, and serve as its
* virtio header.
* @RSC_LAST: just keep this one at the end
*
* Please note that these values are used as indices to the rproc_handle_rsc
* lookup table, so please keep them sane. Moreover, @RSC_LAST is used to
* check the validity of an index before the lookup table is accessed, so
* please update it as needed.
*/
enum fw_resource_type {
/**
* enum fw_resource_type - types of resource entries
*
* @RSC_CARVEOUT: request for allocation of a physically contiguous
* memory region.
* @RSC_DEVMEM: request to iommu_map a memory-based peripheral.
* @RSC_TRACE: announces the availability of a trace buffer into which
* the remote processor will be writing logs.
* @RSC_VDEV: declare support for a virtio device, and serve as its
* virtio header.
* @RSC_LAST: just keep this one at the end
*
* Please note that these values are used as indices to the rproc_handle_rsc
* lookup table, so please keep them sane. Moreover, @RSC_LAST is used to
* check the validity of an index before the lookup table is accessed, so
* please update it as needed.
*/
enum fw_resource_type {
RSC_CARVEOUT = 0,
RSC_DEVMEM = 1,
RSC_TRACE = 2,
RSC_VDEV = 3,
RSC_LAST = 4,
};
};
For more details regarding a specific resource type, please see its
dedicated structure in include/linux/remoteproc.h.
@ -286,7 +335,8 @@ We also expect that platform-specific resource entries will show up
at some point. When that happens, we could easily add a new RSC_PLATFORM
type, and hand those resources to the platform-specific rproc driver to handle.
7. Virtio and remoteproc
Virtio and remoteproc
=====================
The firmware should provide remoteproc information about virtio devices
that it supports, and their configurations: a RSC_VDEV resource entry

43
Documentation/rfkill.txt
View File

@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
===============================
rfkill - RF kill switch support
===============================
1. Introduction
2. Implementation details
3. Kernel API
4. Userspace support
.. contents::
:depth: 2
1. Introduction
Introduction
============
The rfkill subsystem provides a generic interface to disabling any radio
transmitter in the system. When a transmitter is blocked, it shall not
@ -21,17 +21,24 @@ aircraft.
The rfkill subsystem has a concept of "hard" and "soft" block, which
differ little in their meaning (block == transmitters off) but rather in
whether they can be changed or not:
- hard block: read-only radio block that cannot be overridden by software
- soft block: writable radio block (need not be readable) that is set by
the system software.
- hard block
read-only radio block that cannot be overridden by software
- soft block
writable radio block (need not be readable) that is set by
the system software.
The rfkill subsystem has two parameters, rfkill.default_state and
rfkill.master_switch_mode, which are documented in admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst.
rfkill.master_switch_mode, which are documented in
admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst.
2. Implementation details
Implementation details
======================
The rfkill subsystem is composed of three main components:
* the rfkill core,
* the deprecated rfkill-input module (an input layer handler, being
replaced by userspace policy code) and
@ -55,7 +62,8 @@ use the return value of rfkill_set_hw_state() unless the hardware actually
keeps track of soft and hard block separately.
3. Kernel API
Kernel API
==========
Drivers for radio transmitters normally implement an rfkill driver.
@ -69,7 +77,7 @@ For some platforms, it is possible that the hardware state changes during
suspend/hibernation, in which case it will be necessary to update the rfkill
core with the current state is at resume time.
To create an rfkill driver, driver's Kconfig needs to have
To create an rfkill driver, driver's Kconfig needs to have::
depends on RFKILL || !RFKILL
@ -87,7 +95,8 @@ RFKill provides per-switch LED triggers, which can be used to drive LEDs
according to the switch state (LED_FULL when blocked, LED_OFF otherwise).
5. Userspace support
Userspace support
=================
The recommended userspace interface to use is /dev/rfkill, which is a misc
character device that allows userspace to obtain and set the state of rfkill
@ -112,11 +121,11 @@ rfkill core framework.
Additionally, each rfkill device is registered in sysfs and emits uevents.
rfkill devices issue uevents (with an action of "change"), with the following
environment variables set:
environment variables set::
RFKILL_NAME
RFKILL_STATE
RFKILL_TYPE
RFKILL_NAME
RFKILL_STATE
RFKILL_TYPE
The contents of these variables corresponds to the "name", "state" and
"type" sysfs files explained above.

14
Documentation/robust-futex-ABI.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
Started by Paul Jackson <pj@sgi.com>
====================
The robust futex ABI
--------------------
====================
:Author: Started by Paul Jackson <pj@sgi.com>
Robust_futexes provide a mechanism that is used in addition to normal
futexes, for kernel assist of cleanup of held locks on task exit.
@ -32,7 +34,7 @@ probably causing deadlock or other such failure of the other threads
waiting on the same locks.
A thread that anticipates possibly using robust_futexes should first
issue the system call:
issue the system call::
asmlinkage long
sys_set_robust_list(struct robust_list_head __user *head, size_t len);
@ -91,7 +93,7 @@ that lock using the futex mechanism.
When a thread has invoked the above system call to indicate it
anticipates using robust_futexes, the kernel stores the passed in 'head'
pointer for that task. The task may retrieve that value later on by
using the system call:
using the system call::
asmlinkage long
sys_get_robust_list(int pid, struct robust_list_head __user **head_ptr,
@ -135,6 +137,7 @@ manipulating this list), the user code must observe the following
protocol on 'lock entry' insertion and removal:
On insertion:
1) set the 'list_op_pending' word to the address of the 'lock entry'
to be inserted,
2) acquire the futex lock,
@ -143,6 +146,7 @@ On insertion:
4) clear the 'list_op_pending' word.
On removal:
1) set the 'list_op_pending' word to the address of the 'lock entry'
to be removed,
2) remove the lock entry for this lock from the 'head' list,

12
Documentation/robust-futexes.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,8 @@
Started by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
========================================
A description of what robust futexes are
========================================
:Started by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
Background
----------
@ -163,7 +167,7 @@ Implementation details
----------------------
The patch adds two new syscalls: one to register the userspace list, and
one to query the registered list pointer:
one to query the registered list pointer::
asmlinkage long
sys_set_robust_list(struct robust_list_head __user *head,
@ -185,7 +189,7 @@ straightforward. The kernel doesn't have any internal distinction between
robust and normal futexes.
If a futex is found to be held at exit time, the kernel sets the
following bit of the futex word:
following bit of the futex word::
#define FUTEX_OWNER_DIED 0x40000000
@ -193,7 +197,7 @@ and wakes up the next futex waiter (if any). User-space does the rest of
the cleanup.
Otherwise, robust futexes are acquired by glibc by putting the TID into
the futex field atomically. Waiters set the FUTEX_WAITERS bit:
the futex field atomically. Waiters set the FUTEX_WAITERS bit::
#define FUTEX_WAITERS 0x80000000

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More